You are on page 1of 378

User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

User's Guide to OS/2 WARP


Book Cover

Book Cover
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
User's Guide to OS/2 WARP Version 3

Document Number S83G-8300-00

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Notices

+--- Note -----------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure ¦
¦ to read the general information under Appendix B, "Notices" in ¦
¦ topic B.0. ¦
¦ ¦
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+

Edition Notice
First Edition (October 1994)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do
not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions,
therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.


Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at
any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information


about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not
announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to
mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in
your country.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM
authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1994. All rights


reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted rights --
Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 1 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Contributors

FRONT_1 Contributors
Authors

Linda S. Rogers
Lisa DeMeo
Karla Stagray

Contributing Authors

Su Hill
Val Enright
David Spicer
Marion Lindsey
Lana Meadows
Kathy Hancock

Editors

Elizabeth Jean
Tracey Marcelo
Roger Didio

Design

Brian Black
Jeff Lewis

National Language Support

Joseph Hunt
Mike Cress
Gene Ignatowski

Publications Manager

John D. Lloyd

Managing Editor

Dan Baker

Publishing Assistant Editor

Linda S. Rogers

Editorial Assistant

Victor Laird

Production Coordinator

Elyse Anchell

Tools Support

Gene Ignatowski

Rick Goldsmith

Usability Testing

Lynn VanDyke
Carol Righi
Alan Rose
John Tyler

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 2 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Summary of Contents

CONTENTS Summary of Contents


COVER Book Cover
NOTICES Notices
EDITION Edition Notice
FRONT_1 Contributors
CONTENTS Summary of Contents
PREFACE Welcome
PREFACE.1 About OS/2 Version 3
PREFACE.1.1 Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3
PREFACE.1.2 Performance
PREFACE.1.3 New Features
1.0 Part 1- Installing OS/2
1.1 Chapter 1. As You Begin
1.1.1 Preparing Your System
1.1.2 Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation
1.2 Chapter 2. Using Easy Installation
1.2.1 Preparing for the Installation
1.2.2 Installing the Operating System
1.2.3 Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot
1.2.3.1 Starting the Dual Boot Feature
1.2.3.2 Installing DOS after Installing OS/2
1.2.3.3 What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work
1.2.4 Using Windows Programs
1.2.4.1 Installing Windows after Installing OS/2
1.2.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation
2.0 Part 2 - Exploring OS/2
2.1 Chapter 3. Exploring the Desktop
2.1.1 Understanding Terminology
2.1.2 Using the Tutorial
2.1.3 Using the Desktop and Its Objects
2.1.3.1 Using Pop-up Menus
2.1.3.2 Using Settings Notebooks
2.1.4 Finding Information
2.1.4.1 Getting Help
2.1.4.2 Viewing Information Online
2.1.5 Using the LaunchPad
2.1.5.1 Using LaunchPad Push Buttons
2.1.6 Find Push Button
2.1.6.3 Using Objects on the LaunchPad
2.1.6.4 Adding Objects to the LaunchPad
3.0 Part 3 - Using OS/2
3.1 Chapter 4. Customizing Your System
3.1.1 Color Palette
3.1.1.1 Changing Screen Colors
3.1.1.2 Changing the Color of Object Titles
3.1.1.3 Changing the Colors on the Color Palette
3.1.2 Country
3.1.3 Device Driver Install
3.1.4 Font Palette
3.1.4.1 Changing Fonts
3.1.4.2 Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette
3.1.4.3 Adding Fonts to Your System
3.1.4.4 Removing Fonts from Your System
3.1.5 Keyboard
3.1.6 Add Programs

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 3 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.7 Mouse
3.1.8 Scheme Palette
3.1.8.1 Changing Color Schemes
3.1.8.2 Globally Changing Color Schemes
3.1.8.3 Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette
3.1.8.4 Changing the Fonts in a Scheme
3.1.9 Sound
3.1.10 Spooler
3.1.10.1 Enabling the Spooler
3.1.10.2 Changing the Spooler Path
3.1.10.3 Changing the Print Priority
3.1.10.4 Disabling the Spooler
3.1.11 System
3.1.11.1 Confirming Delete Actions
3.1.11.2 Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity
3.1.11.3 Resolving Title Conflicts
3.1.11.4 Changing System Defaults
3.1.11.5 Printing a Screen
3.1.11.6 Displaying Logos
3.1.11.7 Changing Screen Resolution
3.1.12 System Clock
3.1.13 WIN-OS/2 Setup
3.1.14 Power
3.1.14.1 Power Object
3.1.14.2 Power Settings
3.1.14.3 Power Status
3.1.14.4 Suspend Mode
3.1.15 Selective Install
3.1.15.1 Adding Options after Installation
3.1.15.2 Adding Online Documentation after Installation
3.1.15.3 Changing Display Adapter Support
3.1.15.4 Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation
3.1.16 PCMCIA
3.1.16.1 Installing PCMCIA
3.1.16.2 PCMCIA Components
3.1.16.3 Plug and Play for PCMCIA
3.1.16.4 Options
3.1.16.5 Object Launcher
3.1.17 Selective Uninstall
3.1.18 Create Utility Diskettes
3.2 Chapter 5. Starting Objects Automatically
3.2.1 Starting Programs Automatically
3.2.1.1 Startup Folder
3.2.1.2 STARTUP.CMD File
3.2.2 Preventing Automatic Startup
3.2.3 Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup
3.3 Chapter 6. Using Disk Drives
3.3.1 About Hard Disks and Diskettes
3.3.2 Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes
3.3.2.1 Viewing Disk Information
3.3.2.2 Displaying Objects
3.3.2.3 Copying Objects
3.3.2.4 Moving Objects
3.3.2.5 Deleting Objects from a Drive
3.3.3 Formatting a Disk
3.3.4 Checking a Disk
3.3.5 Drive A

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 4 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.3.5.1 Displaying the Objects on a Diskette


3.3.6 Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette
3.3.7 Copying Objects to or from a Diskette
3.3.8 Moving Objects to or from a Diskette
3.3.9 Deleting Objects from a Diskette
3.3.10 Formatting a Diskette
3.3.11 Checking a Diskette
3.4 Chapter 7. Using Command Prompts
3.4.1 OS/2 Command Prompts
3.4.2 DOS Command Prompts
3.4.3 DOS from Drive A
3.4.3.1 Creating a DOS Startup Diskette
3.4.3.2 Starting DOS from Drive A
3.4.4 WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
3.4.5 Starting Multiple Sessions
3.4.6 Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC
3.5 Chapter 8. Cleaning Up Your Desktop
3.5.1 Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer
3.5.2 Minimizing an Object to the Desktop
3.5.3 Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer
3.6 Chapter 9. Using the Shredder
3.6.1 Customizing the Delete Confirmations
3.6.2 Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects
3.6.3 Recovering Deleted Objects
3.7 Chapter 10. Using Templates
3.7.1 Creating an Object from the Templates Folder
3.7.1.1 Creating a Folder Object
3.7.1.2 Creating a Data-File Object
3.7.1.3 Creating a Program Object
3.7.2 Creating a Template of an Object
3.7.3 Creating Another Object
3.8 Chapter 11. Setting Up Printers
3.8.1 Installing a Printer
3.8.1.1 Creating a Printer Object
3.8.1.2 Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver
3.8.1.3 Installing a Printer Driver Only
3.8.1.4 Changing Printer Drivers
3.8.1.5 Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session
3.8.1.6 Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a
WIN-OS/2 Session
3.8.2 Setting Printer Properties
3.9 Chapter 12. Using Productivity Tools and Games
3.9.1 The Productivity Folder
3.9.1.1 Clipboard Viewer
3.9.1.2 Enhanced Editor
3.9.1.3 Icon Editor
3.9.1.4 OS/2 System Editor
3.9.1.5 Picture Viewer
3.9.1.6 Pulse
3.9.1.7 Seek and Scan Files
3.9.2 The Games Folder
3.9.2.1 Klondike Solitaire
3.9.2.2 OS/2 Chess
3.9.2.3 Mahjongg
3.10 Chapter 13. Using the Information
3.10.1 Using OS/2
3.10.2 Command Reference

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 5 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.2.1 Using the Contents Window


3.10.2.2 Obtaining Additional Information
3.10.2.3 Searching for Information
3.10.2.4 Using a Bookmark
3.10.2.5 Printing a Topic
3.10.3 Glossary
3.10.4 REXX Information
3.10.4.1 Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages
3.11 Chapter 14. Mastering the Master Help Index
3.11.1 Accessing Additional Information
3.11.2 Searching for a Topic
3.11.3 Printing a Master Help Index Entry
4.0 Part 4 - Troubleshooting
4.1 Chapter 15. Solving Installation Problems
4.1.1 What to Do If You Have Problems
4.1.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1
4.1.3 Installation Error Messages
4.1.4 Installation Diskette Problems
4.1.5 Installation Screen Problems
4.1.6 Installation CD-ROM Problems
4.1.7 Miscellaneous Installation Problems
4.2 Chapter 16. Solving Problems After Installation
4.2.1 What to Do If You Have Problems
4.2.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory
4.2.3 Startup Problems
4.2.4 Memory Problems
4.2.5 Display Problems
4.2.6 Mouse Problems
4.2.7 CD-ROM Problems
4.2.8 Hard Disk Problems
4.2.9 Desktop Problems
4.2.10 Recovery Procedures
4.2.10.1 Recovering Archived System Files
4.2.10.2 Recovery Choices during Restart
4.2.10.3 Rebuilding Your Desktop
4.2.10.4 Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File
4.2.10.5 Recovering the User INI File
4.2.10.6 Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk
4.2.10.7 Recovering Memory State Data
4.2.10.8 Recovering from A Forgotten Password
4.3 Chapter 17. Video Procedures
4.3.1 Video Device Drivers for OS/2
4.3.1.3 Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers
4.3.2 Installing a Video Device Driver
4.3.3 Video Settings
4.3.4 SVGA Procedures
4.3.4.1 Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions
4.3.4.2 Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
4.3.4.3 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection
4.3.4.4 Capturing the Display Configuration
4.3.4.5 Switching to a Display with Less Capability
4.3.5 XGA Procedures
4.3.5.1 XGA-2 Display Type Override
4.3.5.2 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection
4.3.5.3 Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors
4.3.6 Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 6 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.0 Part 5 - Advanced Installation


5.1 Chapter 18. Using Advanced Installation
5.1.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup
5.1.2 Installing the Operating System
5.1.3 Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu
5.1.3.1 Setting the Menu Display Time
5.1.3.2 Setting the Menu Mode
5.1.4 Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu
5.1.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation
5.1.6 Using a Response File to Install OS/2
5.1.6.1 Understanding Response File Installation
5.1.6.2 Adding the Sample Response File to Your System
5.1.6.3 Copying the Response File to
5.1.7 Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source
5.2 Chapter 19. Setting Up Your Hard Disk
5.2.1 What Is the Boot Manager?
5.2.2 Hard Disk Partitioning
5.2.2.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup
5.2.3 The FDISK Utility Program
5.2.3.1 The Options Menu
5.2.4 Creating a Boot Manager Setup
5.2.4.1 Deleting Existing Partitions
5.2.4.2 Creating the Boot Manager Partition
5.2.4.3 Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems
5.2.4.4 Creating the Partition for OS/2
5.2.4.5 Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition
5.2.4.6 Specifying the Default Operating System
5.2.4.7 Setting the Menu Display Time
5.2.5 Selecting a File System
5.2.6 Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation
Window
5.2.6.1 Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical
Drive
5.2.6.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation
5.3 Chapter 20. Special Hardware Considerations
5.3.1 Using Gateway 2000 Computers
5.3.1.1 486 Math Coprocessors
5.3.1.2 TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation
5.3.1.3 Gateway Nomad Notebook
5.3.2 Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
5.3.2.1 Phoenix BIOS
5.3.2.2 AMI BIOS
5.3.2.3 Micronics BIOS
5.3.3 Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter
5.3.4 Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card
5.3.5 Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
5.3.6 Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking
Station
5.3.7 Using a System with an Aox Upgrade
5.3.8 Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card
5.3.9 Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips,
Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive
5.3.9.1 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver
5.3.9.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver
5.3.9.3 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver
5.3.9.4 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers
5.3.9.5 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 7 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.10 Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination


5.3.11 Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
5.3.12 Using a Sound Blaster Adapter
5.3.13 Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16
A.0 Appendix A. Keyboard and Mouse Use
A.1 System Tasks
A.2 Object Tasks
A.3 Window Tasks
A.4 Notebook Tasks
A.5 Help Window Tasks
A.6 Master Help Index Tasks
B.0 Appendix B. Notices
B.1 Trademarks
GLOSSARY Glossary
INDEX Index

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 8 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

PREFACE Welcome

Hello and welcome to OS/2. You're about to begin using your computer in an
exciting new way--as a productivity aid that helps you get your work done quickly
and easily.

This book is for anyone who uses OS/2, whether you’re just beginning, are
familiar with computers, or has lots of technical expertise. It contains all the
information you need to install and use OS/2 effectively, from the basics to "know-
how" information to expert tips and technical details.

"Part 1: Installing OS/2" contains system preparation tasks and


installation instructions.

"Part 2: Exploring OS/2" offers a self-paced, interactive guided tour of


the Desktop.

"Part 3: Using OS/2" provides step-by-step instructions for using each


object on the Desktop.

"Part 4: Troubleshooting" includes technical tips and techniques for


resolving problems and keeping your system running smoothly.

"Part 5: Advanced Installation" is for technical users who want to


customize their installation.

Appendix A describes techniques for using a mouse or a keyboard.

You'll find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:

Boldface type indicates the name of an item you need to select.

Italics type indicates new terms, book titles, or variable information that
must be replaced by an actual value.

Monospace type indicates an example (such as a fictitious path or file name)


or text that is displayed on the screen.

UPPERCASE TYPE indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.

So why not get started right away? Here are some easy paths to follow,
depending on what you want to accomplish:

To install OS/2, go to Part 1.


If you're new to OS/2 or just want to explore, go to Part 2.
To access the extensive online information, go to Part 2.
To learn how to use OS/2, go to Part 3.

Subtemas
PREFACE.1 About OS/2 Version 3

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 9 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

PREFACE.1 About OS/2 Version 3

OS/2* Version 3 is an advanced, 32-bit operating system that runs on 4MB systems
and provides excellent response time to both 16-bit and 32-bit applications. OS/2
Version 3 is easier to install and to use and has better performance than previous
versions of the OS/2 operating system.

Subtemas
PREFACE.1.1 Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3
PREFACE.1.2 Performance
PREFACE.1.3 New Features

PREFACE.1.1 Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3

OS/2 Version 3 includes an Easy Installation choice. You can choose Easy
Installation to install OS/2 from diskette or CD-ROM. Easy Installation lets the
system choose which options to install. After you select Easy Installation, you
don't have to make any more installation decisions.

In addition, OS/2 Version 3 has the following installation improvements:

It takes less time and fewer diskettes to complete an installation.


The system automatically installs the Dual Boot feature when you install
over DOS.
You can install more than one printer during the initial installation.
Multimedia installation is a part of the OS/2 installation.

PREFACE.1.2 Performance

Performance improvements make OS/2 Version 3 faster at displaying objects on the


Desktop, moving from one window to another, and displaying information in the
Master Help Index and Glossary.

PREFACE.1.3 New Features

OS/2 Version 3 has the following new features that make the system easier to
use:

The LaunchPad provides a quick and easy way to get to commands and objects
that you use often.

The Using OS/2 tutorial is a vastly improved and expanded learning tool that
provides basic, step-by-step information, including a Practice push button that
takes you to the Desktop to try the task for yourself, as well as expert tips and
special hints for Microsoft** Windows** users.

Comet Cursor is a trail that follows your mouse pointer to help you see it
on portable computer screens.

The Pickup and Drop choices on the pop-up menu for an object let you use
other Desktop functions while dragging and dropping objects.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 10 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

The Desktop page of the Desktop Settings notebook lets you arrange your
Desktop the way you like it and have the system restore that Desktop each time you
restart your system.

The Archive page of Desktop Settings, together with the Recovery Choices
screen, lets you save different versions of your system files and choose which
version you want to use to restart your system.

Undo Arrange now accompanies the Arrange feature available from the pop-up
menu for an object.

A redesigned Desktop now has new three-dimensional icons and animated icons.

Two color palettes are available -- Solid Color Palette and Mixed Color
Palette. The Solid Color Palette was designed for use with systems that have VGA
display support. The Mixed Color Palette was designed for use with systems that
have SVGA display support. The paint roller has been changed to a paint bucket as
an additional enhancement.

An enhanced Scheme Palette with many new schemes to choose from.

Newly designed mouse pointer options include the ability to change the look
and size of the mouse pointer.

The new Fastload option improves application loading time.

Enhanced PCMCIA support enables you to switch devices and automatically


reconfigures your system while you continue to work.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 11 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1.0 Part 1- Installing OS/2

Subtemas
1.1 Chapter 1. As You Begin
1.2 Chapter 2. Using Easy Installation

1.1 Chapter 1. As You Begin


This chapter contains preliminary information to get you ready to install OS/2*.
Complete all the procedures in this chapter. Then choose an installation method.

The OS/2 operating system can be installed over the following products:

OS/2 for Windows


OS/2 Version 1.3
DOS Versions 3.3 or later
Microsoft Windows Versions 3.1 or 3.11
Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11

Note: OS/2 does not enable the LAN connectivity function of Windows for
Workgroups. For information on how to use the network function after installing
OS/2, see the online book, Application Considerations.

If you do not need Windows function, you can install OS/2:

Without Windows
With an earlier version of Windows

However, you will not be able to run Windows programs.

Subtemas
1.1.1 Preparing Your System
1.1.2 Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation

1.1.1 Preparing Your System

Before installing OS/2, check the following:

If you are installing on a computer that has Windows on it, make sure you
have the diskettes or the CD that was used to install Windows.

Notes:

1. Some computer manufacturers preinstall Windows on your computer, and then


provide a utility program so you can create your own Windows diskettes. If Windows
was preinstalled on your computer, create the Windows diskettes before you begin
installing OS/2

2. If you used device drivers, fonts, or specific language information files


different from those included on the Windows diskettes, or from those that were
preinstalled on your computer, you might overwrite these files when installing
OS/2. Reinstall those device drivers after installing OS/2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 12 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Be sure the files on your hard disk are not compressed. If you are using a
DOS compression program, such as Stacker**, AdStor, or DoubleSpace, decompress the
disk on which DOS and Windows are installed. Refer to the manual that came with
the compression program for instructions.

Note: If the compression program you are using does not specifically state that it
works with OS/2, you will not be able to use the compression program after OS/2 is
installed.

See updates to the Installation program in the README.INS file on the


Installation Diskette. Follow these steps:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.

2. Turn on the computer. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.

3. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and insert


Diskette 1 into the drive; then press Enter.

4. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display a command prompt.

5. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and reinsert the Installation Diskette.


Then do one of the following:

- To view the README file online, type tedit readme.ins and press
Enter. Press PF4 to quit the editor.

- To print a copy of the README file, type copy readme.ins > LPT1 and
press Enter. (LPT1 represents the port to which your printer is connected. If you
are using another port, type the correct port.)

Make sure you have the minimum hardware and software required to install
OS/2:

- An Intel** 80386 SX (or higher) 32-bit microprocessor


- At least 4MB of random access memory (RAM)
- A hard disk with 35MB to 50MB of free space, plus an additional 10MB of
hard disk space for multimedia support (for example, for a sound card)
- A 1.44MB diskette drive
- VGA video support
- An IBM-compatible mouse

Note: Both DOS and Windows provide programs that check and list your memory and
installed hardware. To view this information, do one of the following:

- If you have PC DOS 6.1 or later installed on your computer, type qconfig
at the command line and press Enter.

- If you have Windows installed on your computer, select Run from the File
menu. Then type msd and press Enter.

Refer to Chapter 20, "Special Hardware Considerations" in topic 5.3 if you


are using any of the following equipment:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 13 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Gateway 2000**
A system with Phoenix**, AMI**, or Micronics** BIOS
ATI** Graphics Ultra** Pro display adapter
An EISA system with an Adaptec** 1742A controller card
IBM* PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
IBM PS/2 Model 76
IBM ThinkPad* with a Docking Station
A system with an Aox upgrade
Quantum** II Hard Card
Sony**, Panasonic**, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips**, Mitsumi**,
BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM combination
IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
Sound Blaster**
ProAudio Spectrum** 16

1.1.2 Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation

Use Easy Installation to install OS/2 with preselected settings, based on your
current hardware and software. The Easy Installation program installs the
operating system in the same partition as your DOS and Windows (if you have DOS and
Windows installed on your computer), uses the File Allocation Table (FAT) file
system, and install the following OS/2 features on your computer:

Documentation, including:
The OS/2 Tutorial
Command Reference
Windows in OS/2
Application Considerations
Performance Considerations
Printing in OS/2
Multimedia
All system fonts
Optional System Utilities, including:
Backup Hard Disk
Change File Attributes
Manage Partition
Restore Backed-Up Files
Sort Filter
Tools and Games, including:
Enhanced Editor
Seek and Scan
Chess
Solitaire
OS/2 DOS Support
Multimedia Software Support (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
REXX
Optional Bit Maps
Advanced Power Management (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
PCMCIA (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)

To use Easy Installation, go to Chapter 2, "Using Easy Installation" in topic


1.2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 14 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+--- Important ----------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Use Advanced Installation only if you are an experienced computer ¦
¦ user. This method lets you customize how OS/2 will be installed on ¦
¦ your computer, including: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ Installing OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C ¦
¦ Installing OS/2 in a logical drive ¦
¦ Using the HPFS file system ¦
¦ Selecting which of the OS/2 features you want to install ¦
¦ Installing OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
¦ To use Advanced Installation, go to Chapter 18, "Using Advanced ¦
¦ Installation" in topic 5.1. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 15 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1.2 Chapter 2. Using Easy Installation

This chapter describes how to install OS/2 on your computer using the Easy
Installation method. Easy Installation was designed to help you install OS/2
without having to answer technical questions about your computer and its attached
hardware. Throughout the installation process, the program will search and detect
the type of hardware and software you are using on your computer. Then, the
Installation program will install a preselected set of the features of OS/2.

If you would prefer to customize the installation of OS/2 on your computer, and
if you are experienced at installing operating systems, you might want to use the
Advanced Installation method. Refer to Chapter 18, "Using Advanced Installation"
in topic 5.1 for more information about that method.

Easy Installation installs OS/2 using defaults (options that are preselected so
you don't have to make decisions or selections). If you use this method, OS/2 will
be installed as follows:

If DOS and Windows are in a primary, drive C partition, OS/2 will be


installed in that partition.
The partition will not be reformatted.
The Dual Boot feature will be automatically set up for you, so you can start
your computer from either DOS or OS/2.
If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version of OS/2, your
OS/2 Desktop will be preserved for you.

Subtemas
1.2.1 Preparing for the Installation
1.2.2 Installing the Operating System
1.2.3 Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot
1.2.4 Using Windows Programs
1.2.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation

1.2.1 Preparing for the Installation

During Easy Installation, you will be asked to insert diskettes (or a compact
disc (CD), if you are installing from a CD-ROM drive) and to remove diskettes.
Follow the directions you see on the screen. Be prepared to:

Indicate the type of printer that is connected to your computer. If you do


not know the type of printer you are using, refer to the documentation that came
with your printer.

Insert the original diskettes or CD that came with Microsoft Windows. Be


sure to have your Windows diskettes or CD handy before you install OS/2.

If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a screen.
If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error messages
during the installation, refer to Chapter 15, "Solving Installation Problems" in
topic 4.1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 16 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1.2.2 Installing the Operating System

To install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, follow these steps:

1. If your computer is on, close all running applications.

2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.

3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
to restart it. The following screen appears:

4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1. Then
press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages asking you to
wait, followed by a black screen. Then the following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 17 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5. If you are installing OS/2 from diskettes, go to step 6. If you are


installing from a CD, insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive; then press Enter.

6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Easy Installation.


Then press Enter.

7. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from


diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the installation
progresses. If you are installing from a CD, you will not see any messages to
remove diskettes.

After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette


and then reinsert Diskette 1. Follow the instructions on the screen. After you
remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the System Configuration screen:

8. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system. Check the
choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen will
appear where you can indicate the correct information about your hardware device.
If you are unsure about the hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that
came with it.

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
information about any screen you see.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 18 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,

click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
(SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation program where
you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.

9. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer names.
Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:

If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the PC


end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3 button Then
press Enter.

If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the PC


end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 button.
Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.

10. If you received a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation


program telling you that you did not have enough free disk space to install OS/2,
but you decided to continue with the installation anyway, you will see the OS/2
Setup and Installation screen. Go to step 11.

If you did not receive a Warning message at the beginning of the


Installation program, go to step 12.

11. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software features
you want to install. You will notice that some features have a check mark next to
them, which means they are selected for installation. The amount of hard disk
space required for each feature is shown to the right of the feature.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 19 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Follow these steps:

a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By


deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.

b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the button


to see additional items you can select or deselect.

c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections

12. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. You will be asked to
remove and insert diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.

13. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the screen;
click on Help if you need more information.

14. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part of
the OS/2 installation.

15. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one of
the following (if Windows was preinstalled on your computer when you bought it, you
can skip this step and go to step 18):

If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:

a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.

b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.

c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as requested.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 20 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:

a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.

b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.

c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD, type
the drive letter and directory name in the field provided. For example:

e:\winsetup

where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where


\winsetup is the directory that contains the Windows files.

16. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.

17. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
and restart your computer. Click on OK or press enter.

18. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.

View the Tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 21 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

For more help on using the operating system, you can access the online help
system. Press F1 anytime to get help, or if you see a Help push button at the
bottom of a screen, you can click on it to get more information about that screen.

1.2.3 Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot

When you install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, a Dual Boot feature is
automatically set up for you as well. Dual Boot lets you switch back and forth
between OS/2 and DOS (you might want to do this because some DOS programs do not
run under OS/2).

Dual Boot also keeps track of which operating system should start when you turn
on your computer. Each time you shut down and restart your computer, it will start
(boot) in whichever operating system was last being used. For example, if you shut
down your system while DOS is running, your system will start in DOS the next time
you turn on your computer.

Subtemas
1.2.3.1 Starting the Dual Boot Feature
1.2.3.2 Installing DOS after Installing OS/2
1.2.3.3 What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work

1.2.3.1 Starting the Dual Boot Feature

Use the Dual Boot function to switch from one operating system to another:

To switch from OS/2 to DOS:

1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open Dual Boot.
4. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type
Y and press Enter.

Note: If you want to run your DOS programs while OS/2 is running, you can
use the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2 for most DOS programs. By using these
sessions, you don't have to use Dual Boot, which shuts down your OS/2 session. To
use a DOS session, open DOS Window or DOS Full Screen from the Command Prompts
folder.

To switch from DOS to OS/2:

1. At the DOS command prompt, type c:\os2\boot /os2


2. Press Enter.

For more information about the BOOT command, refer to the Command Reference.
The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 22 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1.2.3.2 Installing DOS after Installing OS/2

If you installed OS/2 on drive C, formatted the drive with the FAT file system,
and you did not already have DOS installed, your system will still have the Dual
Boot capability. However, you must install DOS to use the Dual Boot feature.

To add Dual Boot after installing OS/2, follow these steps:

1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.

2. Open Command Prompts.

3. Open Dual Boot. A Warning box appears reminding you that DOS was not
installed and asking if you want to continue.

4. Type Y and press Enter. You will see messages that your system is being
prepared, and then a warning that you must shut down your system. Press Enter to
close the window.

5. Shut down your system:

a. Position the mouse pointer on a blank space on your Desktop and press
mouse button 2.

b. Select Shut down... from the menu that appears.

c. When a message appears telling you to turn off your computer, do so.

6. Install DOS on your computer. Follow the instructions that came in your DOS
package.

7. At the DOS command line, type c:\os2\boot /os2 and press Enter to return to
your OS/2 Desktop.

1.2.3.3 What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work

If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you
might have programs running that take up too much of your computer's memory. If
so, close the programs before you use the BOOT command. If the programs are loaded
from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must deactivate the programs before using the BOOT
command.

1.2.4 Using Windows Programs

When you install OS/2 on a computer that has Windows installed on it, all of
your Windows functions are still available. If you installed OS/2 with the Easy
Installation method, any Windows programs you had on your computer were
automatically placed in folders on your OS/2 Desktop. You can also use the Windows
Program Manager by opening a WIN-OS/2 command prompt from the Command Prompts
folder in the OS/2 System folder.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 23 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To use your Windows programs after installing OS/2, use the following
procedures:

To run a Windows program from your OS/2 Desktop:

1. Open WIN-OS/2* Groups, or Windows Programs or Additional Windows Progams


(whichever contains the program object you want to open).
2. Open the program you want to use.

To run a Windows program from the Windows Program Manager:

1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen or WIN-OS/2 Window.
4. Open the program you want to use.

Subtemas
1.2.4.1 Installing Windows after Installing OS/2

1.2.4.1 Installing Windows after Installing OS/2

If you installed OS/2 on a computer that did not have Microsoft Windows on it
already, you can install Windows later if you have a partition formatted with the
FAT file system. Follow these steps:

1. Start your computer with DOS. Do one of the following:

Open Dual Boot in the Command Prompts folder.


Select DOS from the Boot Manager menu.

Note: If you have not installed DOS, refer to the procedure in


"Installing DOS after Installing OS/2" in topic 1.2.3.2.

2. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y
and press Enter.

3. Install Windows in a FAT-formatted partition or logical drive.

4. Shut down your computer, and then restart it with OS/2.

5. Open System Setup in the OS/2 System folder.

6. Open Selective Install

7. When the System Configuration screen appears, select OK.

8. On the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen, select WIN-OS/2 Support.


Then select Install

9. When the Advanced Options window appears, select OK to continue.

10. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered OS/2 installation
diskettes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 24 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

11. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered Windows diskettes.

12. When prompted to do so, shut down and restart your computer so the changes
can take effect.

1.2.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation

The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most


cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to Chapter
15, "Solving Installation Problems" in topic 4.1.

Problems you might encounter include:

A blank screen after installation.


An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are
using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)

If these or other problems occur, refer to Chapter 15, "Solving Installation


Problems" in topic 4.1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 25 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2.0 Part 2 - Exploring OS/2

Subtemas
2.1 Chapter 3. Exploring the Desktop

2.1 Chapter 3. Exploring the Desktop

In this chapter you will learn about and explore computer terms you should know,
the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2), the icons (small pictures) that are displayed on
your Desktop, and the online information that is available. There will be times
when you are sent from this book to your computer so that you can explore the
Desktop. Be sure to have your computer on with the Desktop or the tutorial
displayed.

Subtemas
2.1.1 Understanding Terminology
2.1.2 Using the Tutorial
2.1.3 Using the Desktop and Its Objects
2.1.4 Finding Information
2.1.5 Using the LaunchPad
2.1.6 Find Push Button

2.1.1 Understanding Terminology

Before you begin your exploration of the Desktop, it's important to recognize
the terminology used in this book and in other OS/2 information. The following
terms are used in addition to click and double-click to describe mouse actions.

Select Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions explain which
item to point to.

Open Point to an item and double-click mouse button 1. Instructions


explain which item to point to.

For more information about click and double-click, review the "Using the Mouse"
section of Using OS/2.

2.1.2 Using the Tutorial

Begin your exploration by going through the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2). The
Using OS/2 tutorial was created to teach you the basics of OS/2 step-by-step, and
to provide advanced hints and topics for experienced DOS, OS/2, or Microsoft**
Windows** users.

Try It!

If the tutorial is not displayed on the Desktop, you can find it on the
LaunchPad. The LaunchPad icon looks like this:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 26 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Use either of the following procedures to display the tutorial:

If you don't know how to use a mouse:

1. Press and release the Alt and Tab keys at the same time until you
highlight the LaunchPad, and then press Enter to open the LaunchPad.
2. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to highlight the Using OS/2 (is the icon
with the question mark on it), and then press Enter.

If you know how to use a mouse:

1. Double-click on the LaunchPad icon if it is not already open on the


Desktop.
2. Click on Using OS/2 (is the icon with the question mark on it), located
in the Front Panel, to display the tutorial on the Desktop.

Return to this book when the tutorial is displayed.

Look at the tutorial now. The information box at the bottom of the window
describes how to start the tutorial. To the right of the box are push buttons that
you can click on with your mouse. When the text or graphic on a button is black,
the button is active and available for use. When it is grey, the button is not
active and cannot be used.

Try It!

If you don't know how to use a mouse, press the Spacebar on your keyboard to
start the "Using the Mouse" instructions in the tutorial.

These instructions explain mouse terminology and teach you how to use a
mouse.

If you know how to use a mouse, press Enter or click on (select) the >
button to begin the tutorial.

Return to this book when you have completed this procedure.

After you have viewed "Using the Mouse" or if you bypassed that section, the
tutorial begins with the Introduction panel.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 27 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Move the mouse pointer around the window and read the text in the information
box to learn about the features in the tutorial.

The area on the left side of the tutorial window is the selection area. The
selection area contains twelve push buttons that you click on to select.

The tutorial topics are displayed on the first seven push buttons. Click on a
push button to display the tutorial contents list. Double-click on the topic text
to go directly to that topic, or click on the > button to continue through the
topics.

The eighth push button is the tutorial index, which provides a list of all
tutorial topics. The topics are organized in groups that relate to the main topic
push buttons. Corresponding subtopics are listed below. When you double-click on
a topic in the index, you go directly to that topic. This can be helpful if you
want to review a topic that you have already tried but are unable to remember where
it is listed.

The remaining four push buttons are available when you are within certain
tutorial topics. They provide the following information:

Practice Lets you to try a task for yourself. When you select Practice,
the tutorial window moves to reveal the Desktop. The window
provides instruction for a task you can perform on the Desktop.
You will navigate through folders and objects to perform the
task as you would from the Desktop.

OS/2 Provides tips for using OS/2. The OS/2 tips are displayed
automatically in the information box for each tutorial topic.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 28 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Windows Provides tips for the Microsoft Windows user. The Windows tips
compare OS/2 tasks to similar tasks in Windows.

Expert Provides advanced tips for the more experienced OS/2 user.

You can move throughout the tutorial at your own pace and review the topics in
any order.

2.1.3 Using the Desktop and Its Objects

The icons that you see on the Desktop are called objects. Some of these objects
are folders. Folders are objects that contain other objects and folders. Think of
the Desktop as one big folder or the main folder that contains everything you need
to use OS/2. If you are familiar with DOS and Microsoft** Windows** you can think
of the Desktop folder as a directory and the folders it contains as subdirectories.
Other types of objects are data files, program files, or device files.

Note: Throughout this book, the Desktop is also referred to as the Workplace
Shell*.

When you look at the Desktop, you will see the following objects:

The OS/2 System folder contains objects you can use to set up OS/2
the way you want it. You can use these objects to change your mouse
for left-handed use or to speed up the click rate, as well as to
change the colors and look of the Desktop.

The Information folder contains online information,


including Using OS/2 (the online tutorial), and the Master Help Index,
and online books, including Command Reference, Glossary, Printing in
OS/2, Application Considerations, Windows Programs in OS/2, Performance
Considerations,Using Multimedia, and REXX Information. See Chapter 13,
"Using the Information" in topic 3.10.

The Templates folder contains object models (templates) for the


different types of objects in OS/2. These templates make it easy for
you to create new objects for files, folders, programs, and other
objects. See Chapter 10, "Using Templates" in topic 3.7.

The LaunchPad contains the objects you use most often. You can also add
other objects to the LaunchPad. For more information about using the
LaunchPad, refer to "Using the LaunchPad" later in this chapter.

During installation, if OS/2 recognizes that your computer has an audio card,
multimedia support is automatically installed and your Desktop also will include
the following:

The Multimedia folder contains the multimedia applications that are


supported by your computer. You can find out more about these

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 29 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Multimedia objects in the online Multimedia book, located in the Information


folder.

During installation, if OS/2 finds Windows programs already installed on your


computer, your Desktop also will include these icons:

The Windows Programs folder contains program objects for the


Windows programs you had installed before you installed OS/2.

The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains program objects for the Windows
Groups programs that were created under the Windows Program
Manager.
To find out more about these Windows program objects, refer to the
online book Windows Programs in OS/2.

Subtemas
2.1.3.1 Using Pop-up Menus
2.1.3.2 Using Settings Notebooks

2.1.3.1 Using Pop-up Menus

Now that you know a little bit about the objects on the Desktop, you should also
know that each object has its own menu known as a pop-up menu. Pop-up menus contain
items that relate specifically to an object as well as items that are common to all
objects. Some of the standard pop-up menu items include:

Open Opens an object or folder and displays its contents, starts


a program, or displays a data file. Selecting Open is the
same as double-clicking on an object. Some items have an
arrow to the right of Open that lets you choose how you
want your icons to be displayed. You have three choices:

Icon View Displays the icons randomly within the folder.

Tree View Displays the objects in a hierarchy.

Details View
Displays the properties of the objects (for
example, the date and time the object was
created, the full name of the object, and any
other special attributes associated with the
object).

Settings Opens the Settings notebook for the object. The Settings
notebook looks like a book with tabs and enables you to
view and change the current settings for the object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 30 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Help Displays general help information about the object. Select


the arrow to the right of Help to display a list of the
types of help available for the object.

Help Index Displays an alphabetic list of available help


topics for the active program.

General Help
Displays help information about the active
window. This is the same information you would
see if you were to select Help from the pop-up
menu or press the F1 key while the open window
is active.

Using Help Explains all the ways you can get help for
objects on the Desktop.

Keys Help Explains the different groups of keys you can


use with OS/2. When you select a specific
group, additional help is displayed with a list
of the keys provided for the group.

Create another Lets you create another object from the pop-up menu and
works the same as if you were to drag a template from the
Templates folder.

Copy Makes a duplicate of the selected object and its contents.

Move Lets you move an object to a new location anywhere on the


Desktop.

Create shadow Creates a duplicate of an object but differs from a copy in


that it automatically exchanges data between the shadow and
the original object. When you make changes in the shadow
object, the original object is updated with the same data.

Pickup and Drop


Enables you to move an object and perform other tasks

before you drop the object in its new location. Drop will
not be displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
Pickup.

Window Displays additional menu items that enable you to manage


the size and location of the window and close the open
window.

Find Helps you locate any object in the system.

Arrange and Undo Arrange


Organizes the objects on the Desktop or the open active
window in horizontal rows across the top of the screen.
Undo Arrange places the objects in the location where they
were before you selected Arrange. Undo Arrange will not be
displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
Arrange.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 31 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Try It!

The Desktop has its own pop-up menu, and each object has its own pop-up menu.
To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop, try the following:

1. Move the mouse pointer to an empty area on the Desktop.


2. Press mouse button 2 to display the Desktop pop-up menu.

Look at the menu items on the pop-up menu. The Desktop pop-up menu
contains items that no other pop-up menu has -- Lockup now, Shut down,
and System Setup.

To display the pop-up menu for an object, try the following. In this example,
you will display the pop-up menu for the OS/2 System object.

1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.


2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.

Notice that some of the items on the pop-up menu for the object are
different from those you saw on the Desktop pop-up. Each object has
menu items that are exclusive to that object.

For more information about pop-up menus, select the menus topic in the Master
Help Index, and then select any of the topics of interest to you.

2.1.3.2 Using Settings Notebooks

Each object has its own Settings notebook. The Settings notebook enables you to
customize settings for each object. Just as the pop-up menus for an object have
exclusive and common menu items, the Settings notebooks have exclusive settings
pages. Some of the standard settings pages are as follows:

View Use the View page to select how icons and their text are
displayed.

Include Use the Include page to include objects that you want in
your folder and exclude objects you don't want in your
folder.

Sort Use the Sort page to determine the menu items listed when
you select the arrow to the right of Sort in the pop-up
menu. You determine how you want the objects in folders
sorted by selecting the items from the pop-up menu.

Background Use the Background page to select an image or color to


display in the background of any open folder, including the
Desktop. You can select a different image or color for
each and every folder on the Desktop.

Menu Use the menu page to customize your pop-up menu items. You
can add, delete, or change the items on the pop-up menu or
the cascaded menu that is displayed when you select the
arrow to the right of a menu item.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 32 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

File Use the File page to view the file name and path of a file
object. You can also define the object as a work area
object. A work-area folder lets you put together objects
that are related to a specific task. For more information
about the Files page, select files topic from the Master
Help Index and then select File information about objects.
For more information about work-area folders, select the
folders topic from the Master Help Index and then select
Creating a work-area folder.

Window Use the Window page to customize the window behavior for
each object on the Desktop. Window behavior includes how
and where you want your object to be minimized, how you
want the window to open , and which button (hide or
minimize) you want to appear on the window. every time you
double-click on it.

General Use the General page to change the name or the icon
displayed for the folder currently selected or open.

There are additional settings pages available, but the pages listed above are
some of the most common. You can get help for settings pages by selecting the Help
push button, which is available on every page.

Try It!

Use the following procedure as a guide to displaying the Settings notebook for
an object:

1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.


2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
3. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the object.

Notice that each page is identified by a tab on the right side of the
notebook.
4. Select the Window tab to display the Window page.

Look at the bottom of the page. You will see Window - Page 1 of 2,
which lets you know that there is more than one page associated with
the Window tab.
5. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to display page 2
for the Window tab.

Some of the tabs in the notebooks can have up to 3 or 4 pages with


which they are associated. Simply select the right arrow to move
forward through the pages and the left arrow to move backward through
the pages. You can also use the arrows instead of the tabs to page
through the notebooks.
6. Double-click on the title-bar icon to close the notebook.

When you make changes to the Settings notebook, the changes take effect
immediately after you close the notebook.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 33 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2.1.4 Finding Information

OS/2 provides plenty of information online, in the form of help information and
books, that you can use as you are working.

Subtemas
2.1.4.1 Getting Help
2.1.4.2 Viewing Information Online

2.1.4.1 Getting Help

Help information is available for every object on the Desktop, every menu item
on pop-up and pull-down menus, and every place you see a Help push button.

Try It!

If you want to learn how to use the online help functions, be sure the Using
OS/2 tutorial is displayed. Then use the following procedure:

1. Select the About Help push button.


2. Review the panels about OS/2 Help.
3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
information box.
4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.

Return to this book when you are finished.

Subtemas
2.1.4.1.1 F1 Help
2.1.4.1.2 Help Push Button

2.1.4.1.1 F1 Help

F1 help provides information about objects, pop-up menu items, entry fields, and
push buttons. You use the F1 help by selecting or highlighting an item and
pressing the F1 key on your keyboard.

Try It!

To get F1 help for each item on a pop-up menu, try the following:

1. Click on the down arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the tutorial
window. The title-bar icon menu for the OS/2 tutorial is displayed.
2. Press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard and watch the focus box move
from menu item to menu item. Try this several times and stop at the
Close menu item.
3. Now press the F1 key on your keyboard.

A helpful explanation about why you might want to use this menu item
is displayed.
4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner of the
help window, next to Help for Close, to close the help window.

Return to this book when you are finished.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 34 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2.1.4.1.2 Help Push Button

Another way to get help is to use the Help push button available on most of the
object pop-up menus and notebook pages.

These Help push buttons let you work with the object while you learn how to use
it.

Try It!

To learn how to use the Help push buttons, try the following:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Solid Color Palette.
4. Click on the Edit Color push button.
5. When the Edit Color window is displayed, move it to the left side of
the screen to make room for the help panel.
6. Click on the Help push button.
7. Read the information provided in the help window. Notice the
highlighted words within the help text. These words indicate that
additional information is available.

You can use the Edit Color window while the Help information is
displayed.
8. When you are finished reading the help information, you can close the
help window by double-clicking on the title-bar icon in the upper-left
corner of the help window.

Another way to get help is by using an online book called the Master Help Index.
For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of this
book.

2.1.4.2.1 Master Help Index

The Master Help Index provides help for practically everything you want to know
about using OS/2. It is set up like a dictionary that has tabs. These tabs can
help you find topics quickly. After you select a tab, use the scroll bar to page
down to the topic you are looking for. You will sometimes find that after you
select a topic, a secondary list of topics is displayed. This list of topics is
related to the topic you selected.

Try It!

To learn about the Master Help Index:

1. Select the About Help push button.


2. Select the Using the Master Help Index topic.
3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
information box.
4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 35 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Hint:

You can use the keys on your keyboard to move to sections in the
index. Simply press the key that corresponds to the first letter of
the topic, and the entries that start with that letter will be
displayed.

For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of
this book.

2.1.4.2.2 Command Reference

If you are familiar with using a command line or you want to learn how to use
one, you will find the online Command Reference to be very helpful. This book
contains descriptions of all the commands you can use at an OS/2 command prompt.
You might already be familiar with some of the commands because some are actually
identical to those you have used with DOS. Some of the commands are new and some
contain additional parameters specific for use with OS/2. For more information
about command lines, see "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.

Try It!

To learn how to use the Command Reference, review the "Using the Command
Reference" topic located in the About Help section of the tutorial. When you are
finished, close the tutorial and try the following steps:

1. Open the Information folder.


2. Open the Command Reference.
3. Select the + sign next to OS/2 Commands By Name to display all the
OS/2 commands.
4. Open the command for which you want information.

Note: You might see + signs next to some of the commands in the list.
The + signs indicate that additional information pertaining to
these commands is available. Click on the + sign to view the
additional topics.

Glossary
The Glossary provides definitions for terms used in the OS/2 information.
The Glossary looks like a dictionary and can be used in the same way the
Master Help Index is used. You can use the tutorial to find out more
about the Glossary.

REXX Information
This book provides information to acquaint you with the REXX language and
programming concepts.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 36 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Windows Programs in OS/2


This book provides information about using OS/2 and Windows
programs together under OS/2.

Application Considerations
This book provides information about the settings or tasks you need to
perform to enable certain programs to run under OS/2.

Performance Considerations
This book provides information about how to improve the performance of
your system, memory management, model-specific computer problems, and
COM ports.

Printing in OS/2
This book provides information for everything you want to know about
printing in OS/2--from installing a printer to solving printer
problems.

Multimedia
This book provides information pertaining to the multimedia programs
available with OS/2.

Trademarks
This book provides trademark information for trademarks mentioned in
the online books and online help information.

2.1.5 Using the LaunchPad

The LaunchPad holds the objects and push buttons that you use most often. Some
of the most commonly used objects are already on the LaunchPad. The following is a
picture of the LaunchPad.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 37 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Subtemas
2.1.5.1 Using LaunchPad Push Buttons

2.1.5.1 Using LaunchPad Push Buttons

The push buttons at the left side of the LaunchPad let you secure your computer
while you are away, shut down your computer when you are done working for the day,
locate things on the Desktop, and display a list of all the windows you have open
on the Desktop. The following describes the push buttons on the LaunchPad.

Subtemas
2.1.5.1.1 Lockup Push Button

2.1.5.1.1 Lockup Push Button

You can use Lockup to lock up your computer keyboard and display at any time.
By locking up your computer, you can keep others from using your computer while you
are away.

Try It!

To lock up your computer, you must first decide on a password. Your password can
be from 1 to 15 characters long. Think of a password now, write it down, and put
it in a safe place. Then try the following:

1. Select the Lockup push button on the left side of the LaunchPad.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 38 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. Read the text in the window and type your password in the Password
field next to the blinking cursor.
3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard and the cursor will start
blinking in the Password (for verification) field.
4. Type the same password again to verify that you entered the password
correctly.
5. Select the OK push button.
6. Select the Lockup push button on the LaunchPad. The OS/2 Logo screen
is displayed and a Help push button is available at the bottom right
side of the screen.
7. Type your password, and then press Enter. You will return to the
Desktop.

Note: After you have specified your password, your screen will
automatically lock up within three minutes if there is no action
being performed on the Desktop. Realize that it is very important
to be sure to:

REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD!

After you have decided upon a password and entered it into the Password window,
you will not see the password window again unless you decide at some later time
that you want to change your password. Now, whenever you select Lockup on the
LaunchPad, your computer will be automatically locked up.

To change your password, or any of the other settings associated with the Lockup
push button, you must use the settings menu choice in the Desktop pop-up menu.

Try It!

To see the Lockup settings available and to change your password, try the
following:

1. Using mouse button 2, click on an open area on the Desktop. The


Desktop pop-up menu is displayed.

2. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the Desktop.

3. Select the Lockup tab.

Notice that the Lockup tab has three pages associated with it. The
bottom right corner of the page is labeled Lockup - Page 1 of 3.

The page currently displayed is the Timeout page. Use this page to
change the current settings for how much time you want to pass before
the computer automatically locks up. Timeout is set for 3 minutes by
default.

The second page enables you to decide what graphics or colors you want
to be displayed while your computer is locked up. The Lockup screen
is set to display the OS/2 Logo screen by default. The screen is
displayed in the Preview area of the page.

Page 3 is the page you use to change your current password.


4. Move the mouse pointer to the right arrow and select it until the
Password Page in the notebook is displayed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 39 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5. Type your new password in the Password field and then again in the
Password (for verification) field. If you need help, select the Help
push button.
6. Select OK.

Remember to lock up your computer when you are away to prevent someone from
using it.

2.1.6 Find Push Button

The Find push button helps you locate objects in the system. If you can't
remember where to find your favorite game, you can use the Find option to help you
locate it.

Try It!

To learn how to use Find, try the following:

1. Select Find on the LaunchPad. The Find Objects window is displayed.


2. Select the Help push button at the bottom of the window.
3. Read the information about how to use Find. Be sure to read through
to the end of the help information, where you can find a list of the
fields available on the Find Objects window. You can double-click on
the highlighted items to display additional information about how to
use these fields. Be sure to select the Previous push button at the
bottom of the help window to return to the original help information
for Find.
4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the help window when you are
finished using the help information. This will close the help window.

Subtemas
2.1.6.1 Window List Push Button
2.1.6.2 Shut Down Push Button
2.1.6.3 Using Objects on the LaunchPad
2.1.6.4 Adding Objects to the LaunchPad

2.1.6.1 Window List Push Button

You can use the Window List push button to help you locate open objects, reopen
minimized windows, or close open windows.

Try It!

To learn about the Window List, try the following:

1. Select the Window List push button.

A list of open active windows is displayed. The Desktop is the first


window in the list. The list also includes the LaunchPad and any
other active objects or folders you might have already opened.
2. Select the title-bar icon located in the upper-left corner of the
window.
3. Select the arrow to the right of Help.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 40 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Select General Help.


5. Read the information in the help window to learn more about the Window
List and how to use it.

2.1.6.2 Shut Down Push Button

After you have given OS/2 its daily workout, you must take care and remember to
shut down your computer. Shut down is the cool-down exercise for this powerful
operating system. When you shut down your computer, information about which
windows are open and where they are located on the Desktop is saved in the storage
buffer on your hard disk. When you select Shut down, you will see a window asking
if you are ready to shut down. Simply select the OK push button and you will be on
your way to performing a successful shutdown. Remember to use the Shut down option
when you are finished working for the day.

Note: Be sure to check all programs for unsaved information (such as data
files you might be editing) before you start the shutdown
procedure.

Note: Never turn off the power on your computer until you have completed
a shutdown.

2.1.6.3 Using Objects on the LaunchPad

The objects on the right side of the LaunchPad are shadows of objects that
already exist elsewhere in OS/2. A shadow object is linked to the original object
but it can reside in a different location on the Desktop. The purpose of a shadow
object is to allow you to use an object from the Desktop whether or not it is
located on drive C. When you make a change to the shadow, the change also occurs
in the original. By creating a shadow of the original object instead of creating a
copy, you can save space on your hard disk and still use the functions of the
object. The following are the objects on the LaunchPad:

Drive A Object
The Drive A object gives you access to the information provided on a
diskette you insert into the diskette drive slot on your computer. When
you select the drawer button for the Drive A object, you will see that it
contains the Drive C object (if Drive C is the drive where you installed
OS/2). This object gives you access to the contents of Drive C in your
computer. For more information about accessing drives, see "Using
Drives" in Part 3 of this book.

OS/2 Window Object


The OS/2 Window object gives you access to an OS/2 command prompt in a
window on the Desktop. You can use the OS/2 command prompt in much the
same way as a DOS command prompt - by typing a command at the command
prompt.
When you select the drawer button for the OS/2 Window object, you will
see that it contains the DOS Window object. The DOS Window object
provides you access to a DOS command prompt in a window on the
Desktop. Here you can use the DOS commands with which you are already
familiar. For more information about using a command prompt, refer to
the online Command Reference, or the "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3
of this book.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 41 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Using OS/2 Object


The Using OS/2 object gives you instant access to the OS/2 tutorial.
Use the tutorial to learn something new, to refresh your memory about
how to do something, or to experience hands-on practice using OS/2.

Shredder Object
The Shredder provides a quick way for you to delete files, objects, or
folders that you no longer have a use for. For more information about
the Shredder, see the online Master Help Index.

Printer Object
The printer object is added to the LaunchPad only if a printer was set up
when you installed OS/2. You might not have a printer object on your
LaunchPad. If you want to know how to set up a printer, use the
information provided in the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the
Information folder.

2.1.6.4 Adding Objects to the LaunchPad

You can easily add any object you want to the LaunchPad by simply dragging the
object to the right side of the LaunchPad. The LaunchPad will expand to include
the object on the panel.

Try It!

When adding an object to the LaunchPad, use the following example as a guide.
In this example, the System Clock is added to the LaunchPad:

1. Open the OS/2 System folder.


2. Open the System Setup folder.
3. Move the mouse pointer over the System Clock object.
4. Press and hold mouse button 2 and move the object in between two
objects on the LaunchPad until you see a single, solid black bar.
This black bar indicates where the object will be added to the
LaunchPad.

For more information about the LaunchPad refer to the Master Help Index, the
Using OS/2 tutorial, and the help information provided with the LaunchPad.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 42 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.0 Part 3 - Using OS/2

Subtemas
3.1 Chapter 4. Customizing Your System
3.2 Chapter 5. Starting Objects Automatically
3.3 Chapter 6. Using Disk Drives
3.4 Chapter 7. Using Command Prompts
3.5 Chapter 8. Cleaning Up Your Desktop
3.6 Chapter 9. Using the Shredder
3.7 Chapter 10. Using Templates
3.8 Chapter 11. Setting Up Printers
3.9 Chapter 12. Using Productivity Tools and Games
3.10 Chapter 13. Using the Information
3.11 Chapter 14. Mastering the Master Help Index

3.1 Chapter 4. Customizing Your System

The System Setup object contains objects that help you customize your
system.

To open System Setup:


1. Open OS/2 System
2. Open System Setup.

or:

1. Point to an empty area on the


Desktop.
2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select System Setup.

Subtemas
3.1.1 Color Palette
3.1.2 Country
3.1.3 Device Driver Install
3.1.4 Font Palette
3.1.5 Keyboard
3.1.6 Add Programs
3.1.7 Mouse
3.1.8 Scheme Palette
3.1.9 Sound
3.1.10 Spooler
3.1.11 System

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 43 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.12 System Clock


3.1.13 WIN-OS/2 Setup
3.1.14 Power
3.1.15 Selective Install
3.1.16 PCMCIA
3.1.17 Selective Uninstall
3.1.18 Create Utility Diskettes

3.1.1 Color Palette

The Color Palette is used to customize the colors on your screen.


You can change the color of the following parts of the Workplace
Shell*:

Desktop
Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
Different parts of the windows, such as push buttons,
scroll bars, and the background.

There are two colors palettes, one is a Solid


Color Palette for low resolution displays and
one is a Mixed Color Palette for high
resolution displays. The Solid Color Palette
contains 16 solid colors and the Mixed Color
palette contains 256 mixed colors.

Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive


demonstration of how to use the Color Palettes.

The following steps can be used for both the


Solid and the Mixed Color Palettes.

Subtemas
3.1.1.1 Changing Screen Colors
3.1.1.2 Changing the Color of Object Titles
3.1.1.3 Changing the Colors on the Color Palette

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 44 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.1.1 Changing Screen Colors

To globally change the color of an item (for


example, change the color of the background in every
window):
1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Color Palette.
4. Make sure that the item you want to change is
visible.
5. Point to a color on the color palette.
6. Press and hold Alt.
7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
8. Drag the color to the item you want to change.

The mouse pointer changes to a (paint


bucket).
9. Release mouse button 2.
10. Release Alt. The color of all instances of the
item changes to the new color.
11. Point to the title-bar icon.
12. Double-click.

To change the color of a specific item (for


example, change the color of the vertical scroll
bar in this window only):

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Color Palette.
4. Make sure that the item you want to change is
visible.
5. Point to a color on the color palette.

6. Press and hold mouse button 2.


7. Drag the color to the item you want to change.
8. Release mouse button 2. The color of the item
changes to the new color.
9. Point to the title-bar icon.
10. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 45 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.1.2 Changing the Color of Object Titles

To change the color of the titles of objects:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Color Palette.
4. Make sure an object title is visible
in the folder. (You cannot change an
individual title color. Changing one
title color changes every title color in
the folder.)
5. Point to a color on the Color Palette.
6. Press and hold Ctrl.
7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
8. Drag the color to a title in the
folder.
9. Release mouse button 2.
10. Release Ctrl. The color of every
title in the folder changes to the new
color.

3.1.1.3 Changing the Colors on the Color Palette

You can change the colors available on the Color Palette:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Color Palette.
4. Select the color on the Color Palette
that you want to change.
5. Select Edit color. A window appears
in which you can make adjustments to or
change the color. For more information
about the choices available in this
window, select the Help push button.
6. When the correct color appears in the
box on the color bar in the window, point
to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click. The Color Palette
window is displayed with the new color.

3.1.2 Country

When you installed OS/2, you determined settings like date, time, numbers,
and currency of a specific country. The Country settings notebook lets you
change these settings.

You can select a specific country and have all the formats changed automatically,
or you can make individual format selections.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 46 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To change country formats:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Select Country.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can ¦
¦ reconfigure the operating system to support another national language ¦
¦ without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see ¦
¦ "Selective Install" in topic 3.1.15). ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

For country-dependent information, refer to the COUNTRY statement in the online


Command Reference.

3.1.3 Device Driver Install

Many devices that you attach to a computer, such as a CD-ROM drive,


mouse, display, and printer come with a device driver diskette. The
device driver diskette (sometimes called a device support diskette)
contains the code needed by the computer to recognize and operate the
device.

The Device Driver Install object is used to install any device driver except those
for printers and plotters. To install a device driver for a printer or plotter,
see "Installing a Printer" in topic 3.8.1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 47 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To install a device driver (other than one for a printer or plotter):

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Device Driver Install.
4. Insert the device driver diskette.
5. Select Install.
6. Select the device driver to install from the list.
7. Select OK.

For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the device.

Note: Do not use the Device Driver Install object to install device drivers found
on the OS/2 Installation diskettes.

3.1.4 Font Palette

The Font Palette allows you to:


Change the typeface of any text in the Workplace Shell interface
Change sample typefaces currently available on the Font Palette
Add new fonts to your system
Delete existing fonts from your system

A font is a collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and style


used to produce text on displays and printers. When you install OS/2, the IBM Core
Fonts are automatically installed, unless you specify otherwise. The IBM Core

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 48 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Fonts can be used by your display and IBM LaserPrinter, HP** LaserJet**, and
PostScript** printers.

The IBM Core Fonts consist of a set of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts that work with
the Adobe Type Manager** (ATM). The table that follows lists the IBM Core Fonts.

+--------------------------------------------------+
¦ Table 1. IBM Core Fonts ¦
+--------------------------------------------------¦
¦ Family Name ¦ Typeface ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ Times New Roman** ¦ Times New Roman ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Times New Roman Bold ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Times New Roman Bold ¦
¦ ¦ Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Times New Roman Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ Helvetica** ¦ Helvetica ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Helvetica Bold ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Helvetica Bold Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Helvetica Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ Courier ¦ Courier ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Courier Bold ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Courier Bold Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ ¦ Courier Italic ¦
+----------------------+---------------------------¦
¦ Symbol Set ¦ Symbol Set ¦
+--------------------------------------------------+

The Adobe Type Manager is an integral part of the OS/2 operating system and
works with existing OS/2 and Windows application programs to produce the sharpest
possible fonts on the screen and on the printed page. Because it incorporates
PostScript outline font technology, the ATM program eliminates jagged fonts so that
your screen can display high-quality typefaces of any size or style. The ATM
program also enables even inexpensive printers to print PostScript language fonts
that are crisp and smooth.

Note: If you want to use the fonts for both OS/2 and Windows applications, you
must install the font files using both the Font Palette and the ATM
Control Panel.

Subtemas
3.1.4.1 Changing Fonts
3.1.4.2 Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette
3.1.4.3 Adding Fonts to Your System
3.1.4.4 Removing Fonts from Your System

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 49 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.4.1 Changing Fonts

The Font Palette window displays sample typefaces of eight of the fonts
installed on your system. You can use these samples to change any text in the
Workplace Shell interface.

To change the typeface of text:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Font Palette.
4. Point to the sample typeface you want to use.
5. Press and hold mouse button 2. The mouse pointer changes to a (pencil).
6. Drag the sample typeface to the object whose text font you want to change.

If you drag a sample typeface to an object on the Desktop, the text of all the
objects on the Desktop changes to that typeface. If you drag a sample typeface
to an open object, such as a folder, the typeface will change only for the
objects within the folder.
7. Release mouse button 2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 50 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.4.2 Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette

To change which sample typefaces appear on the Font Palette:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Font Palette.
4. Select the sample typeface you want to change.
5. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
6. Select the down arrow for the Name field.
7. Select a new typeface from the list.
8. Select the Style and Size if desired.
9. Select the appropriate Emphasis if desired.
10. Point to the title-bar icon.
11. Double-click.

3.1.4.3 Adding Fonts to Your System

There are thousands of additional font styles in the Adobe Type 1 font-file
format that are available for use with the OS/2 operating system. These fonts
require two files for each typeface. These files have an AFM and PFB file-name
extension. The Font Palette converts the AFM file to an OFM file when it installs
the new font.

Note: If the set of fonts you want to install is supplied on multiple


diskettes, you might need to copy the files into a temporary directory, because the
font installation process requires that both files for a given typeface be
available at the same time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 51 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To add more fonts to your system:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Font Palette.
4. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
5. Select Add.
6. Follow the instructions on the Add Font window; then select Add.
7. Select the names of the font files that you want to install on your system.
8. Select Add.
9. Point to the title-bar icon.
10. Double-click.

See "Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette" in topic 3.1.4.2 if you
want to add one of the new typefaces to the Font Palette samples.

3.1.4.4 Removing Fonts from Your System

To remove a font from your system:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 52 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Font Palette.
4. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select the names of the font files that you want to delete from your system.
7. Select Delete.
8. When the files have been deleted, point to the title-bar icon.
9. Double-click.

Note: Removing a font deletes the corresponding files from your hard disk
unless they are needed by the Windows Adobe Type Manager. For more information
about the Windows Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows Programs in OS/2 book
located in the Information folder.

3.1.5 Keyboard

The Keyboard object is used to adjust the blink rate of the cursor,
change the speed at which a key repeats when held down, and customize the
keyboard to make it easier to use for those with special needs.

To customize the keyboard:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 53 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Keyboard.
4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
5. Point to the title-bar icon.
6. Double-click.

Note: If the keyboard speed is set in Windows, when that WIN-OS/2 session
is started, the keyboard speed for the entire system is reset and
remains reset even after that WIN-OS/2 session is closed.

Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings to meet your special
requirements. For example, you can make keys "sticky" so that you can press and
release a series of keys (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have the keys
operate as if the keys were pressed and released at the same time.

To enable sticky keys:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 54 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Keyboard.
4. Select Special Needs.
5. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
6. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift three times; then
press the key you want to stay stuck down.
7. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to operate as a sticky key.
8. Point to the title-bar icon.
9. Double-click.

To deactivate sticky keys, press and release each sticky key once.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 55 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.6 Add Programs

Some programs do not place a program object in a folder or on the


Desktop during their installation. Without the object, you cannot
use the Workplace Shell to start the program. To correct this
situation, you can use the Add Programs object. Add Programs uses a
database to identify possible programs, set the correct DOS
settings, and select an appropriate program object for the newly
added OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs.

You can create your own database to be used with Add Programs. For
more information, see the OS/2 Tutorial, the help information
provided with Add Programs or the Master Help Index.

To add programs to the Desktop:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Add Programs. The Add Programs to the Desktop window appears.
4. Select Add new programs
5. Select Ok. A message is displayed when the process is complete.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 56 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Select Ok.

The Add Programs program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows Programs
folder, and a Windows Groups folder.

Some Windows groups contain DOS programs. After you add them to the Desktop,
these DOS program objects are placed in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder and also in a
DOS folder if you added DOS programs.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system, ¦
¦ you might see a folder on your Desktop with the same name as one of ¦
¦ your old groups. This folder contains program objects that represent ¦
¦ your old programs; however, Add Programs also puts these programs and ¦
¦ program objects in new folders (DOS Programs or Windows Programs ¦
¦ folders). ¦
¦ ¦
¦ Use the program objects in these new folders rather than the old group ¦
¦ name folders because the preselected settings will work best for the ¦
¦ performance of your program. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 57 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.7 Mouse

The Mouse object is used to change the behavior of your mouse. You can:

Control the speed of the mouse pointer


Change the look of the pointer
Change the length, size and color of the pointer tail
Change the mouse for left-hand use
Customize the Alt, Shift, and Ctrl key combinations
Change the length and look of the mouse pointer tail

Note: You can change the speed of your mouse for your Windows sessions using
the Windows Control Panel. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration
of how to customize mouse settings.

To change the mouse settings:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Mouse.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 58 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Use the Timings page to change the speed at which actions occur when you use the
mouse. Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or right-hand
use. If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings page are
automatically updated; however, you also can use the Mappings page to customize
them individually. Use the Comet Cursor page to change the length and look of the
mouse pointer's tail.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can ¦
¦ reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device ¦
¦ without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see ¦
¦ "Selective Install" in topic 3.1.15). ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.1.8 Scheme Palette

The Scheme Palette contains many different predefined color schemes. Each scheme
has a preset color for the following:

Desktop
Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
Different parts of the windows such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the
background.

You can use these schemes as they are, or you can change their colors. In
addition, you can also use the Scheme Palette to change the width of the borders
around the windows, and the font used.

Subtemas
3.1.8.1 Changing Color Schemes
3.1.8.2 Globally Changing Color Schemes
3.1.8.3 Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette
3.1.8.4 Changing the Fonts in a Scheme

3.1.8.1 Changing Color Schemes

To use a predefined scheme to change the colors of one folder or window:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 59 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Scheme Palette.
4. Make sure that the folder or window you want to change is visible.
5. Point to a scheme on the palette.
6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
7. Drag the color scheme to the window.
8. Release mouse button 2. The window colors change to the new scheme.

3.1.8.2 Globally Changing Color Schemes

To use one of the predefined schemes to change the colors for all the folders that
do not have their colors individually set:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 60 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Scheme Palette.
4. Point to a scheme on the palette.
5. Press and hold Alt.
6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
7. Drag the color scheme to the Desktop.
8. Release mouse button 2.
9. Release Alt. The colors change to the new scheme.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 61 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.8.3 Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette

To change the colors within a scheme on the Scheme Palette:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Scheme Palette.
4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
5. Select Edit Scheme.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 62 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose color you want
to change.
7. Select Edit Color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to or
change the color. (For more information about the choices available in this
window, select the Help push button.)
8. Adjust the color until the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in
the window.
9. Point to the title-bar icon.
10. Double-click. The selected window part changes to the new color on the Scheme
Palette.
11. When all the color changes have been made, point to the title-bar icon.
12. Double-click.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ You can point to an area on the sample palette and click mouse button ¦
¦ 2 to select the part of the window to be changed, instead of using the ¦
¦ Window area field to select it. This reduces the amount of scrolling ¦
¦ needed to find the correct window part. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 63 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.8.4 Changing the Fonts in a Scheme

To change the font of text within the scheme:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Scheme Palette.
4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
5. Select Edit Scheme.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 64 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose font you want to
change.
7. Select Edit Font.
8. Select the name, style, size, and emphasis that you want to use.
9. Point to the title-bar icon.
10. Double-click. The font of the selected window part changes on the Scheme
Palette. For more information about fonts, see "Font Palette" in topic 3.1.4.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ To display a colorful picture (bit map) on the background of your ¦
¦ folder windows or the Desktop folder: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder. ¦
¦ 2. Select Settings. ¦
¦ 3. Select the Background tab. ¦
¦ 4. Select the Image radio button in the Background type field. ¦
¦ 5. Select the arrow to the right of the Image File field. ¦
¦ 6. Select a file with a .BMP file-name extension. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
¦ The image appears in the background of your folder. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.1.9 Sound

The Sound object is used by an application to generate a warning beep. The beep
can be turned off.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 65 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is displayed
or an invalid key is pressed. To customize the sound settings:
1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Sound.

Note: If you install OS/2 Multimedia additional sound options are available. For
more information, see the online Multimedia book.

3.1.10 Spooler

The Spooler stores jobs that are waiting for an available printer or
port. OS/2 includes a spooler for printouts you request in OS/2, DOS,
and Windows sessions (an instance of a command prompt or started
program).

When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in place in the SPOOL
directory. The SPOOL directory is created by the system during installation. You
can use the Spooler object to change the location of the spooler path and to
disable or enable the spooler.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 66 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Subtemas
3.1.10.1 Enabling the Spooler
3.1.10.2 Changing the Spooler Path
3.1.10.3 Changing the Print Priority
3.1.10.4 Disabling the Spooler

3.1.10.1 Enabling the Spooler

To enable the spooler:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Spooler.
4. Point to the title-bar icon.
5. Click mouse button 2.
6. Select Disable spooler
7. Point to the title-bar icon.
8. Double-click. (Spooling takes effect immediately. You do not need to restart
your system.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 67 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.10.2 Changing the Spooler Path

Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a
separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files. Be sure to wait
until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.

To change the spooler path:

1. Select all the printer objects.


2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
3. Open OS/2 System.
4. Open System Setup.
5. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
6. Select Spool path.
7. In the Spool path field, type the new path.
8. Point to the title-bar icon.
9. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 68 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.10.3 Changing the Print Priority

You can set the print priority higher or lower to adjust the speed at which spooled
print jobs are printed.

To set the print priority:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
4. Select the Print priority page.
5. Move the slider arm to select priority.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 69 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.10.4 Disabling the Spooler

You might want to disable the spooler to print jobs that have a high-security risk.
Disabling the spooler prevents others from viewing your print jobs in a printer-
object window. However, you cannot disable spooling to a network printer on a
network server.

To disable the spooler:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Spooler.
4. Point to the title-bar icon.
5. Click mouse button 2.
6. Select Enable spooler.
7. Restart your system.

When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer. However, a
printout might contain material from different jobs mixed together.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 70 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11 System

The System object is used to change system defaults. You can select how
you want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want
windows that you have minimized to be displayed. This notebook is also
used to specify confirmation messages and to turn off the product
information window. For more information about each tab, select the help push
button provided on each page.

Subtemas
3.1.11.1 Confirming Delete Actions
3.1.11.2 Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity
3.1.11.3 Resolving Title Conflicts
3.1.11.4 Changing System Defaults
3.1.11.5 Printing a Screen
3.1.11.6 Displaying Logos
3.1.11.7 Changing Screen Resolution

3.1.11.1 Confirming Delete Actions

To specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you delete an
object or a folder:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 71 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Select the Confirmations tab.


5. Place a check mark next to each item you want a confirmation message for.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

3.1.11.2 Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity

To enable or disable the direction of any keyboard and mouse activity during the
startup of any Presentation Manager program:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. Place a check mark next to Enable type ahead or Disable type ahead. (The
default is Enable type ahead.)
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 72 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11.3 Resolving Title Conflicts

To specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts if you create, copy, or
move an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Title tab.
5. Select the choice that best describes how you want the system to respond when a
title conflict appears.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 73 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11.4 Changing System Defaults

To change the system defaults for a window:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Window tab.
5. Select the choices that best describe how you want the windows to behave.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 74 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11.5 Printing a Screen

To be able to print the information in an open window:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Print Screen tab.
5. Select Enable.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

To print the open window:

1. Select the open window.


2. Press Print Screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 75 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11.6 Displaying Logos

To specify if you want a logo to be displayed and how long to display it:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Logo tab.
5. Select the choices that best describes how you want the system to handle
product information and logos.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 76 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.11.7 Changing Screen Resolution

To change the screen resolution for an XGA* display adapter:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the Screen tab.
5. Select the resolution you want to use.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

Note: The Screen tab will not appear if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA
driver.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 77 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ After changing screen resolutions from a higher resolution to a lower ¦
¦ resolution, some applications might open windows that are partially ¦
¦ off the screen. If this occurs: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ 1. Press Alt+Spacebar. ¦
¦ 2. Select Move. ¦
¦ 3. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the window. ¦
¦ 4. Click mouse button 1 or press Enter. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
¦ or: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ 1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop. ¦
¦ 2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time. ¦
¦ 3. Point to the name of the program. ¦
¦ 4. Click mouse button 2. ¦
¦ 5. Select Tile or Cascade. The window will now appear on the screen. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.1.12 System Clock

The System Clock object is used to set the system date and time or to
set an alarm. You can display the clock in either analog or digital
mode.

To set the system clock:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 78 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Select System Clock.
4. Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
5. Select Settings.
6. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
7. Select View; change to the View page if necessary. (To view a different View
page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)
8. Point to the title-bar icon.
9. Double-click.

3.1.13 WIN-OS/2 Setup

The WIN-OS/2 Setup object is used to select a public or private clipboard


or dynamic data exchange (DDE). The clipboard and DDE are features that
allow data exchange between programs. You also can use this object to
preselect WIN-OS/2 settings for all Windows programs before you start
them. Use the Fast load setting to automatically start a WIN-OS/2
session when you start OS/2. If you change a setting, the change affects
only subsequent Windows programs that are started. Programs that are currently
running are not affected.

If you are using Windows programs that can share information using the clipboard
or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) feature, then you can change the way these features
work in all WIN-OS/2 sessions.

Note: Be sure you check with the instructions that came with your program to
determine if these features are supported.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 79 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

The clipboard is an area that temporarily holds data. Data is placed in the
clipboard by selecting cut or copy from a menu. You can cut (move) or copy data
from one document and paste it into another document, even if the other document is
in a different program. For example, you can place a spreadsheet from one program
into a document from another program.

The DDE feature enables the exchange of data between programs. Any change made
to information in one file is applied to the same information in an associated
file. In the example above, if changes are made to the original spreadsheet,
corresponding changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document. If changes are
made to the spreadsheet in the document, corresponding changes are made to the
original spreadsheet.

The clipboard and DDE can be set to Public or Private. When DDE is set to
Public, information can be shared with OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 sessions. Information
cannot be shared with DOS sessions. When the clipboard or DDE is set to Private,
sharing data between sessions is restricted. This means that only information for
those programs running in that single session can be shared. When OS/2 is
installed, the clipboard and DDE are set to Public.

Windows programs that have the clipboard or DDE feature are set up during
installation of the OS/2 operating system to use a Public setting for all WIN-OS/2
sessions. You can use the WIN-OS/2 Setup object to set these features to private.
You can further customize the way you use these features by using the Settings
notebook of the program object.

Note: Changing the clipboard and DDE features to Private will not affect the
performance of your Windows programs.

To change the clipboard or DDE feature to Private:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 80 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open WIN-OS/2 Setup.
4. Select Data Exchange.
5. Select Private for Dynamic Data Exchange or Clipboard.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

Note: If you change the settings for the clipboard or DDE while a program is
running in a WIN-OS/2 session, the settings for the program will take effect
immediately.

For related information about the clipboard, DDE, WIN-OS/2, and Windows
Programs, see the Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the online Information folder
or the Master Help Index.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 81 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.14 Power

The Power object manages and tracks power consumption in battery-powered


computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM) standard. The
APM standard defines the way the hardware and software work together to
reduce power consumption and help extend battery life.

If your computer supports the APM standard, the Power object might be
automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process. If it was not
installed, you can install it by using Selective Install and selecting Advanced
Power Management. For information about Selective Install, see "Selective Install"
in topic 3.1.15.

Note: This power management feature is not available if your computer does not
have APM BIOS or a device driver that emulates APM BIOS.

OS/2 APM support relies on the power status information returned from the BIOS
on your computer. You might notice incorrect battery life or status within the
Power icon on your computer. If this occurs, rely on the LEDs on your computer for
accurate power status information.

Turning the APM setting to Off also turns off the BIOS power management. If you
want to turn off APM, but not the BIOS power management, place REM before the APM
device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, and then restart your system to
invoke the change.

For example:

REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\APM.SYS

Subtemas
3.1.14.1 Power Object
3.1.14.2 Power Settings
3.1.14.3 Power Status
3.1.14.4 Suspend Mode

3.1.14.1 Power Object

To open the Power object: To display the Power


pop-up menu:
1. Open OS/2 System.
1. Point to the
2. Open System Setup. Power object.

3. Open Power. 2. Click mouse


button 1 or 2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 82 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.14.2 Power Settings

To set power management support:

1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.


2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
3. Select Power.
4. Set Power management to On or Off. If set to On, power consumption will be
reduced and power status will be tracked. If set to Off, the suspend mode, power
status, and battery status features are disabled.
5. Set Confirm on power state changes if you want to confirm requests to go to
suspend mode. (See "Suspend Mode" in topic 3.1.14.4.)

To set the default status view of the status window:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 83 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.


2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
3. Select View.
4. Select Full status or Battery only for Default status view.
5. Set Refresh (of the status window) to On or Off.
6. If you set Refresh to On, select the number of minutes (from 1 to 30) for
Refresh rate. The system will automatically update the status window at the
intervals you specified.

You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the Power
object pop-up menu.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 84 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.14.3 Power Status

To display the power status:

1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.


2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
3. Select Full status or Battery status. A full-status Power window or a power-
gauge Power window is displayed, depending on your selection.

Note: You cannot change the size of the Power window.

A full-status Power window displays the following information:

Battery life. This information is displayed as a power gauge that shows the
power level of the battery compared to the capacity of the battery. When the power
gauge indicator is completely shaded, the battery is at full power. The shaded
area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery power level increases or
decreases. When the power gauge indicator is dimmed, there is no battery in the
computer or the computer cannot provide battery information.

Power source for the computer. If the system cannot determine the power
source, no power source information is displayed.

Battery state, which is the charge state of the battery. Battery state
information is displayed as follows:

High Battery charge is OK; continue using your computer.

Low Recharge the battery or switch to another power source


such as another battery or AC power.

Critical Battery charge is depleted. Recharge the battery or


switch to another power source immediately to avoid a
system failure or data loss.

Charging System is restoring the battery charge.

Unknown System cannot determine the battery state or there is no


battery in your computer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 85 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.14.4 Suspend Mode

To set the suspend mode:


1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.

2. Select Suspend.

When suspend mode is activated, battery power is conserved by dimming the


display and turning off devices that are not in use.

If Confirm on power status changes is set in the Power - Settings notebook, a


message is displayed that asks you if you want to continue before switching to
suspend mode.

Note: Different computers have different procedures for exiting suspend mode
and resuming operation. Refer to the documentation that came with your
computer for information about its suspend mode features.

After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you
can resume operation of your system. This delay might be a few seconds,
depending on your system.

3.1.15 Selective Install

The Selective Install object is used to add features that you did
not include when you originally installed the operating system. You
also can use the Selective Install object to change the mouse,
display adapter, or country information for your system.

Note: You will need the OS/2 installation diskettes for each of the procedures
that follow.

Subtemas
3.1.15.1 Adding Options after Installation
3.1.15.2 Adding Online Documentation after Installation
3.1.15.3 Changing Display Adapter Support
3.1.15.4 Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 86 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.15.1 Adding Options after Installation

To add options after installation:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you want to
change or add.
5. Select OK.
6. Place a check mark to the left of any feature you want to add. (For more
information about a feature, press F1.) If a More push button is displayed to the
right of a feature, select it to see additional choices.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 87 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.15.2 Adding Online Documentation after Installation

To add online documentation after installation:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select OK when the System
Configuration window is
displayed.
5. Select the check box to the left of Documentation.

6. Select More to the right of Documentation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 88 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

7. Select the check box to the left of any documentation units to deselect the
ones you do not want to add.
8. Select OK.
9. Select Install.
10. Follow the instructions on the screen.

3.1.15.3 Changing Display Adapter Support

To change the display adapter support after installation:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
window.
5. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
6. Select OK.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 89 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.15.4 Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation

To add PCMCIA** support after installation:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
5. Select the check box to the left of PCMCIA Support to display the Select PCMCIA
system window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 90 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Select the appropriate system (this should either be a direct match with your
target install system or a known compatible system).
7. Select OK.
8. Select Install.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen.

3.1.16 PCMCIA

OS/2 provides software support for Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association (PCMCIA) hardware. PCMCIA is the standard for PC card adapters
associated with portable computers. A PC card is a small form-factor adapter about
the size and shape of a credit card. You can use PC cards with laptops, notebooks,
tablets, and other portable computer systems that are equipped with a PCMCIA slot.

Subtemas
3.1.16.1 Installing PCMCIA
3.1.16.2 PCMCIA Components
3.1.16.3 Plug and Play for PCMCIA
3.1.16.4 Options
3.1.16.5 Object Launcher

3.1.16.1 Installing PCMCIA

PCMCIA can be automatically installed during OS/2 installation or it can be


installed through Selective Install after OS/2 installation. To install PCMCIA
support after installation, see "Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation" in topic
3.1.15.4.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 91 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.2 PCMCIA Components

PCMCIA consists of the following services and client device drivers (CDDs):

Card services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer between the


Client device driver (CDD) and hardware-specific socket services.

Socket services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer across


hardware platforms for specific chip-set support.

Resource Client - A special-purpose CDD that provides Card Services,


detailing the resources in use and available at start up.

Modem Card Manager - A generic CDD that provides a Card Manager level of
support for PCMCIA modem cards.

3.1.16.3 Plug and Play for PCMCIA

Plug and Play for PCMCIA is an OS/2 application that displays PC card
information, socket status, assigned resources, and card type. There are two basic
types of PC cards:

Memory cards, which contain specific types of memory devices


Input/output (I/O) cards, which contain devices such as modems and disks

Both card types are assigned system resources, which are used to communicate
with the card's devices.

Plug and Play for PCMCIA also allows you to start applications automatically
when their objects (icons) are registered to a PC card type.

To open the Plug and Play for PCMCIA object:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Plug and Play for PCMCIA.

Subtemas
3.1.16.3.1 Socket and Card Information
3.1.16.3.2 Card Types
3.1.16.3.3 Card Status
3.1.16.3.4 Memory Card - Details View
3.1.16.3.5 I/O Card - Details View

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 92 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.3.1 Socket and Card Information

The Plug and Play for PCMCIA window displays the following information:

No. Socket number.


Card Type Card-type icon and text.
Card Status Card-status icon and text.

3.1.16.3.2 Card Types

Booted
Communication - for the following card types:
3270 5250
Ethernet LAN
SDLC Token Ring
Hard Disk
I/O - for multi-function, parallel, and SCSI card types.
Memory
Modem, Serial

3.1.16.3.3 Card Status

Empty
Inserted
Ready
Not Ready
Inserted for Memory

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 93 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.3.4 Memory Card - Details View

To receive additional information about an inserted memory card:

1. Select the memory card.


2. Press Enter.

The Memory Card - Details View appears with the following information:

Card information Vendor name and card description data retrieved from
card.
Write protect Yes or no.
Battery Good, low, or dead.
Region Region of card memory for memory devices such as SRAM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 94 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.3.5 I/O Card - Details View

To receive additional information about an inserted I/O-type card:

1. Select the appropriate card.


2. Press Enter.

The I/O Card - Details View appears with the following information:

Card information Vendor name and card description data retrieved from
card.
Assigned resources System resources used by this PC card:
IRQ Interrupt request level.
I/O Input/output ports.

3.1.16.4 Options

The Options menu bar choice has two selections, Customize and Register Object.

The Customize option allows you to turn a beep on and off, display the Plug and
Play for PCMCIA window when a PC card is used, and keep Plug and Play for PCMCIA
visible when other applications are running in the foreground.

The Register Object option allows you to register objects to be launched


(started or opened) when a specific type of PC card is used. (It is not necessary
to have a card inserted when registering objects.) If more than one object is
registered to the same card type or the manual option is selected, the Object
Launcher window is displayed where you can select which registered object to
launch.

Note: Objects can be launched only after Plug and Play for PCMCIA is opened.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 95 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Subtemas
3.1.16.4.1 Customize
3.1.16.4.2 Register Object

3.1.16.4.1 Customize

To use the Customize window:

1. Select Options.
2. Select Customize.
3. To display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window whenever a PC card is inserted,
removed, ready, or not ready, select the appropriate check box under Display
window.
4. To hear a beep whenever a PC card is inserted, removed, ready, or not ready,
select the appropriate check box under Beep.
5. To keep the Plug and Play for PCMCIA icon or window in the foreground (visible)
when running another application, select Yes.
6. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.

Note: Plug and Play for PCMCIA must be open for your selections to
become active.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 96 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.4.2 Register Object

To register an object:

1. Select Options.
2. Select Register Object.
3. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Select a card type field to display
a list of available card types.
4. Select the desired card type.
5. Drag a copy of each object that you want to register to this card type to the
Object List field. The name of the object appears in the list. (If you have
registered more than one object for this card type, see also "Object Launcher" in
topic 3.1.16.5.)
6. Select Automatically or Manually to indicate how you would like the object to
be launched. (If you have selected Manually, see also "Object Launcher" in topic
3.1.16.5.)
7. Select any of the choices under When card is to indicate when you would like to
launch the object.

Note: The Ready and Not ready choices work only with I/O card types.

8. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.

To deregister an object:

1. Select the object to be removed from the Object List.


2. Select Remove.

Note: Selecting Remove does not affect the original object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 97 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.1.16.5 Object Launcher

The Object Launcher is displayed when Plug and Play for PCMCIA is open and one
or both of the following occurs:

More than one object is registered for the inserted PC card type.
Manually is selected under Launch Choices.

To launch an object:
1. Select the object to launch.
2. Select Launch.

3.1.17 Selective Uninstall

The Selective Uninstall program allows you to remove operating


system files, programs, and device drivers from your hard disk.
You might want to uninstall files to free hard disk space for
other programs.

Warning: Do not remove operating system files, programs, or device drivers from
your hard disk unless you have backed up the operating system (as it was originally
installed). Use the BACKUP.EXE program from the utility diskettes you created with
"Create Utility Diskettes" program to back up your system. After system files,
programs, or device drivers are removed, they are unavailable for future use.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 98 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

You can recover files, programs, or device drivers that you delete (as they were
originally installed) only by using the RESTORE.EXE file from the Utility Diskettes
you created.

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.

3. Locate the Selective Uninstall object inside the System Setup folder.

4. Open Selective Uninstall. The Selective Uninstall window appears.

For information about Selective Uninstall, press F1. Or, place the mouse
pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help window, press
Esc.

1. To make a selection, press the Tab key until your choice is


highlighted; then press the Spacebar. A check mark (&check.) appears
in the box next to your choice. Or, place the mouse pointer on the
check box beside a choice and click once.

2. The More push button next to some choices indicates that a secondary
window containing more choices associated with your selection is
available. After you select a choice, the More push button is
highlighted. Select More to display a list of items you can choose to
remove.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 99 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Warning: When you select More, all items in the associated choices l
ist are checked. Make sure you remove the check marks from those
items that you do not want to delete from your hard disk.

For information about the items in the window, press F1. Or, place
the mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.

3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove operating system


features from your hard disk.

+--- Adobe Type Manager -------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Your hard disk contains the Adobe Type Manager program. The program ¦
¦ runs in the WIN-OS/2 environment. Adobe Type Manager uses ¦
¦ PostScript(**) outline font technology to produce the sharpest ¦
¦ possible type on the screen and on the printed page. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ If you intend to use Adobe Type Manager, do not choose to uninstall ¦
¦ Fonts. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ For more information about using Adobe Type Manager, see the online ¦
¦ Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the Information folder on the ¦
¦ desktop. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.1.18 Create Utility Diskettes

The OS/2 operating system comes installed on your hard disk. Your computer has
a program that creates diskettes called Utility Diskettes. Create these diskettes
to help you correct problems if you cannot start your computer from the hard disk.

The Utility Diskettes also allow you to start the procedure that backs up the
operating system to diskettes. Backup diskettes allow you to restore OS/2 to your
hard disk in the event of a computer problem.

To complete this procedure, you will need three blank, high-density (2MB)
diskettes for a 1.44MB drive, or one extended-density (4MB) diskette for a 2.88MB
drive.

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 100 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Open Create Utility Diskettes. The Create Utility Diskettes window appears.

For information about Create Utility Diskettes, press F1. Or, place the mouse
pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help window, press
Esc.

4. Select the drive where the Utility Diskettes will be created. If you select
drive A, insert a blank diskette into drive A.

5. Type C. Or, place the mouse pointer on the Create push button and click once.
Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare Utility Diskettes.

Label the first diskette you create Utility Diskette 1, the second diskette Utility
Diskette 2, and the third diskette Utility Diskette 3. Store the diskettes in a
safe place.

3.2 Chapter 5. Starting Objects Automatically

The Startup folder contains objects that you want to automatically start every time
the system starts.

This chapter describes how to use the Startup folder to start objects. It
also describes how to customize your system startup by placing variables
in your CONFIG.SYS file.

Subtemas
3.2.1 Starting Programs Automatically
3.2.2 Preventing Automatic Startup
3.2.3 Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 101 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.2.1 Starting Programs Automatically

You can start programs automatically at system startup using a Startup folder, a
STARTUP.CMD file, or both. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration
of how to use the Startup folder.

Subtemas
3.2.1.1 Startup Folder
3.2.1.2 STARTUP.CMD File

3.2.1.1 Startup Folder

You can place objects of frequently used programs and batch files in a Startup
folder so that every time you start your computer, the programs and batch files
will start. The objects in the Startup folder are started when the Desktop folder
is opened at system startup. You cannot specify the order in which the objects in
the folder are started.

You should place a shadow of the program objects in the Startup folder instead
of the original object. This ensures that any changes made to the original object
are applied to the object in the Startup folder.

To create a shadow of an object and place it in the Startup folder:

1. Point to the object.


2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 102 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Drag the object to the Startup folder.


5. Release mouse button 2.
6. Release the Ctrl and Shift keys.

3.2.1.2 STARTUP.CMD File

A STARTUP.CMD file is similar to the Startup folder in that it is used to


automatically start programs and batch files at system startup. If a STARTUP.CMD
file is present, it will be run prior to the starting of the Desktop. For more
information about creating and running a STARTUP.CMD file, refer to the online
Command Reference.

3.2.2 Preventing Automatic Startup

Programs located in the Startup folder or programs running at the time the
computer was shut down will automatically start when the computer is restarted. To
prevent these programs from starting:

1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the computer.


2. When you see the Desktop animation (similar to an exploding box), press and
hold Ctrl+Shift+F1.
3. Hold the keys for approximately 15 seconds or until the Desktop appear. (If
the hard disk light stops flashing during this time, your computer might be
suspended. Release the keys quickly, and then resume holding the keys until the
Desktop objects appear.)

3.2.3 Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup

You can customize the way your Workplace Shell starts by changing the system
variables at either a command prompt or in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Precede each of the variables with the SET command.

The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:

AUTOSTART Determines the parts of the Workplace Shell that are


automatically started. Eliminating any of the
options from the statement restricts the user from
accessing portions of the Shell. For example:

SET AUTOSTART=FOLDERS, PROGRAMS, TASKLIST, CONNECTIONS

FOLDERS Allows a user to open additional


folders after startup.

PROGRAMS Allows a user to open additional


programs after startup.

TASKLIST Allows a user to open the Window


List.

CONNECTIONS Recreates the network connections

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 103 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

established during the last log on.

LAUNCHPAD Creates a new LaunchPad on the


Desktop.

OS2_SHELL Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions. For


example:

SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE

RESTARTOBJECTS Sets the objects that will be automatically started


by the Workplace Shell. For example:

SET RESTARTOBJECTS=STARTUPFOLDERSONLY

YES
Starts all the objects that were running at the
time of shutdown and all objects in the Startup
folder. This is the default.

NO
Does not start any of the applications that were
running at the time of shutdown and does not
start the objects in the Startup folder.

STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
Starts only those objects in the Startup folder.

REBOOTONLY
Starts objects only when the Workplace Shell is
started by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on
the computer.

RUNWORKPLACE Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2


operating system. PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the
Workplace Shell interface. For example:

SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE

SYSTEM_INI Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace


Shell for system information about such items as
default colors and printer drivers. For example:

SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI

USER_INI Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace


Shell for system information about such items as
program defaults, display options, and file options.
For example:

SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 104 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

For more information about customizing the user interface, refer to the online
Command Reference.

The DISKCACHE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file is set up so that it


automatically runs the CHKDSK program upon startup if the system shuts down
improperly. The CHKDSK program analyzes and fixes disk problems caused by the
improper shutdown.

If you add hard disk drives or partitions after the installation of the OS/2
operating system, you should edit the CONFIG.SYS file and update the AC:x parameter
to reflect the new additions. AC: starts the auto-check feature on the specified
drives when the system shuts down improperly. The value x represents the letters of
the disks or partitions on the system that you want to check.

For example, if you want to check disks C and D and your existing DISKCACHE
statement is:

DISKCACHE=64,LW

Add the AC: parameter to the statement as follows:

DISKCACHE=64,LW,AC:CD

For more information about the DISKCACHE statement, refer to the online Command
Reference.

3.3 Chapter 6. Using Disk Drives

This chapter describes how to use the Drives folder to access and use
the different types of storage media installed in your computer.

When opened, the Drives folder provides a view of all drive objects in the
system. For example, the following drive types could be accessed from the Drives
folder:

Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape backup
Optical disc
PCMCIA

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 105 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To view the Drive objects:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Drives.

Note: Drive objects cannot be


copied.

Subtemas
3.3.1 About Hard Disks and Diskettes
3.3.2 Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes
3.3.3 Formatting a Disk
3.3.4 Checking a Disk
3.3.5 Drive A
3.3.6 Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette
3.3.7 Copying Objects to or from a Diskette
3.3.8 Moving Objects to or from a Diskette
3.3.9 Deleting Objects from a Diskette
3.3.10 Formatting a Diskette
3.3.11 Checking a Diskette

3.3.1 About Hard Disks and Diskettes

There are two kinds of disks:

Hard disk A non-removable disk that is built into a hard-disk drive.


Hard disks come in a variety of capacities and can hold large
amounts of information. (Capacity is the maximum amount of
information that a diskette or disk can hold.)

Information can be stored on and erased from the disk over and
over again. The computer can write to and read information
from the hard disk much faster than it can from a diskette.

Diskette A removable disk that can be inserted in and removed from a


diskette drive. Diskettes come in a variety of capacities.

Diskettes cannot hold as much information as a hard disk.


Information can be stored on and erased from the diskette over
and over again. The computer cannot write to or read
information from a diskette as fast as it can from a hard
disk. There are two sizes of diskettes, 5.25" and 3.5":

5.25-inch diskettes are thin, flexible, and somewhat


fragile. A 5.25-inch diskette has a write-protect notch
located on the right side. You can place a write-protect
tab over the notch to protect the information stored on
the diskette.

To store information on or erase information from the


diskette, you must remove the write-protect tab from the
diskette.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 106 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.5-inch diskettes are protected by a hard plastic cover


that makes them more durable. A 3.5-inch diskette can be
write protected by sliding a built-in tab to reveal the
write-protect opening.

To store information on or erase information from the


diskette, you must slide the tab over the write-protect
opening on the diskette.

Note: If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or


tab, the diskette is permanently write protected. Many
software manufacturers use permanently write-protected
diskettes to prevent the information on the diskettes
from being accidentally changed or deleted.

The capacity of a diskette and a hard disk is measured in bytes. A diskette


must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of the diskette
drive in order for the diskette and the drive to be compatible. So even though a
diskette is the correct size physically, its capacity might not be compatible with
the diskette drive in the computer.

For example, a 3.5-inch diskette drive designed to work with 2.88MB diskettes
can use 1.44MB diskettes, but a 1.44MB diskette drive cannot use a 2.88MB diskette.
The following terms are used to describe the capacity of disks and the size of
files:

Byte Amount of space it takes to store a character.


Kilobyte 1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.
Megabyte 1024KB (approximately a million bytes) and is abbreviated as
MB.
Gigabyte 1024MB (approximately a billion bytes) and is abbreviated as
GB.

The following terms are equivalent:

1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes

Each diskette drive and hard disk drive in a computer has a letter assigned to
it. This letter is the name that both you and the computer use to identify the
drive. For example, on many computers the diskette drive is called drive A and the
hard disk drive is called drive C.

3.3.2 Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes

You can use the Drives folder to access the information on your hard disk
and diskette drives. This allows you to view disk information, display
the files on the disks, and copy and move files. The files can be viewed
as objects so they can easily be copied and moved with the mouse.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 107 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ For specific instructions on using the Drive A object, see "Drive A" ¦
¦ in topic 3.3.5. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

Subtemas
3.3.2.1 Viewing Disk Information
3.3.2.2 Displaying Objects
3.3.2.3 Copying Objects
3.3.2.4 Moving Objects
3.3.2.5 Deleting Objects from a Drive

3.3.2.1 Viewing Disk Information

To view the size of a disk:


1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open Drives.
3. Open the drive object you want
information about.

3.3.2.2 Displaying Objects

The drive objects are used to display the contents of the drives on your
computer. The contents of the drive can be displayed in three different
views:

Icon view Displays the contents of the disk as icons. This is the
default if the disk does not have folders (directories).

Tree view Displays the contents of the disk in a tree. This is the
default if the disk has folders (directories). A plus (+)
sign to the left of a folder indicates that additional
folders exist inside the folder. By selecting the plus
sign, you can see the other folders in the folder. Pointing
to a folder and double-clicking displays the contents of the
folder in an icon view.

Note: When an additional folder is opened from a folder


that is in tree view, if the default for the
additional folder is also tree view, it is overridden
and displayed in an icon view. There is no need to
open it again in tree view because it is already
shown in the parent folder's tree view.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 108 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Details view Displays the contents of the disk in a table with the
following additional information:

Icon
Title
Real name
Size
Last write date and time
Last access date and time
Creation date and time
Flags

To display the contents of a drive as icons:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Drives.
3. Point to the object that you want to display.
4. Click mouse button 2.
5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 109 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Select Icon view.

To display the contents of a drive in a tree view:

1. Open OS/2 System.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 110 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. Open Drives.
3. Point to the object that you want to display.
4. Click mouse button 2.
5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.

6. Select Tree view.


7. If a plus (+) sign appears to the left of a
folder, select it to expand the contents.
8. To display the contents of a folder, point to
the folder; then double-click.

To display details about the contents of a drive:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Drives.
3. Point to the object that you want to display.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 111 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Click mouse button 2.


5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.

6. Select Details view.


7. Select the scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window to scroll the
information.

3.3.2.3 Copying Objects

Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 112 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To copy an object from a drive to another location:

1. Open the drive containing the object


you want to copy.
2. Point to the object you want to copy.
3. Press and hold Ctrl.
4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
5. Drag the object to a folder, the
Desktop, or another drive object.
6. Release mouse button 2.
7. Release Ctrl.

To copy an object from another location to a drive:

1. Point to the object you want to copy.


2. Press and hold Ctrl.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the object to the drive object.
5. Release mouse button 2.
6. Release Ctrl.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 113 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.3.2.4 Moving Objects

There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
location and delete it from the original location).

Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.

To move an object from a drive to another location:

1. Open the drive containing the object


you want to move.
2. Point to the object you want to move.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the object to a folder, the
Desktop, or another drive object.
5. Release mouse button 2.

To move an object from another location to a drive:

1. Point to the object you want to move.


2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
3. Drag the mouse to the drive object.
4. Release mouse button 2.

3.3.2.5 Deleting Objects from a Drive

You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a drive.

To delete an object from a drive:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 114 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open the drive.


2. Point to the object you want to delete.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
5. Release mouse button 2.

3.3.3 Formatting a Disk

You can format a disk. When a disk is formatted, it is checked for defects and
prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from the
disk.

Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to format a


diskette.

Note: Before you format a disk, make sure that it does not contain any
information that is important.

To format a disk:

1. Point to the disk you want to format.


2. Click mouse button 2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 115 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Select Format disk.


4. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the disk).
5. Select the type of file system (FAT or HPFS) you want to use on the disk. (For
more information about these file systems, see the Master Help Index).
6. Select Format.
7. When the format is complete, select OK.

3.3.4 Checking a Disk

You can check a disk for:

Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
disk. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be fixed.

Current usage, which is the amount of the disk used for directories, user
files, and extended attributes. It also indicates the amount of space that is
reserved on the disk.

File system type, which is the type of file system on the disk.

Total disk space, which is the capacity of the disk in bytes.

Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space left
on the disk.

Note: You cannot check a disk that is currently being used or is locked by
another process (for example, the disk that OS/2 is running on).

To check a disk:

1. Point to the drive that you want to


check.
2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Check disk.
4. Select Write corrections to disk.
5. Select Check. When the check is done,
the Check Disk – Results window is
displayed.
6. Select Cancel to remove the window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 116 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.3.5 Drive A

The Drive A object provides quick access to the diskette drive in your computer
referred to as A.

You can use the Drive A object to:

Display the objects on a diskette


Display information about the objects on the diskette
Copy objects on a diskette to another location
Copy objects from another location to a diskette
Move objects on a diskette to another location
Move objects from another location to a diskette
Delete objects from a diskette
Format a diskette
Check a diskette for defects and fix it

Note: The Drive A object cannot be copied.

This chapter discusses only the Drive A object. For information about other
drive objects and a discussion about disks and diskettes, see Chapter 6, "Using
Disk Drives" in topic 3.3.

Subtemas
3.3.5.1 Displaying the Objects on a Diskette

3.3.5.1 Displaying the Objects on a Diskette

To display the objects on a diskette:

1. Place a diskette into diskette drive A.


2. Open Drive A.

The Drive A window appears showing the contents of the diskette. The actual
layout of the window that appears depends upon the contents of the diskette.

Tree view Displays the objects on the diskette in a directory (tree)


structure with folders representing the directories. This
view comes up when the objects on the diskette are placed in
directories.

To view the contents of a directory, point to a folder and


double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 117 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Icon view Displays the objects on the diskette as pictures (icons).


This view comes up when all the objects on the diskette are in
the root directory.

3.3.6 Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette

The tree and icon views give limited information about the objects on a
diskette. However, the details view gives the following information about the
objects on the diskette:

Title of the object Name that appears below the icon that represents the
object.

Real name of object Actual name of the object.

Size Amount of space in bytes that the object occupies.

Last write date Date that the information in the object was last
changed.

Last write time Time of day that the information in the object was
last changed.

Last access date Date that the information in the object was last
viewed.

Last access time Time of day that the information in the object was
last viewed.

Creation date Date that the object was first created.

Creation time Time that the object was first created.

Flags Characteristics of the file that allow it to be used


in a certain way.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 118 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To display detailed information about the objects on a diskette:

1. Place a diskette into drive A.


2. Open Drive A.
3. Point to the title-bar icon.
4. Click mouse button 2.
5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
6. Select Details view.

3.3.7 Copying Objects to or from a Diskette

There are times when you need to copy an object (duplicate the object and place
it in a different location).

Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.

To copy an object from a diskette in Drive A to another location:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 119 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Place a diskette into drive A.


2. Open Drive A.
3. Point to the object you want to copy.
4. Press and hold Ctrl.
5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
7. Release mouse button 2.
8. Release Ctrl.

To copy an object from another location to a diskette in Drive A:

1. Place the diskette you want to copy the object to into drive A.
2. Point to the object you want to copy.
3. Press and hold Ctrl.
4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
5. Drag the mouse to the Drive A object.
6. Release mouse button 2.
7. Release Ctrl.

3.3.8 Moving Objects to or from a Diskette

There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
location and delete it from the original location).

Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.

To move an object from the diskette in Drive A to another location:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 120 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Place a diskette into drive A.


2. Open Drive A.
3. Point to the object you want to move.
4. Press and hold Shift.
5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
7. Release mouse button 2.
8. Release Shift.

Note: When moving an object from a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
mouse button 2.

To move an object from another location to the diskette in Drive A:

1. Place the diskette you want to move the object to into drive A.
2. Point to the object you want to move.
3. Press and hold Shift.
4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
5. Drag the object to the Drive A object.
6. Release mouse button 2.
7. Release Shift.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 121 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Note: When moving an object to a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
mouse button 2.

3.3.9 Deleting Objects from a Diskette

You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a diskette.

To delete an object from a diskette:

1. Place the diskette you want to delete the object from into drive A.
2. Open Drive A.
3. Point to the object you want to delete.
4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
5. Drag the object to the Shredder.
6. Release mouse button 2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 122 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.3.10 Formatting a Diskette

You can format a diskette using the Drive A object. When a diskette is
formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this
process, all existing data is erased from the diskette.

To format a diskette:
1. Place the diskette you want to format into
drive A.
2. Point to Drive A.
3. Click mouse button 2.
4. Select Format disk.
5. When the Format Disk window appears, type a
Volume Label (name for the disk or diskette).
6. Select Format.
7. When the format is complete, select OK.

3.3.11 Checking a Diskette

You can check a diskette for:

Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on


the diskette. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems
found will be fixed.

Current usage, which is the amount of the diskette used for


directories, user files, and extended attributes. It also indicates
the amount of space that is reserved on the diskette.

File system type, which is the type of file system on the diskette.
(All diskettes are formatted for the FAT file system.)

Total disk space, which is the capacity of the diskette in bytes.

Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free


space left on the diskette.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 123 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To check a diskette:

1. Place the diskette to be checked into


drive A.
2. Point to Drive A.
3. Click mouse button 2.
4. Select Check disk.
5. Select Write corrections to disk.
6. Select Check.
7. After a few seconds, the Check Disk -
Results window is displayed. Select Cancel to
remove the window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 124 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.4 Chapter 7. Using Command Prompts

The Command Prompts folder contains objects that open DOS, OS/2,
and WIN-OS/2 sessions. A session is one instance of a command
prompt or started program. Each session is separate from all other
sessions that might be running on the computer.

To open the Command Prompts object:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.

Subtemas
3.4.1 OS/2 Command Prompts
3.4.2 DOS Command Prompts
3.4.3 DOS from Drive A
3.4.4 WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
3.4.5 Starting Multiple Sessions
3.4.6 Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC

3.4.1 OS/2 Command Prompts

The OS/2 Full-Screen and OS/2 Window objects are used to access an
OS/2 command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start
programs and enter OS/2 commands.

For a description of OS/2 commands that can be used at these


prompts, see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 125 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To start an OS/2 command prompt session:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window,
or both.

When you close a session, the session and


its related windows are automatically
closed. Make sure that you save all
important data in the session before you
close it.

To close an OS/2 command prompt session:

1. Type Exit.
2. Press Enter.

You can switch (temporarily leave without closing) from an OS/2 command prompt
session to another running program. When you switch sessions, your command prompt
session is saved and then restored when you switch back.

To temporarily leave an OS/2 command prompt session:

1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
2. Point to a title on the Window List.
3. Double-click.

or:

1. Press Alt+Esc to switch to another open object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 126 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.4.2 DOS Command Prompts

The DOS Full-Screen and DOS Window objects are used to access a DOS
command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs
and enter DOS commands.

For a description of DOS commands that can be used at these prompts,


see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.

To start a DOS command prompt session:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open DOS Full Screen, DOS Window,
or both.

When you close a session, the session


and its related windows are
automatically closed. Make sure that
you save all important data in the
session before you close it.

To close a DOS command prompt session:

1. Type Exit.
2. Press Enter.

You can switch from a DOS command prompt session to another running program.
When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored
when you switch back.

To temporarily leave a DOS command prompt session:

1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
2. Point to a title on the Window List.
3. Double-click.

or:

1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 127 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.4.3 DOS from Drive A

The DOS from Drive A object is used to start a specific version


(3.0 or later) of DOS from a diskette. By using a specific version
of DOS, you can use programs that will not run under the DOS
provided with OS/2.

Before you can start a specific DOS version from a diskette, you
must create the diskette used to start the DOS version. This
diskette is commonly known as a DOS Startup diskette or DOS
bootable diskette.

Subtemas
3.4.3.1 Creating a DOS Startup Diskette
3.4.3.2 Starting DOS from Drive A

3.4.3.1 Creating a DOS Startup Diskette

Note: If you already have a DOS Startup diskette, go to step 6 to make sure the
diskette is set up to work correctly with the DOS from Drive A object.

To create a DOS Startup diskette:

1. Boot your system with a version of DOS. You can use a:

DOS installation diskette


Hard disk that DOS has been installed on
Diskette that DOS has been installed on
2. Type FORMAT A: /S
3. Place a blank diskette into drive A.
4. Press Enter. This transfers the system files to the diskette.
5. When the format is complete, remove the diskette.
6. Start OS/2 by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
7. Select OS/2 System.
8. Select Drives.
9. Select Drive C.
10. Open the OS/2 folder; then open the MDOS folder.
11. Place the formatted diskette containing the system files into drive A.
12. Copy the following data-file objects from Drive C to the Drive A
object:
FSFILTER.SYS
FSACCESS.EXE
You can copy as many additional DOS files to the diskette as you want.
13. Open the Templates folder.
14. Copy a Data File object to the Desktop.
15. Point to the data-file object and double-click. The OS/2 System
Editor starts.
16. Type the following information into the data file:

DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS
DOS=HIGH,UMB
DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
FILES=20

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 128 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

BUFFERS=20

17. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then
double-click.
18. Select Save as; then type A:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
19. Point to the data-file object again and double-click.
20. Type the following information into the data file:

ECHO OFF
PROMPT $P$G
SET COMSPEC=A:\COMMAND.COM
C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE.COM
PATH A:\

21. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then
double-click.
22. Select Save as; then type A:\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.

3.4.3.2 Starting DOS from Drive A

To start a DOS from Drive A session:

1. Insert the DOS Startup diskette in drive A.


2. Open OS/2 System.
3. Open Command Prompts.
4. Open DOS from Drive A.

To close a DOS from Drive A session:

1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
2. Point to DOS from Drive A in the Window List.
3. Click mouse button 2.
4. Click on Close.

You can switch from a DOS from Drive A session to another running program. When
you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored when
you switch back.

To temporarily leave a DOS from Drive A session:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 129 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
2. Point to a title on the Window List.
3. Double-click.

or:

1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.

3.4.4 WIN-OS/2 Full Screen

The WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen object is used to run multiple


Windows programs in a full-screen session. For more
information about WIN-OS/2, see the online WIN-OS/2 Book
located in the Information folder.

To start a WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen session:

1. open the object.

To close a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session:

1. Point to the title-bar icon.


2. Double-click.

To switch to the OS/2 Desktop:

1. Point to the OS/2 Desktop object in the lower left corner of the
screen.
2. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 130 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.4.5 Starting Multiple Sessions

You can have multiple sessions of any object open.

To open more than one session of an object:


1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Copy one of the objects (for example, DOS Window) by holding down the Ctrl key
and mouse button 2 and dragging the object to the same or another folder. Then
release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.

4. Open the object to start the session.


5. Repeat the steps to create and open another session.

Or, if you need multiple copies of objects often, you can alter the settings of the
object so that it creates another session every time you open it. Do the
following:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 131 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Point to the object.
4. Click mouse button 2.
5. Select Settings.
6. Select the Window tab.
7. Select the Create new window radio button.
8. Close the notebook by double-clicking mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon.
Now, each time you select the object a new session starts.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 132 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.4.6 Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC

To start the BASICA or QBASIC programs:

Note: BASICA will only run on IBM computers.

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, DOS Full Screen, or DOS Window.
4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt; then press Enter.

To exit the BASICA program:


1. Type SYSTEM.
2. Press Enter.

To exit the QBASIC program:


1. Select File.
2. Select Exit.
3. Select Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 133 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.5 Chapter 8. Cleaning Up Your Desktop

The Minimized Window Viewer is where open objects are stored


when they are minimized. This keeps your desktop organized but
still allows you to have multiple objects open and running.

To open the Minimized Window Viewer:

1. Point to Minimized Window Viewer.


2. Double-click.

Subtemas
3.5.1 Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer
3.5.2 Minimizing an Object to the Desktop
3.5.3 Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer

3.5.1 Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer

The objects in the Minimized Window Viewer are still open, but they are running
in the background (cannot accept user input).

To display an object found in the Minimized Window Viewer:

1. Open the Minimized


WindowViewer.
2. Point to the object.
3. Double-click.

or:

1. Point to an empty area on the desktop.


2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the
same time.
3. Point to the title of the object you
want to display.
4. Double-click.

Note: There may be more titles in the


Window List than objects in the Minimized
Window Viewer, because hidden windows are
also displayed in the Window List.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 134 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.5.2 Minimizing an Object to the Desktop

Some frequently used objects might be easier to re-access if they are minimized
to the desktop instead of the Minimized Window Viewer.

To make an object minimize to the desktop:

1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the desktop.


2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Window tab.
5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present)
6. Select Minimize window to desktop.
7. Point to the title-bar icon.
8. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 135 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.5.3 Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer

Most objects by default are set up to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
However, some objects are not.

To make an object minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer:

1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Window tab.
5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present)
6. Select Minimize window to viewer.
7. Point to the title-bar icon.
8. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 136 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.6 Chapter 9. Using the Shredder

The Shredder object provides a quick and easy way to delete objects.
It is located on the LaunchPad.

To delete an object:

1. Point to the object.


2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
3. Drag the object to the Shredder.
4. Release mouse button 2.
5. Respond to confirmation messages (if applicable).

Subtemas
3.6.1 Customizing the Delete Confirmations
3.6.2 Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects
3.6.3 Recovering Deleted Objects

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 137 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.6.1 Customizing the Delete Confirmations

You can change the settings of your desktop to specify when confirmation
messages appear, if any, when you delete an object. The following
confirmation choices are available:

Confirm on folder delete Displays a confirmation message whenever a


folder object is deleted using the Shredder
object or a pop-up menu.

Confirm on delete Displays a confirmation message whenever an


object is deleted using the Shredder object or a
pop-up menu.

+--- Important ----------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Disabling the confirmation messages increases your chances of ¦
¦ accidentally deleting an object. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

To change the settings:

1. Open OS/2 System.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 138 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. Open System Setup.


3. Open System.
4. Select the Confirmations tab.
5. Make sure a check mark appears in each choice that you want to enable. To add
or remove a check mark, select the choice.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

3.6.2 Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects

Chances are that at some point you will accidentally delete an object that you
need. You can recover a deleted object if the DELDIR environment variable is
enabled in your CONFIG.SYS file prior to deleting the object.

To enable DELDIR:

1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM statement from the beginning
of the DELDIR statement.

a. Open OS/2 System.

b. Open Drives.

c. Open Drive C. (If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a


different drive, open that drive instead.)

d. After the Drive C object opens, a tree view of its contents is


displayed. Open the Drive C entry in the tree.

e. Open the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.

f. Select Edit.

g. Select Find.

h. Type DELDIR (all caps) in the Find field.

i. Select Find. (If the DELDIR statement is not found, see the
online Command Reference for instructions on how to add it.)

j. Select the beginning of the DELDIR line.

k. Delete REM from the beginning of the line using the Del key.

l. Point to the title-bar icon.

m. Double-click.

n. Select Save.

o. Select Type.

p. Select Set.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 139 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. Shut down your system; then restart it. Changes made to the CONFIG.SYS
object are not initiated until the system is restarted.

The DELDIR statement specifies the size of the directory used to hold deleted
objects. When the directory is full, the oldest files in the directory are removed
in order to make room for the new objects.

If you delete an object, recover it as soon as possible afterwards, or it might


be too late. For more information about DELDIR, see the online Command Reference.

Note: To be able to recover objects deleted in a DOS session, repeat the


preceding procedure on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

3.6.3 Recovering Deleted Objects

You can recover a deleted or erased object using the UNDELETE command.

Note: The DELDIR environment variable must be enabled prior to the deletion of
the object. For more information about DELDIR, see "Preparing Your System to
Recover Deleted Objects" in topic 3.6.2.

To recover a deleted object:

1. Open OS/2 System.

2. Open Command Prompts.

3. Open a DOS or OS/2 window.

4. Type UNDELETE /L and press Enter to see a list of file names


associated with the recently deleted objects.

5. Write down the complete path and file name. Include the drive letter,
directory names, and the file name. For example:

C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT

6. Type UNDELETE followed by the complete path and file name. For
example:

UNDELETE C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT

7. Press Enter.

The file associated with the deleted object has now been successfully recovered.
For more information about UNDELETE, see the online Command Reference.

To place the object back on the desktop:

1. Open Drives.
2. Open the drive that contains the recovered file (object).
3. Find the object on the drive.
4. Point to the object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 140 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5. Press and hold mouse button 2.


6. Drag the object to the desktop.
7. Release mouse button 2.

3.7 Chapter 10. Using Templates

A template is an object that you can use as a model to create


additional objects. When you drag a template, you create another of
the original object, as though you were peeling one of the objects
off a stack. The new object has the same settings and contents as
the templates in the stack.

Subtemas
3.7.1 Creating an Object from the Templates Folder
3.7.2 Creating a Template of an Object
3.7.3 Creating Another Object

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 141 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.7.1 Creating an Object from the Templates Folder

You can create new objects by using the objects in the Templates folder.
To open the Templates folder:

1. Point to the Templates object on the Desktop.


2. Double-click.

Subtemas
3.7.1.1 Creating a Folder Object
3.7.1.2 Creating a Data-File Object
3.7.1.3 Creating a Program Object

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 142 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.7.1.1 Creating a Folder Object

To use the Folder template to create a new folder:

1. Open Templates.
2. Point to the Folder template.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag a copy of the Folder template to the Desktop or to another folder.
5. Release mouse button 2. An empty folder is created.
6. Rename the folder (for example, "My new folder"). For information about
renaming, see the OS/2 Tutorial.

You can drag any objects you want (for example, program objects and data-file
objects) to the new folder.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ The operating system will add new templates when you install programs ¦
¦ that support them. The MMPM/2 application supports templates for ¦
¦ digital audio, MIDI, and digital video files. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 143 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.7.1.2 Creating a Data-File Object

To use the Data File template to create a data-file object:

1. Open Templates.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the Data-File template.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the Data-File template to any folder (including the Desktop folder). A
new data-file object is created.

5. Open the data-file object to begin editing the file with the System Editor.
6. When you are ready to save the file, select File; then select Save. Respond to
the system prompts (for example, in the Save notification window, indicate if you
want a file type such as plain text).
7. Double-click mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon to close the window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 144 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

8. Rename the object currently titled "Data File". Refer to the OS/2 Tutorial.

Note: If you use Save as on the File menu instead of Save, another object is
created with the new name. "Data File" remains an empty file.

If you open a data-file object that is not associated with any other program, it
automatically opens in the OS/2 System Editor. If you prefer, you can associate
the data-file object with one or more program objects (for more information, see
the Master Help Index). For more information about using the OS/2 System Editor,
select Help on the menu.

3.7.1.3 Creating a Program Object

A program object starts a program or a session. If you install a new OS/2, DOS,
or Windows program, you might need to run the Add Programs program in the System
Setup folder to create a program object. This is the recommended method of
creating a program object.

You also can create a program object using the Templates folder.

1. Open Templates.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the Program template.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the Program template to a folder or to the Desktop.
5. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook. For example, select
the session type, name the program object, or set up the associations.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 145 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.7.2 Creating a Template of an Object

You can create a template of an object when you have an existing object (such as
a form letter with a company letterhead) and you need another one. For example,
you could make the form letter a template and then customize it for different
customers. The new object will have the same settings (such as associations) and
contents as the original.

To create a template of an object:

1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
clicking mouse button 2.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select the General tab.
4. Select the Template check box.
5. Close the Settings notebook.

The object is now displayed as a template.

Drag a copy of the object from the template whenever you need a new copy.
Customize the new object to your preference. For example, you can change the name
of the object and add a new icon (see the OS/2 Tutorial or the Master Help Index).

If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 146 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.7.3 Creating Another Object

All objects that have a Create another choice in their pop-up menu have a
cascaded menu that lists their templates. When you create a template of your own,
it is added to the cascaded menu.

The result of Create another is identical to creating an object from a template.


If you select Create another from the pop-up menu of an object, a new object with
the same default settings and data is created. If you select the arrow to the
right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed. This menu contains a
listing of all the template objects you created. You can select one of the choices
to create another object from that template.

For example, suppose you created a template and named it "Company letterhead".
This template is listed as a choice on the cascaded menu. Whenever you need to
create a similar letter, select Company letterhead. The new data-file object
contains whatever was in the original "Company letterhead" and the same settings
(such as associations).

To create another object using a pop-up menu:

1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
clicking mouse button 2.
2. Select Create another if you want to use one of your templates, or select the
arrow to the right of Create another and select a template choice.

Note: The new object appears in the active folder; for example, if the object is
on the Desktop, the duplicate appears on the Desktop.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 147 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.8 Chapter 11. Setting Up Printers

If you installed a printer when you installed OS/2, a printer object is


on your Desktop. The printer object is used to print jobs (data files)
and check their progress. If you want to add a printer object, see
"Installing a Printer" in topic 3.8.1.

Note: The explanations and instructions in this chapter apply to


printers and plotters.

Each printer object represents a certain arrangement of hardware,


software, and configurations, which simplifies the printing process.
Printer objects can represent local printers and network printers. Local
printers are connected to individual computers or individual workstations
on a network. Network printers are connected to local area network (LAN)
servers and can be used by workstations connected to the network. For
more detailed information about printer and printing, see the OS/2
Tutorial and the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
folder.

Subtemas
3.8.1 Installing a Printer
3.8.2 Setting Printer Properties

3.8.1 Installing a Printer

Even if you did not select a printer during the OS/2 installation, you still can
add a printer to the system. There are several different procedures to choose
from. From the following list, choose the procedure that best describes your
situation, then follow the instructions to add the printer.

Create a printer object but use a printer driver that is currently


installed on the system. See "Creating a Printer Object" in
topic 3.8.1.1.

Create a printer object and install a new printer driver to use with
it. See "Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver"
in topic 3.8.1.2.

Install a new printer driver but use an existing printer object. See
"Installing a Printer Driver Only" in topic 3.8.1.3.

Change the printer driver being used with an existing printer object.
See "Changing Printer Drivers" in topic 3.8.1.4.

Install a Windows printer driver for use with WIN-OS/2. See


"Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session" in topic 3.8.1.5.

Install an OEM (Other Equipment Manufacturer) printer driver for use


with Windows. See "Installing a Printer Driver from Another
Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2 Session" in topic 3.8.1.6.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 148 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Note: When you create an OS/2 printer object, you might be prompted to
create an equivalent Windows printer object. If you choose to
create the Windows printer object, you also are prompted to install
a Windows printer driver.

Subtemas
3.8.1.1 Creating a Printer Object
3.8.1.2 Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver
3.8.1.3 Installing a Printer Driver Only
3.8.1.4 Changing Printer Drivers
3.8.1.5 Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session
3.8.1.6 Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2
Session

3.8.1.1 Creating a Printer Object

This procedure involves adding a printer object and selecting a printer driver.
Use this procedure if you have existing printer drivers installed on your system
and you want this new printer object to use one of them.

To create a printer object to use with an existing printer driver:

1. Open Templates.
2. Point to the Printer template.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
5. Release mouse button 2. The Create a Printer window is displayed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 149 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.


7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
8. Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.
9. Select Create.
10. Respond to the "Do you want to install an equivalent WIN-OS/2 printer
configuration" question; then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the
installation.

A new printer object is on your Desktop. If you want to customize the settings
for this new printer object, see "Setting Printer Properties" in topic 3.8.2.

3.8.1.2 Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver

This procedure involves creating a printer object and installing a printer driver.
Use this procedure if you want to create a printer object and install a new printer
driver.

1. Open Templates.
2. Point to the Printer template.
3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
5. Release mouse button 2.
6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
8. Select Install new printer driver.
9. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:

If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow the
instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 150 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system, follow the
instructions for Other Printer Driver.

Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2

1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.


2. Select Install.
3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
4. Select OK.
5. Select create to create the printer object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 151 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Other Printer Driver

1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver


2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
3. Select Refresh. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
4. Select one or more drivers. If the driver you need is not listed, insert
another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and select
Refresh again.
5. Select Install.
6. Select Create to create the printer object.

A new printer object is on your Desktop. If you want to customize the settings
for this new printer object, see "Setting Printer Properties" in topic 3.8.2.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Many printers have multiple printer drivers available. For example, ¦
¦ Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. ¦
¦ To ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you ¦
¦ select, scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see ¦
¦ the name of the printer driver. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 152 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.8.1.3 Installing a Printer Driver Only

Sometimes you have an existing printer object, but you do not have the correct
printer driver on your system. This might happen if you add a different printer to
your system.

To install a new driver for an existing printer object:

1. Point to the printer object.


2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Printer driver tab.
5. Point to one of the printer driver objects.
6. Click mouse button 2.
7. Select Install.
8. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:

If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow the
instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.

If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system, follow the
instructions for Other Printer Driver.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 153 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2

1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.


2. Select Install.
3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
4. Select OK.

Other Printer Driver

1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver.


2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 154 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Select Refresh.
4. Select one or more drivers. If the driver you need is not listed, insert
another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and select
Refresh again.
5. Select Install.

A new printer driver is installed. If you want to customize the settings for
this new printer driver, see "Setting Printer Properties" in topic 3.8.2.

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ Many printers have multiple printer drivers available. For example, ¦
¦ Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. ¦
¦ To ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you ¦
¦ select, scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see ¦
¦ the printer driver name. ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.8.1.4 Changing Printer Drivers

You might already have both the printer object and the printer driver installed
on your system, but you need to connect them. This might happen if you like to use
different printer drivers with a printer object.

To change to a different printer driver:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 155 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Point to the printer object.


2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Printer driver tab.
5. Select the printer driver.
6. Point to the title-bar icon.
7. Double-click.

The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. See
"Setting Printer Properties" in topic 3.8.2 for information about setting the
properties to match the capabilities of the new printer driver.

3.8.1.5 Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session

Windows programs print directly to the OS/2 spooler. Therefore, multiple print
jobs can be spooled from one WIN-OS/2 session or multiple WIN-OS/2 sessions.

To install a printer driver in Windows:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 156 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main.
5. Open Control Panel.
6. Open Printers.
7. Select Add and then select a printer driver in the list.
8. Select Install.
9. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up window.
10. Select OK.
11. Select Connect.
12. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.

Note: You can select a COMx port, but no spooling to the OS/2 Print object will
occur. However, you will still be able to use the Print Manager in Windows.

13. Select OK.


14. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
15. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
16. Select Close.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 157 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.8.1.6 Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2


Session

OS/2 has a wide variety of printer drivers available for use with Windows.
However, there might be times when you want to use a driver supplied by another
printer manufacturer.

To add a Windows printer driver supplied by another printer manufacturer:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main
5. Open Control Panel.
6. Open Printers.
7. Select Add.
8. Select Unlisted Printer from the beginning of the list of printers.
9. Select Install.
10. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up window.
11. Select OK.
12. Select Connect.
13. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
14. Select OK.
15. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
16. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
17. Select Close.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 158 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+--- Tip ----------------------------------------------------------------+


¦ ¦
¦ If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the ¦
¦ same driver, follow the instructions for "Creating a Printer Object" ¦
¦ in topic 3.8.1.1 and make the following selections: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ Select the same port you selected for your printer, using the ¦
¦ Windows Control Panel. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ Select the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as the default driver. ¦
¦ (IBMNULL is installed during system installation.) ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

3.8.2 Setting Printer Properties

A printer driver has settings called printer properties. Printer properties


describe the way your printer is physically set up.

Examples of printer properties are:

Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)


Number and location of paper trays
Forms defined for your printer
Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
Font cartridges loaded on the printer
Installed soft fonts
Additional features installed, such as extended symbol sets and
patterns
Resolution
Orientation
Compression

Examples of plotter properties are:

Number of carousels
Active carousel
Color type of each pen in a carousel

The number and kind of properties available depend upon the type of printer or
plotter you have.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 159 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To set the printer properties:

1. Point to the printer object.


2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Printer driver tab.
5. Point to a printer driver.
6. Click mouse button 2.
7. Select Settings.
8. Change the properties to match your printer setup.
9. Point to the title-bar icon.
10. Double-click.

Your printer object is now set up to print a job. For information about how to
print a job, see the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
Folder.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 160 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.9 Chapter 12. Using Productivity Tools and Games

The Productivity folder provides programs that assist you in editing


text and icons, searching for files or text and displaying system
utilization., Each productivity program has a set of help menus to
assist you with using the program.
The Games folder provides you with games for your entertainment.

Subtemas
3.9.1 The Productivity Folder
3.9.2 The Games Folder

3.9.1 The Productivity Folder

To open a Productivity program:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Productivity.
3. Open the program you want to use.

For information about using a program in the Productivity folder, press F1 after
the program is opened.

Subtemas
3.9.1.1 Clipboard Viewer
3.9.1.2 Enhanced Editor
3.9.1.3 Icon Editor
3.9.1.4 OS/2 System Editor
3.9.1.5 Picture Viewer
3.9.1.6 Pulse
3.9.1.7 Seek and Scan Files

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 161 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.9.1.1 Clipboard Viewer

Clipboard Viewer is a program that enables you to view the contents of


the OS/2 clipboard. The system clipboard is used to share information
between programs in the same session or in different sessions (for
information about sessions, see Chapter 7, "Using Command Prompts" in
topic 3.4). It temporarily holds data being passed from one program to
another. You can copy or cut information to the clipboard from a program
in one session and then paste the information from the clipboard to a
program in a different session. For more information about the
clipboard, refer to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2

3.9.1.2 Enhanced Editor

Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text
files. It also enables you to work on multiple files at the same
time. You can start the Enhanced Editor by opening its object or by
typing EPM at the OS/2 command prompt and pressing Enter.

The Enhanced Editor has a number of features and functions. These


features and functions are thoroughly explained in the Quick
Reference help file located under the Help menu bar choice of the
Enhanced Editor.

3.9.1.3 Icon Editor

Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image
files. These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers. An icon is a
graphical representation of an object or a minimized program. A bit map
is a special type of image made up of a series of dots. (The OS/2 logo
is an example of a bit map.) A pointer is a small symbol on the screen
that reflects the movement of the mouse.

3.9.1.4 OS/2 System Editor

The OS/2 System Editor is used to create and edit text files. You
can use the System Editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
system files. The System Editor runs in a window. You can start
several sessions of the System Editor so that you can edit several
files at once.

You can start the System Editor two ways:

By selecting its object

Opening a data file associated with the System Editor. (All data
files area associated with the System Editor by default.)

By typing E (and pressing Enter) at an OS/2 command line If you want

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 162 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

to edit a particular file, you follow the E with a space and then type
the path and file name of the file.

3.9.1.5 Picture Viewer

Picture Viewer displays and prints metafile (.MET) and picture


interchange format (.PIF) files. You also can view spooler (.SPL) files;
however, the file must contain PICTURE 181 a picture in a standard OS/2
format.

Note: Picture Viewer does not support multiple-page metafiles.

Picture Viewer lets you zoom in or zoom out of a picture after it is


displayed. Move the mouse pointer to the portion of the picture you want
to zoom in and then double-click mouse button 1.

3.9.1.6 Pulse

Pulse is a system monitor. Use Pulse to see a graphic representation of


how different activities affect the system and how much processor power is
still available for other programs. You can change the colors of the
graphic, adjust the graph line, and freeze the screen image.

3.9.1.7 Seek and Scan Files

Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or


more disks for files or text. When a file match is found, it is
displayed in a selection list. Then you can open (or run) the
selected file.

3.9.2 The Games Folder

The Games folder contains Klondike Solitaire, OS/2 Chess and Mahjongg.

To start a game:
1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open Games.
3. Open the game you want to play.

For information about playing a game in the


Games folder, press F1 after the game is opened.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 163 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Subtemas
3.9.2.1 Klondike Solitaire
3.9.2.2 OS/2 Chess
3.9.2.3 Mahjongg

3.9.2.1 Klondike Solitaire

Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one person. The object of
this game is to find the aces and build on them in suit and in ascending
order. You use the mouse to move the cards to their new location.

3.9.2.2 OS/2 Chess

With OS/2 Chess, you can play a game of chess against another person
playing on the same computer or on a network workstation. You also can
play against the computer. The object of the game is to checkmate your
opponent's king.

3.9.2.3 Mahjongg

Mahjongg is a popular version of the ancient Chinese tile game. The


object of this game is to remove all the tiles by matching all the pairs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 164 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10 Chapter 13. Using the Information

The Information folder contains information to aid you in using OS/2.

To open the Information


folder:
1. Point to Information
2. Double-click.
The Information folder
contains all the online
documents described in this
chapter.

Subtemas
3.10.1 Using OS/2
3.10.2 Command Reference
3.10.3 Glossary
3.10.4 REXX Information

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 165 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.1 Using OS/2

The OS/2 Tutorial is an interactive and animated look at the OS/2


Workplace Shell interface. It explains how to use a mouse, work with
objects and folders, use windows, and get help.

If you are new to OS/2, you should spend the 40 minutes (approximate)
it takes to go through the tutorial. You will find that it is time
well spent.

To start the OS/2 Tutorial:

1. Open Information
2. Open Tutorial

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 166 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.2 Command Reference

Before there were friendly operating system interfaces like the


Workplace Shell, computer users communicated with a computer using a
predefined set of instructions called commands. Users would type a
command at a prompt, and the computer would perform the requested
task. Some people still like to communicate with the computer in this
way. For that reason, OS/2 supplies both DOS and OS/2 command prompts
and the OS/2 Command Reference.

The Command Reference explains each OS/2 and DOS command, graphically
shows the correct syntax of the command, and gives examples of when
and how to use the command.

In addition, it explains the commands that can be used to create a batch file (a
series of commands that are processed sequentially). Batch files are useful for
automating the entering of commands that are used over and over again.

To open the OS/2 Command Reference:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 167 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open Information.
2. Open Command Reference.

To open the OS/2 Command Reference and get information about a specific command:

1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by the name of the command. For
example:

HELP COPY

2. Press Enter. The Command Reference is opened to the COPY command page.

Subtemas
3.10.2.1 Using the Contents Window
3.10.2.2 Obtaining Additional Information
3.10.2.3 Searching for Information
3.10.2.4 Using a Bookmark
3.10.2.5 Printing a Topic

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 168 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.2.1 Using the Contents Window

The Contents window is the first window that appears when the Command Reference
is opened. Notice that some of the topics in this window have a plus (+) sign
beside them. The plus sign indicates that additional topics are available.

To expand the Contents and view the additional topics:

1. Select the + sign.


To collapse the topics in the Contents:

1. Select the - sign.

To open a topic:

1. Point to the title of the topic.


2. Double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 169 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.2.2 Obtaining Additional Information

When a topic is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window.
Highlighted words and phrases in the window indicate that additional information is
hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.

To view the additional information:

1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.


2. Double-click.

To return to the previous window of information:

1. Select Previous.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 170 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.10.2.3 Searching for Information

There might be times when you are using the Command Reference when you have an
idea of what you want, but you cannot remember where it is. The search function
can help you find the information you need.

To search for a word or phrase in all the topics in the Command Reference:

1. Select Search.
2. Type the word or words you want to find. You can also use the ? and * wildcard
characters in the search field.
3. Make sure that All sections is selected; then select Search.

A Search Results window appears containing a list of topics that have the word
or phrase that you were trying to find. To open a topic, point to a topic and
double-click.

Sometimes, you have a general idea where the information is. You can limit the
search to those topics by marking the topics.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 171 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To mark a topic:

1. Press and hold Ctrl.


2. Select the topics that you want to search.
3. Release Ctrl.

To unmark a topic:

1. Press and hold Ctrl.


2. Select the topic.
3. Release Ctrl.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 172 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To search for a word or phrase in marked topics:

1. Select the + signs in the Contents window.


2. Mark the topics you want to search.
3. Select Search.
4. Type the word or words you want to find.
5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Search.

When the Search Results window appears, open the topics and read them.

3.10.2.4 Using a Bookmark

Information that you refer to frequently can be flagged using a bookmark.


Setting a bookmark duplicates the topic in a bookmark window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 173 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To set a bookmark:

1. Open the topic that you want to mark with a bookmark.


2. Select Services.
3. Select Bookmark.
4. Change the name used for the bookmark (optional).
5. Make sure Place is selected; then select OK.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 174 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To view bookmarked information:

1. Select Services.
2. Select Bookmark.
3. Select View.
4. Select the topic you want to open.
5. Select OK.

To remove a bookmark:

1. Select Services.
2. Select Bookmark.
3. Select Remove.
4. Select the topic you want to remove.
5. Select OK.

3.10.2.5 Printing a Topic

Some people prefer to read information in a hardcopy format. You can print a
topic, some topics, all topics, the table of contents, and the index of the Command
Reference.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 175 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To print a topic:

1. Open the topic you want to print.


2. Select Print.
3. Make sure that This section is selected; then select Print.

To print more than one topic:

1. Press and hold Ctrl.


2. Select the topics that you want to print.
3. Release Ctrl.
4. Select Print.
5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Print.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 176 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To print the table of contents, index, or all the topics:

1. Select Print.
2. Select the item you want to print.
3. Select Print.

Note: The Contents and Index choices only print the entries; they do not print
the text associated with the entries. The All sections choice prints the entire
Command Reference. Before electing to do this, be aware that the document is large
and will take a long time to print.

3.10.3 Glossary

The Glossary is an alphabetic listing of terms used in the Workplace


Shell interface and the online help system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 177 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To open the Glossary:

1. Open Information.
2. Open Glossary.

There are three ways to find a term in the glossary. You can type the first
letter of the word you are looking for, scroll through the list or use the search
function.

To scroll through the list to find a term in the glossary:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 178 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Select the letter that the word begins with. If the letter is not visible,
select the tab arrow until the letter is visible; then select the letter.
2. Select the up or down arrow in the scroll bar until the term is visible.
3. Point to the term.
4. Double-click.

To use the search function to find a term in the glossary:

1. Select Search topics.


2. Type the term that you want to find.
3. Select Search.
4. When the list of matching entries appears, point to the term; then double-
click.

3.10.4 REXX Information

REXX is a procedures language designed to make basic OS/2 programs


easier to write and debug. Both beginning and experienced programmers
will find REXX easy to use because it uses common English words,
arithmetic and string functions, and OS/2 commands within a simple
framework.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 179 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To view the REXX Information:

1. Open Information.
2. Open REXX Information. For information about using the Contents window,
searching, printing and getting additional information, see "Command Reference" in
topic 3.10.2.

Subtemas
3.10.4.1 Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages

3.10.4.1 Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages

You can get information to help you understand, correct, and respond to OS/2
messages. The way you request help depends upon how and where the message is
displayed.

To get help for a message that appears in a window with a Help push button:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 180 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Select the Help push button.

To get help for a message that appears on a full screen and is enclosed in a box:

1. Use the up or down arrow key to highlight Display Help.


2. Press Enter.

To get help for an error message that has a message number, preceded by the letters
SYS:

1. At the OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by a space and the message
number. (It is not necessary to type the letters SYS or the leading zeros.)
2. Press Enter.

For example, if you received this message:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 181 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.

To request help for this message, type HELP 2 and then press Enter. The
following help appears:

SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.

EXPLANATION: The file named in the command does not exist in the current
directory or search path specified. Or, the file name was entered incorrectly.

ACTION: Retry the command using the correct file name.

3.11 Chapter 14. Mastering the Master Help Index

The Master Help Index is an online, alphabetic list of topics


available to help you while using OS/2. This index contains
information about:

Things to consider before performing a task


Steps to take to complete a task
OS/2 concepts
DOS error messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 182 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To open the Master Help Index:

1. Open Information.
2. Open Master Help Index

Tabs turn to the page in the index of the selected alphabet letter. Tab arrows
scroll the tabs but do not scroll the index entries.

Scroll bar arrows (vertical scroll bar) scroll the index entries one line at a
time. Scroll bar arrows (horizontal scroll bar) scroll the index entries to the
left or right so you can read information that does not fit into the window.

Index entries are the online help for the OS/2 operating system.

To open an index entry for viewing:

1. Point to the entry.


2. Double-click.

Subtemas
3.11.1 Accessing Additional Information
3.11.2 Searching for a Topic
3.11.3 Printing a Master Help Index Entry

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 183 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.11.1 Accessing Additional Information

When an index entry is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a
window. Some entries have highlighted words and phrases in the window, which
indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.

To view the additional information::

1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.


2. Double-click.

To return to the previous window of information:

1. Select Previous.

3.11.2 Searching for a Topic

You can search the Master Help Index for an entry using one or more words that
describe the topic. For example, to search for information about how to duplicate
an object, you might search using the word "duplicate," "duplicates," or even
"duplicating." The result of a search (using duplicate, duplicates, or
duplicating) is "copying an object."

To search for a topic:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 184 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Open the Master Help Index.


2. Select Search topics.
3. In the Search string field, type the word or words that describe the topic.
4. Select Search.
5. When the list of topics (matched items) appears, open the entry you want to
read.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 185 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3.11.3 Printing a Master Help Index Entry

To print a Master Help Index entry:

1. Open the index entry you want to print.


2. Select Print topic.

For more information about using the Master Help Index, review the OS/2 Tutorial.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 186 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.0 Part 4 - Troubleshooting

Subtemas
4.1 Chapter 15. Solving Installation Problems
4.2 Chapter 16. Solving Problems After Installation
4.3 Chapter 17. Video Procedures

4.1 Chapter 15. Solving Installation Problems This chapter provides information
to help you solve problems you might encounter while installing OS/2*. It includes
information about what to do if you have problems, plus specific instructions for
recovering from error messages or problems with installation diskettes, screens, or
CD-ROMs.

Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
information dealing with a particular problem.

Subtemas
4.1.1 What to Do If You Have Problems

4.1.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1


4.1.3 Installation Error Messages
4.1.4 Installation Diskette Problems
4.1.5 Installation Screen Problems
4.1.6 Installation CD-ROM Problems
4.1.7 Miscellaneous Installation Problems

4.1.1 What to Do If You Have Problems

Installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases,


you will not experience problems. However, if you do encounter a problem during
installation, do the following:

1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing
is documented.

2. If you received an error message (or error number), locate the message
in this chapter and perform the suggested actions to resolve the problem.

3. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service


and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to
get additional assistance.

When you report your problem make sure you include the following
information:

The brand and model of the equipment you are using

The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen

The number of the installation diskette you were using when the
problem occurred

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 187 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to
which you have access

4.1.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1

A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.

Diskette 1, which comes with OS/2, contains a CONFIG.SYS file. The file is
added to your root directory during installation. There might be instances in
which you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order
to add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file.
If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file before you install OS/2, you will need to
make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.

Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.

To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is on Diskette 1, use an ASCII text editor. If
you do not have a text editor installed on your computer, use the editor that comes
on the OS/2 installation diskettes. Follow these steps:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.


2. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
insert Diskette 1.
4. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the
command prompt.
5. At the command prompt, type TEDIT CONFIG.SYS and press Enter. The
file will appear on your screen, and you can make any changes or
additions to it. (Press F1 if you need help using the editor.)
6. When you are done working on the file, press F2 to save it.
7. Press F4 to quit the editor.

4.1.3 Installation Error Messages

If you receive one of the following error messages on your screen while
installing OS/2, try to resolve the problem with the suggested action.

Only some files were copied. You may be out of disk space.

Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because


there was not enough hard disk space available.

Action: Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation


partition. You can store these files in another partition
or on a diskette. If you intend to format the installation
partition, remember to first use the BACKUP command to save
any important files.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 188 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

An error occurred when System Installation tried to copy a file.

Explanation 1: The installation diskette might contain errors.

Action: Request a replacement diskette from your place of purchase.

Explanation 2: The installation program stopped transferring files because


there was not enough hard disk space available.

Action: Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation


partition. You can store these files in another partition
or on a diskette. If you intend to format the installation
partition, remember to first use the BACKUP command to save
any important files.

Explanation 3: The hard disk might contain errors.

Action: Follow the CHKDSK procedure outlined in "Recovering from


Errors on the Hard Disk" in topic 4.2.10.6.

An error occurred when System Installation tried to transfer system files


to your hard disk. Your hard disk might be unusable.

Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because


an error occurred while the boot record was being written.

Action: Format the installation partition and restart the


installation. Remember to first use the BACKUP command to
save any important files.

System Installation failed trying to load a module into memory.

Explanation: The installation program could not load a system module


because there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum
of 4MB of memory.

Action: Add more system memory (RAM).

An error occurred when System Installation tried to allocate a segment of


memory.

Explanation: The installation program could not allocate a segment of


memory because there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a
minimum of 4MB of memory.

Action: Add more system memory (RAM).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 189 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

FDISK unsuccessful.

Explanation: Your hard disk controller might not be supported.

Action: Make a copy of Diskette 1. Locate the Device Support


Diskette supplied by the manufacturer of your hard disk
controller. Copy the OS/2 device driver from that Device
Support Diskette onto the copy of Diskette 1. Then add the
statement BASEDEV=xxx.SYS (where xxx is the name of the
device driver) to the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of
Diskette 1, and restart the installation.

An error occurred when System Installation tried to locate the dynamic


link library.

Explanation: The installation program could not load the dynamic link
library because there is not enough random access memory
(RAM). OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory

Action: Add more system memory (RAM).

A disk read error occurred.

Explanation: The BIOS level of the Future Domain** adapter is not


compatible.

Action: Contact Future Domain for a BIOS upgrade if you own the
following:

Future Domain TMC-850/860/875/885 with BIOS revision


level 7.0

Future Domain TMC-1660/1670/1680 with BIOS revision


level 2.0

OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive.

Explanation 1: This might indicate some incompatibility between OS/2 and


the diskette drive controller or hard disk controller in
your system.

Action: Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette or hard disk from
which you are starting OS/2. Remove all lines with
BASEDEV=xxxxxxxx.ADD (where xxxxxxxx can be any characters),
and make sure the following two lines appear in the
CONFIG.SYS:

BASEDEV=IBMxFLPY.ADD

BASEDEV=IBMINT13.I13

(where x is replaced by a 2 if you are using a Micro Channel


system, and a 1 if you are using any other system.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 190 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Explanation 2: A diskette drive or a hard disk drive controller might have


an additional device (such as a tape backup) attached to it.

Action: Disconnect additional devices, if possible.

Explanation 3: There might be an interrupt request (IRQ) level conflict


between the diskette drive or hard disk controller and other
devices installed on your system.

Action: Change IRQ levels to eliminate conflicts.

Explanation 4: The hard disk partition on which you are installing OS/2
was compressed with a DOS data compression program.

Action: Use the data compression program to decompress the


partition. Then restart the installation procedure.

TRAPxxx

Explanation: In general, traps are symptoms of software-related problems.


After you have pursued these symptoms from a software
failure perspective, you should consider the potential of a
hardware cause relating to caches and memory, such as the
following:

If your computer has an 80486 microprocessor, your


computer might require faster RAM chips (60ns or 70ns).

There might be a problem with the external (level-2) CPU


memory cache or main memory system on ISA or EISA
systems.

Action: Try the following:

1. From the setup/diagnostics diskette or the BIOS Setup


program built into the computer, try disabling all
shadow RAM and external (level- 2) CPU memory caches.

2. If problems persist during the installation of OS/2


after performing the above action, turn off the turbo
switch (if one is available) on your system and retry
the operation. Disable caching during installation or
turn the turbo switch off.

Some of the more common traps are listed below. If you receive a trap error
that is not listed, you can view help for the trap after OS/2 is installed, by
typing HELP followed by the trap number at an OS/2 command prompt. For example:

HELP 0002

If the trap error contains a letter, as in a TRAP D error you must convert the
hexadecimal number (D) to decimal then add it to 1930. For example, TRAP D

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 191 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

converted would be 1943 because D hexadecimal is 13 decimal (13 added to 1930


equals 1943). So you would type HELP 1943 at an OS/2 command prompt.

A list of the hexadecimal to decimal conversions are listed below:

A = 10 D = 13
B = 11 E = 14
C = 12 F = 15

TRAP0002

Explanation: A TRAP0002 error is a hardware error and is usually related


directly to memory. Mismatched memory modules can often
cause these kinds of errors. Your computer might have a
variety of single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were
produced by different manufacturers or that operate at
different speeds. (For example, a 1 x 9 module cannot be
used with a 1 x 3 module.)

Action: Try the following:

Have your computer checked by a service representative.

If your computer memory is okay and the problem


persists, make sure that your system BIOS is of a recent
date (1991 or later). Refer to Chapter 17, "Special
Hardware Considerations," for more information about
BIOS, or contact the manufacturer of your computer BIOS
to receive the latest version.

SYS0005

Explanation: When you perform a redirected remote installation of OS/2


using SYSINST2 for panel installation, the error message
SYS0005 appears while the computer attempts to copy
UNPACK2.EXE.

Action: This Access Denied Error is caused by damage to the extended


attribute data on the NetWare** Server. To correct this
problem, delete the old disk images on the server and create
new OS/2 disk images.

SYS1200 and EC=00BF

Explanation: The DOS environment cannot be created.

Action: If you see the error message SYS1200 while attempting to use
the Dual Boot feature to change to DOS, and you also see
error code EC=00BF, check your CONFIG.SYS file. Make sure
your virtual DOS device drivers have not been remarked out
of or removed from your CONFIG.SYS file. If necessary, look
at the CONFIG.SYS file in the OS2\INSTALL directory (the
CONFIG.SYS file as it was originally installed) to see how
the DOS device drivers should be listed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 192 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SYS1201

Explanation: A device driver specified in the CONFIG.SYS file cannot be


found, is the incorrect device driver (ex. DOS device
driver), or is specified twice within the file.

Action: Make sure the correct device driver for the device is
installed, and then check the CONFIG.SYS file to make sure
the information specified is correct.

SYS1475

Explanation: The file OS2BOOT cannot be found. This is a hidden system


file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from
which the operating system is started.

Action: Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the system. If
the problem was not caused by a diskette in drive A, then
the OS2BOOT file might be missing. Try the following
procedure:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.

2. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on,


press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.

3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation


Diskette and insert Diskette 1.

4. Press Enter.

5. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to


display the command prompt.

6. Reinsert the Installation Diskette.

7. Type sysinstx c: and press Enter. (If your operating


system resides on a drive other than C, use the
appropriate drive letter instead.)

If this procedure does not correct the problem, it might be


necessary to reinstall the operating system.

SYS1719

Explanation: The file IBM386FS\HPFS386.IFS does not contain a valid


device driver or file system driver.

Action: Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and delete the following line:

IFS=x:\OS2\HPFS.IFS

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 193 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SYS2025

Explanation: A disk read error occurred. This might be a disk error or a


damaged system boot record.

Actions: Try the following:

If this error occurred while the system was loading,


follow the procedure in "Recovering from Errors on the
Hard Disk" in topic 4.2.10.6.

If this error occurred when the system was reading the


installation diskettes, there might be an error on the
diskette. If you already have an operating system
installed on your computer, use the XDFCOPY command to
make a copy of the installation diskettes. Retry the
installation with the newly copied diskettes.

If your computer has BIOS supplied by AMI** or


Phoenix**, you might need to upgrade the BIOS. Refer to
Chapter 17, "Special Hardware Considerations."

If your system has a local bus IDE controller card,


disable the BIOS on the 32-bit local bus IDE controller
card and use the generic INT13 driver instead of
IBM1S506.ADD.

Make sure that there is not a hardware problem with your


hard disk controller or your diskette drive.

SYS2026

Explanation: The file OS2LDR cannot be found. This is a hidden system


file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from

which the operating system is started.

Action: Try the following:

Make sure a non-system diskette is not in the diskette


drive. If a diskette is in the drive, remove it and restart
the system.

If the OS2LDR file is still missing:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive


and restart the system.
2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and
insert Diskette 1.
3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to
access a command prompt.
4. Copy the OS2LDR file from the Installation Diskette to
the root directory on the OS/2 partition.
5. Restart the system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 194 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SYS2027

Explanation: This message usually accompanies messages SYS1475 and


SYS2025, and means that the system must be restarted. See
the explanation and actions for these messages for more
specific information.

Action: Insert a system diskette and restart the system.

SYS2028

Explanation: The system cannot find the OS2KRNL file. This is a hidden
system file and must reside in the root directory of the
drive from which the operating system is started.

Action: Try the following:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive


and restart the system.
2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and
insert Diskette 1.
3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to
access a command prompt.
4. Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to
the root directory of the OS/2 partition. Type:
A:OS2KRNLI C:\OS2KRNL and press Enter. (Where A: is the
diskette drive containing the Installation Diskette and
C: is the drive on which you are installing OS/2.)
Notice the change in name of the OS2KRNL file.
5. Remove the diskette from the drive.
6. Restart the system.

SYS2029

Explanation: The file OS2KRNL is damaged or not readable.

Action: Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the
root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
Follow the instructions for error message SYS2028.

SYS2030

Explanation: The system does not have enough memory to start the
operating system. OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory.

Action: Add more memory to the system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 195 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SYS3146

Explanation: The system cannot find the OS2LDR.MSG file. This is a


hidden system file and must reside in the root directory of
the drive from which the operating system is started.

Action: Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to


the root directory of the drive containing the operating
system.

SYS3147

Explanation: The OS2LDR.MSG file is not readable. The file might be


damaged.

Action: Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to


the root directory of the drive containing the operating
system.

SYS3161

Action: Upgrade your system so that your processor is compatible


with the 80386 processor.

4.1.4 Installation Diskette Problems

Following are solutions to problems that might occur while you are using the
installation diskettes to install OS/2.

Diskette 1: If the installation procedure stops while Diskette 1 is in


the diskette drive, there might be a problem with the
features of the hard disk controller. If the controller has
on-board disk caching, disable the caching. If the
controller can do asynchronous memory refreshes, turn off
that feature. Make sure that other IRQ settings do not
conflict with the hard disk controller IRQ setting. If
multiple hard disk controllers or hardcards are installed in
the system, it might be necessary to remove one of them.

The following apply to machine-specific problems:

If you are installing on a system with an Allways**


IN2000 SCSI adapter, and an IPE or FDISK error is
displayed during the installation of Diskette 1.
Upgrade your system to the current BIOS level of
VCN:1-02. The Allways IN2000 SCSI adapter might require
an EPROM upgrade to operate with OS/2. You might find
that you have some problems when trying to install over
DOS partitions. To correct these problems, you need to
install the EPROM and reformat the hard drive.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 196 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you are installing OS/2 on a Mylex** system, a


TRAP0008 error occurs during the installation of
Diskette 1. For more information on this error, contact
Mylex.

If you are installing on a Compaq** 386/331 Deskpro


system, a TRAP000D error occurs during the installation
of Diskette 1. To correct this problem, do the
following:

1. Make a copy of Diskette 1. You will modify the


copy.
2. Use a text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file that
exists on the copy of Diskette 1.
3. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS
file:

BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD

4. Use the copy of the diskette during the installation


process instead of the original.

Diskette 3: If the installation program continues to prompt you to


insert Diskette 3, you have a 1.44 MB diskette drive that
can work in either IBM* PC/XT* mode or IBM PCAT mode.
Contact your service representative to determine if there
are hardware-specific considerations.

Any Diskette: If several diskettes are successfully installed, then the


system refuses a diskette and makes a beeping sound, your
system might be infected with the Joshi virus. (This
symptom usually appears after the first phase of the
installation is complete and the system is restarted.) The
Joshi virus is a DOS virus that interferes with OS/2 and
causes random lockups. The Joshi virus:

Operates by trapping disk reads and writes. If the


virus is active in memory, programs that try to locate
the virus on diskette will have problems detecting it.

Is carried on the boot sector of an infected data


diskette or system diskette. This virus originated in
DOS but can survive in OS/2. When you start an infected
system, the virus resides in memory and survives a
Ctrl+Alt+Del startup. If you do not type Happy Birthday
Joshi, the system will stop.

Is copied to the boot sector of every diskette. The


virus will be transferred to any computer on which the
user performed any diskette operation that included
reading from, or writing to, the infected diskette.

Spreads from infected diskettes to DOS and OS/2 systems


when the systems are started from diskettes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 197 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Interferes with the startup from the hard disk of


OS/2-based systems. The warning that OS/2 will give is
that the IBM1FLPY.ADD file is bad or missing.

Many antivirus packages are effective at detecting this


virus. In DOS, the Norton Antivirus Version 2.1 can both
detect and clear the virus.

In OS/2, Central Point Anti-Virus** can detect the virus.


McAfee** Clean and Scan and IBM Anti-Virus/2* (AV/2) can
both detect and clear the virus.

4.1.5 Installation Screen Problems

Following are solutions for problems you might have with your screen during the
installation of OS/2.

White Screen during Installation

If the display screen is white during the installation of OS/2 and there is no
system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit mode and move the
adapter to an 8-bit slot. Do the following:

1. Turn off the computer and disable the autosensing capability of the
video adapter.

2. Modify the settings. Refer to the documentation that came with your
video adapter.

3. Place the adapter in an 8-bit slot. Then install OS/2.

4. Return the adapter to the 16-bit slot and set back to the 16-bit mode.

White Screen with Disk Light On Constantly

If you are installing OS/2 on a fast 486 ISA-bus computer, you might encounter a
white screen and the disk light constantly on. To correct this problem, try to
reduce the speed of the computer by turning off the turbo mode of the computer.
Refer to the documentation that came with your computer to find out how to change
the mode.

Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen

During the installation on a Gateway** 2000 with an 80486/66MHz processor, a


local bus, and an ATI** Graphics Ultra Pro, the system will get to the screen with
the colorful OS/2 logo, and then the installation will stop. The display screen
shows horizontal bands of video separated by black bands that scroll horizontally
across the screen. To correct this problem, do the following:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 198 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Start DOS.

2. At the DOS prompt, type CD \MACH32 and press Enter.

3. Type install and press Enter.

4. At the Main Selection screen, select Set Power Up Configuration.

5. Select Monitor Type and press Enter.

6. Select 1572 Monitor with 72Hz Refresh Rate and press Enter.

7. Select IBM Default (or 60Hz) as the new display.

Note: After OS/2 is successfully installed, repeat the steps to reselect the
1572 Monitor type.

4.1.6 Installation CD-ROM Problems

Cannot Access CD-ROM During Installation

If the device driver for your CD-ROM is not included in the OS/2 package, but is
available from the CD-ROM manufacturer, you can modify Diskette 1 to add the device
driver. Refer to "Chapter 17, Special Hardware Considerations" for instructions.

If you cannot access your CD-ROM drive during installation from a CD, but you
can access the drive using DOS, you can install OS/2 using disk images. Disk
Images are copies of the installation program that you put on diskette. You create
disk images by using the XDFCOPY utility program to copy images from the CD to
diskettes. You then use these diskettes to install OS/2.

Note: Installation diskettes are in a special format called XDF. The only
command you should use with an XDF disketee is XDFCOPY.

Be sure to use formatted diskettes for this procedure. To find out exactly how
many diskettes you will need:

1. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive


2. Type: DIR X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35 /W (where: X is the drive letter of your
CD-ROM drive and 35 is the diskette size.)
3. Press Enter. A list of files will appear on your display.
4. Count the files that end with the extension .DSK. Each .DSK file will
require a separate diskette.

Use the following command to create each disk image:

X:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY
X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\size\diskname.dsk Y:

where:

X: is the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive.

\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY is the location and name of the program used to


create the diskettes

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 199 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

DISKIMGS\OS2\size is the location of the files containing the disk


images. Substitute 35 for the size parameter.
Use 35 for 3.5-inch 1.44MB and 2.88MB diskettes.

diskname.dsk is the disk image file name (for example,


DISK0.DSK).

Y: is the drive letter of your diskette drive.

For example, to create the Installation Diskette (DISK0.DSK) on a 3.5-inch


diskette, type the following and press Enter.

E:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY E:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35\DISK0.DSK A:

Where: E: is the CD-ROM drive and A: is the diskette drive.

4.1.7 Miscellaneous Installation Problems

Following are solutions to miscellaneous problems that might occur while you are
installing OS/2.

Missing Device Driver Needed for Installation

If the device driver needed to install OS/2 on your computer is missing from the
installation diskettes, obtain the device driver from either the device
manufacturer or a bulletin board, then do the following:

1. Make a backup copy of Diskette 1.


2. Copy the needed device driver file (.ADD) to the backup copy of
Diskette 1.
3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the backup copy of Diskette 1 and change
the BASEDEV= statement to include the file name and extension of the
new device driver. Example: BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
4. Save the file, and use the updated copy of Diskette 1 to install OS/2.

Computer Beeps Constantly

If your computer beeps constantly while you are changing diskettes during
installation, you might have a defective diskette drive controller or cable. Check
the controller and cable for damage, and also check all their connections.

Promise IDE Cached Controller

To install OS/2 on a system with a Promise IDE Cached Controller, you must edit
the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1 and change the following line:

BASEDEV=IBM1S506

to

BASEDEV=IBM1S506 /!SMS

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 200 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter

ATI makes various display adapters that are comparable with the IBM 8514/A
display adapter. The ATI Graphics Ultra, 8514 Ultra, and Graphics Vantage can all
be treated as IBM 8514/A adapters for the OS/2 installation process. However, if
you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must follow these steps before you install
OS/2. The INSTALL utility program used in

the following steps will set your display to run as a VGA display so that OS/2
can be installed. After OS/2 is installed, you can run the INSTALL utility program
again to select the correct display attached to the system.

Note: Following these steps incorrectly might cause your system to hang with a
black screen or distort your display with static. Refer to the ATI documentation
if you encounter problems configuring the Ultra Pro memory.

To prepare your ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter for use with OS/2:

1. Start your system using DOS, preferably from a diskette. You will
need to start DOS again after OS/2 is installed because the ATI
INSTALL utility program runs only in DOS.

2. Type INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.

3. If your adapter has 1MB of video memory, select SHARED. If your


adapter has 2MB of video memory, ensure that the aperture is properly
configured.

4. Select Monitor Setup.

5. Select Custom.

6. Set the refresh rate for 640 x 480 to IBM DEFAULT (or 60Hz).

7. Set the refresh of all other resolutions as appropriate for your


display.

8. Save the configuration.

9. Install OS/2. Make sure that during the installation of OS/2, you
select 8514 as the primary display type.

IBM PS/2* Model 30-286 Upgrades

OS/2 is not supported on IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgraded to a 386 microprocessor.

Aox** Systems

If your computer has an Aox add-in microprocessor adapter and you encounter
problems either installing or starting up your OS/2 system, call the Aox
Corporation and ask for the latest "flash-prom" code upgrade.

IOMEGA** PC Powered Pro 90

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 201 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you are using an IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90, call the IOMEGA service number and
request OAD Driver Version 2.3.

IBM PS/2 Model 90 and 95 Computers

If you are experiencing problems with your Model 90 or 95, ensure your
system is at the latest engineering change (EC) level. Your IBM
service representative can assist you.

You must ensure that you have matched pairs of single in-line memory
modules. This means that each pair of single in-line memory modules,
as described in your technical reference manual, must be matched in
memory size and speed. Mixing these modules can cause some computers
to report memory errors.

All ISA, EISA, and PCI Systems

If you are installing OS/2 on a ISA, EISA, or PCI system, some CMOS settings
might need to be adjusted:

Turn off ROM shadowing (system and video) if it is not essential to


starting your system.

Usually only extremely fast systems require ROM shadowing during a


startup. Do not turn ROM shadowing on again after installing OS/2.
If you get a TRAP0002 error, add wait states (both read and write, if
the option is given). Add two wait states and see if the TRAP0002
error goes away.

Note: Take as few of the actions here as are necessary to prevent the
TRAP0002 error, because you must retain whatever setting makes
the system function. If you added wait states, do not remove
them later without adding faster (matched) DRAM to your system.

If you experience other traps or complete system hangs while


installing, turn off your external processor cache (internal cache is
not a problem). If this corrects the problem, have the system board
repaired or replaced before you turn on the cache again.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 202 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2 Chapter 16. Solving Problems After Installation

This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter
after OS/2 has been installed. It includes information about what to do if you
have problems, plus specific instructions for startup, memory, display, mouse, CD-
ROM, hard disk, and Desktop problems. In addition, procedures are given for
recovering the Desktop, CONFIG.SYS file, user INI file, hard disk, and memory state
data.

Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
information dealing with a particular problem.

Subtemas
4.2.1 What to Do If You Have Problems
4.2.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory
4.2.3 Startup Problems
4.2.4 Memory Problems
4.2.5 Display Problems
4.2.6 Mouse Problems
4.2.7 CD-ROM Problems
4.2.8 Hard Disk Problems
4.2.9 Desktop Problems
4.2.10 Recovery Procedures

4.2.1 What to Do If You Have Problems

OS/2 is a stable operating system and, in most cases, you will not experience
problems. However, if you do encounter a problem while using OS/2, do the
following:

1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing
is documented.

2. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service


and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to
get additional assistance.

Before you call for assistance, make sure you call from a telephone that is near
your computer and gather the following before you speak with the OS/2 specialist:

Your registration number (located in the Service and Support brochure


in the US only)

The brand and model of the equipment you are using

The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen

Paper and pencil for taking notes

The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to
which you have access

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 203 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2.2 Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory

A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.

During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from Diskette 1 and added to
your root directory. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in
this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark out"
a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS
file after you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS
file located in the root directory on the hard disk (usually drive C).

Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.

To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is in your root directory (after installing
OS/2), follow these steps:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Type COPY CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.OLD and press Enter.
4. Type E C:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.

where: E is the command used to start the System Editor that comes with OS/2
C: is the letter of the drive where OS/2 was installed
\ is the symbol for root directory

The CONFIG.SYS file will appear on your screen, and you can make changes to
it.

5. When you are done working on the file, select File, then select Save.
6. Select Type... in the Save notification window.
7. Select Plain Text, then select Set.
8. Press Alt+F4 to exit from the System Editor.
9. Shut down your computer. (You must restart your computer anytime you
make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file in order for the changes to take
effect.)

For more information about the statements that can appear in the CONFIG.SYS
file, refer to the Command Reference that is located in the Information folder on
the OS/2 Desktop.

4.2.3 Startup Problems

Following are solutions to problems that might occur when you try to start your
system after installing OS/2.

Internal Processing Error Message Appears

The system stops and the screen displays INTERNAL PROCESSING ERROR at the

top of a message.

Record the information exactly as it displayed on the screen, and write a


description of what you were doing when the trap occurred. Then, refer to the

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 204 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Service and Support information in your OS/2 package for instructions about calling
for additional assistance.

Boot Manager Menu Does Not Appear:

If you installed the Boot Manager partition but the Boot Manager startup menu
does not appear as expected when you start the system, you will need to make the
Boot Manager partition startable. Do the following:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.

System Will Not Start DOS from the Boot Manager Menu

On a system with a VESA** SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives, the system
might not start from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it will display a non-system
disk or disk error message. For more information on this message, check the VESA
controller documentation or contact the manufacturer.

Dual Boot Does Not Work

If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you
might have one or more active terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) or DOS cache
programs. If so, end the programs before you use the BOOT command. For TSR
programs that are loaded from AUTOEXEC.BAT, you must deactivate the programs before
using the BOOT command.

Error When Using Dual Boot on a PS/1 System

On PS/1 systems preinstalled with DOS 5.0, using Dual Boot from OS/2 to DOS
might result in an error. To correct this problem, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
the system.

4.2.4 Memory Problems

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with memory after
installing OS/2.

IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95 Memory Parity Errors

If your Model 90 or 95 is a 33 MHz system and you are having difficulty


identifying intermittent memory parity errors such as TRAP0002, which force you to
restart your system, then ECA053 might apply. If your microprocessor card has part
number 84F9356, contact your IBM representative to assist you with a replacement.

IBM PS/2 Model 90 Memory Errors

If your Model 90 is experiencing intermittent memory errors, ECA084 might apply


if the part number of your memory riser card is N33F4905 or 84F9356. Your IBM
representative can assist you with a replacement.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 205 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2.5 Display Problems

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your display after
installing OS/2.

White Screen after Installation

If the display screen is white after installation and there is no system


activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit bus and move the adapter to
an 8-bit slot. If possible, disable the autosensing capability of the video
adapter. For information on modifying these settings, refer to the documentation
that came with your video adapter.

Blank Screen after Installation

If the Desktop appears to be blank when you restart the system after the
complete installation of OS/2, and you are using a ProComm** Micro Channel* SCSI
adapter, do not attempt to run CHKDSK on the drive connected to the adapter.
Contact ProComm to receive the device driver needed for the SCSI card.

System Stops at Logo Screen:

If you have a Future Domain 16xx SCSI controller, you might have installed OS/2
successfully but then found a problem the next time you started OS/2. If the system
stopped running with the logo screen displayed, there might be a conflict with the
interrupt settings of your hardware devices. Check all interrupt request (IRQ)
settings on all your hardware devices and make sure that each one is using a unique
IRQ. Future Domain controllers are shipped from the factory preset to use IRQ5.
However, IRQ5 is the interrupt that is normally assigned to LPT2. Also, it is
common for IRQ5 to be used by sound or communications adapters. You might not see
a problem immediately because of interrupt conflicts, but eventually a problem can
occur.

System Will Not Restart on a High-Resolution Display

If you installed support for a high-resolution display adapter and your system
will not restart, follow the procedure below. This procedure will set the adapter
support to a lower resolution (VGA) but will enable your system to start.

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
display adapter.

Graphics Mode and Refresh Rates Incorrect for Hardware

Most video adapters are sensitive to the characteristics and capabilities of the
display attached to them. The video BIOS on these adapters detects and sets the
hardware to support a desired graphics mode.

Some adapters have configuration dip switches to select desired vertical refresh
rates for high-resolution modes (800 x 600 and 1024 x 768). Others are shipped with
DOS video-configuration utility programs that allow selection of refresh rates.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 206 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Usual refresh rates range from 56Hz to 72Hz non-interlaced or 88Hz interlaced. The
display has to be capable of synchronizing to this frequency for proper mode set.

When the desired refresh rate has been set using either the dip switches or the
video-configuration utility program run the \OS2\SVGA.EXE utility program to store
the hardware setup in an \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file. At a DOS full-screen session,
type: C:\OS2\SVGA ON; then press Enter.

The Installation Program Installed VGA Support instead of SVGA

During the installation of OS/2, the installation program might have installed
only VGA support for your display. To install the Super VGA (SVGA) drivers, you
can use Selective Install in the System Setup folder. (System Setup is in the OS/2
System folder).

Video Corruption or Stacked or Missing Icons

1. Display the Desktop pop-up menu (click mouse button 2 on the OS/2
desktop background).
2. Select Refresh to redraw the Desktop.
3. If the screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc (to switch between the
programs) to force repainting of the screen.

Synchronization Lost Under OS/2 But Not DOS

The resolution or refresh rate loses synchronization under OS/2 but not DOS.

To correct this problem, generate the \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file under a specific


version of DOS using the following instructions:

1. Start DOS.
2. Type \OS2\SVGA ON DOS
3. Press Enter.
4. Type RENAME \OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
5. Press Enter.
6. Restart OS/2.

If this does not fix the problem, try selecting a different vertical refresh
rate (refer to your adapter manual); then generate the PMI file again.

If your display remains out of synchronization or is stable and synchronized


after restarting the system but loses synchronization after a session switch, this
might be due to your video adapter's hardware implementation.

Note: Some video adapter hardware cannot be fully saved and restored in all
graphics modes for all refresh rates.

Using After Dark** for Windows** with S3** Adapter

If you have an S3 adapter and are using After Dark for Windows, images that move
from left to right will not perform properly.

Switch to any resolution other than 640 x 480 x 16M.

Using Ventura Publisher** for Windows with an S3 Adapter

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 207 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Ventura Publisher for Windows,
you might experience a General Protection fault when starting the program.

Switch to a 256-color resolution to avoid this problem.

Using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 with S3 Adapter

If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 your system
might trap.

Switch to any resolution other than one using 16M colors.

Using Lotus** 1-2-3** for OS/2 or Lotus Freelance for OS/2

If you have an XGA or SVGA display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for
OS/2 or Lotus Freelance** for OS/2, your system might trap.

Switch to a resolution that uses 256 colors or less.

Using WordPerfect** 5.1 or 5.2 for Windows with S3 Adapter

If you have an S3 display adapter and are using WordPerfect 5.1 or 5.2 for
Windows you might experience a General Protection fault when the Print Preview
option is selected.

Use any resolution other than the 800 x 600 x 64K or 600 x 480 x 16 million
color modes.

Using Software Motion Video Feature with S3 Adapter

If you have an S3 display adapter and are using the software motion video
feature you might experience poor performance of video playback in 64K-color modes.

Normally, the software motion video feature will take advantage of a 1MB
aperture on video adapters and systems where it is available. For those systems
with nonstandard locations, the actual physical address of the aperture must be
provided in the following CONFIG.SYS statement:

SET VIDEO_APERTURE=xxxh

where "xxx" is a hexadecimal value in units of 1MB, representing the actual


physical address to map to the aperture. For example, the IBM PS/ValuePoint*
systems must have the statement:

SET VIDEO_APERTURE=400h

to use a physical address at 1GB.

Blank Screen on IBM ValuePoint system

If you have one of the following IBM ValuePoint systems, you might encounter a
blank screen while switching from one window to another.

PS/ValuePoint Display Models: 6314 6317 6319


PS/ValuePoint System Models: 6382 6384 6387

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 208 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To correct or avoid this problem, make sure that the flash EEPROM level of your
system is 62 or later.

To check the EEPROM level:

1. Begin the Configuration Utility program by turning the system off and
then on again.
2. During the memory count, press F1. (The memory count appears in the
upper left corner of the screen as numbers followed by KB.)
3. When the Configuration Utility screen appears, look for the Flash
EEPROM Revision Level.
4. The fifth and sixth characters in the Flash EEPROM Revision Level
represent the actual revision level.
5. If the revision level is less than 62, you must install the ValuePoint
Flash BIOS update.

To get the required ValuePoint Flash BIOS update do the following: Access the
IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, then download the VP2FL62A.DSK file, which is
the Flash BIOS Update Level 62.

If you do not have access to a modem, you can call the IBM Help Center and
request this update on diskette.

Video Corruption with Video 7** Adapter

If you experience minor video corruption when switching from an OS/2 full-screen
session to the Desktop using Alt+Esc, exit the OS/2 session and restart it.

Video Corruption Using 8514/A Adapter with WIN-OS/2

If you are running a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session with an 8514/A adapter in a


high-resolution mode, do not switch to a different session while the program is
updating the screen or displaying an hourglass. The actual problem you experience
(for example, video corruption, system hang) depends upon what the display driver
is doing at the time of the switch.

Color Icons and Bit Maps Improperly Drawn

Windows programs that use color icons or color bit-map backgrounds must run in
the foreground to be properly drawn. Do not switch from a Windows program while it
is being started or before it completes drawing color icons and color bit-map
backgrounds.

Discolored Bit Map Using 8514/A Adapter

If you are using an 8514/A display adapter, 256-color bit maps might become
discolored. after you start a WIN-OS/2 window session.

This discoloration is due to the sharing of the 256-color palette and should not
affect the running of the programs.

Corrupted Graphics in DOS Programs

Some DOS programs with graphics use a non-standard VGA mode that the adapter can
support, but the operating system cannot. The graphics in these programs might be

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 209 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

corrupted when displayed in a window. To avoid this problem run these programs in
DOS full-screen sessions.

Corrupted Colors in DOS Programs

Some DOS programs experience color corruption when running in a window on the
Desktop in VGA mode. This is a limitation of the VGA mode because the color
palette of the DOS session has to be translated to the Presentation Manager* and
the Desktop in VGA mode does not offer enough colors to do an optimal translation.

The best solution is to use an OS/2 display driver that supports the 256-color
mode or run the program in a DOS full-screen session.

Corrupted DOS Full-Screen Session on IBM ThinkPad* 750C Series

If you are using a ThinkPad 750C Series, after installing OS/2, you might find
that your DOS full-screen session is corrupted. To fix this problem you must
reinstall the video driver from the ThinkPad video features diskette.

1. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when the


small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen.
2. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V to return to VGA
mode.
3. Restart your system, and then reinstall the ThinkPad 750c video
drivers from the ThinkPad video features diskette.

WIN-OS/2 Fails to Start on IBM ThinkPad

If a WIN-OS2 window fails to come up on an IBM Thinkpad, make sure that your
CONFIG.SYS file contains the following statement:

DOS=LOW,NOUMB

Also, make sure that the WIN-OS/2 settings have DOS set to LOW and UMB set to
OFF.

Notebook Computers Using DOS Window

Some notebook computers get a trap D error or other problems when a DOS window
is opened. This error is caused by improper video register shadowing. To correct
the problem:

1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file.


2. Change

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VVGA.SYS

to

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VSVGA.SYS

3. Save the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.


4. Shut down and restart the computer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 210 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Text Strings Clipped on Display

OS/2 uses a system proportional font that is designed to meet the International
Organization for Standards (ISO) 9241 standard and the German DIN 66234 standard
when using certain ISO compliant hardware. If you do not want to use ISO compliant
fonts, you can modify the OS2.INI file to install fonts that are not ISO compliant.
Font changes made in the OS2.INI file are global across all programs. If you have
REXX installed, you can type the following information into a CMD file and use it
to change the font.

call RxFuncAdd "SysIni", "RexxUtil", "SysIni"


AppName = "PM_SystemFonts"
KeyName = "DefaultFont"
FontName = "10.System Proportional Non-ISO"
call SysIni "USER", AppName, KeyName, FontName||"0"x
exit

After the file has been run, shut down and restart the system.

Poor Performance of Windows Programs Using 8514/A Adapter

If your system has an 8514/A adapter, you can improve the performance of your
Windows programs by changing their settings. Open the Settings notebook for each
Windows program and change the following WIN-OS/2 settings:

VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to OFF
VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to ON

Corrupted Desktop with the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter

If your system has the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter with
the memory set to SHARED, some DOS programs running in the background might corrupt
the Desktop.

To correct this problem, you must upgrade to the 2MB version of the ATI Graphics
Ultra Pro and set the VGA memory to 256K or greater.

Note: If you are using the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter
with the OS/2 8514/A display driver, the VGA memory must be set to SHARED.

System Hang Using PM Debugger

To correct this problem, use an XGA* or 8514/A adapter with the debugger. An
access violation will occur when you exit the debugger, but you will not have to
restart your system and you will not have system problems as a result of using the
debugger.

Video Corruption on XGA Display Using Windows Screen Savers

A Windows screen saver program that starts while in a background session might
display a corrupted image being displayed when you switch back to the Windows
session. The image can be refreshed by moving the mouse or pressing any key. You
can eliminate this problem by changing your WIN-OS/2 settings for the screen saver
program using the Settings Notebook. Change the settings to:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 211 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to ON
VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to OFF

Using Dual Displays (XGA and VGA)

If you are using a dual display system with XGA as the primary display and VGA
as the secondary display, you might see some minor corruption when the XGA display
is set to a resolution with 65536 colors.

This corruption will be on the display that does not have focus and will not
interfere with the operation of the system.

Using Dual Displays with Windows programs in a Window Session

On dual display configurations with XGA-2 as the primary display and VGA as the
secondary display, the DOS full-screen session might be corrupted if a Windows
program is started in a window session.

To recover from this situation, shut down and restart the system.

Using XGA-2 Adapter with Dual Boot

If you are using Dual Boot with an XGA-2 adapter, you must modify the CONFIG.DOS
file:

1. Edit the \OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS file.

2. Locate the line

DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM 2048 X=nnnn-nnnn

3. Change nnnn-nnnn to C000-CFFF.

4. Save and exit the file.

Screen Corruption on IBM P75 Systems

On IBM P75 systems, there might be some corruption on the screen whenever
several icons are selected and moved together.

This corruption can be eliminated by selecting Sort from the Desktop pop-up
menu.

Limited Resolutions on IBM P75 Systems with External Displays

An IBM P75 system with an external display attached might only have the 640 x
480 x 16,772,216 resolution selection on the the System Settings Screen page.

If the external display is capable of displaying higher resolutions, use the P75
Reference Diskette to disable the built-in plasma display.

Color Changes Behind Icons on XGA Displays

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 212 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you are using an XGA display, the diagonal lines behind the icons of open
objects might change color unexpectedly.

This does not interfere with the operation of the system.

Extra Lines on OS/2 System Clock on XGA Displays

If you are using an XGA display, extra lines might appear on the face of the
OS/2 System Clock between the quarter (:15) and half (:30) hour.

These lines do not interfere with the operation of the clock.

Display Power Management Signaling Not Enabled on XGA Displays

If you are using an XGA display, the XGA DMQS (\xga$dmqs\*.dqs) files in this
version of the operating system do not have DPMS (Display Power Management
Signaling) enabled for the DPMS supported displays.

You must use the DPMS OVERRIDE parameter provided with the Power Management
Utility program that is located in System Setup.

PS/ValuePoint System with Radius XGA Display Adapter

If you are using a Radius XGA display adapter on a PS/ValuePoint system, it


might not work correctly.

To correct this problem, you need to obtain and use the VPXGA.EXE utility
program. For a copy of this utility program, check your Radius Installation
Diskette or contact a service representative at Radius.

Zenith Data Systems** and Hewlett Packard Systems with Headland Adapters

Zenith Data Systems with Headland HT208 and Hewlett Packard systems with HT209
display a white half-screen whenever high-resolution modes are selected.

These systems do not support high-resolution modes even though you can
successfully install high resolution drivers and select the modes. To correct this
problem, use Selective Install to install VGA.

ZEOS** Systems with Speedstar VGA

If you are using a ZEOS system with Speedstar VGA, the video display adapter
might not configure.

Use the VMODE utility program supplied with the system to configure the display
during the display driver installation.

Video Corruption with Sigma Legend** Adapter

If you have a Sigma Legend display adapter you might experience minor video
corruption on the Desktop when you switch between the Desktop and DOS if they are
running in different modes.

Use the DOS utility program that is packaged with this display adapter to set
the DOS session to the same mode as the Desktop.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 213 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

System Hang with Sigma Legend Adapter

If you are using a Sigma Legend display in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode, the
system might stop.

Use only 640 x 480 x 256 or 800 x 600 x 256 mode with this adapter.

4.2.6 Mouse Problems

The following information provides solutions to problems you might encounter


with your mouse.

Existing Mouse Not Working Correctly

If the mouse you had connected to your computer before installing OS/2 now works
improperly (movements appear "jerky" or the mouse does not respond when you move
it), do the following:

1. Open OS/2 System.

2. Open Command Prompts.

3. Open OS/2 Window. If you installed OS/2 from a CD, continue with step
4. If you installed from diskettes, go to step 5.

4. Type ATTRIB -R C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where c is the drive


where OS/2 is installed).

5. Insert the diskette that came with your mouse into drive A (this
diskette contains the mouse device driver).

6. Type COPY A:\MOUSE.SYS C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where C is


the drive where OS/2 is installed).

7. Shut down the system.

Mouse Not Working after Installation

If you installed a mouse during the installation of OS/2, or used selective


installation to install a new mouse and the mouse is not working, you will need to
edit your CONFIG.SYS file. Do the following:

1. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where C is the drive
where OS/2 is installed).

2. Delete the mouse device driver statements from the CONFIG.SYS file
(there might be more than one such statement). For example:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS

3. Shut down the system, and then restart it.

4. Use Selective Install to install a different mouse driver.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 214 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Serial Mouse Not Working

If the serial mouse is connected to a serial port, make sure that the serial
port is configured for default settings.

Logitech** Mouse Not Working after Installation

If you have a Logitech mouse that does not work after installation, you might
have to select another mouse driver. Before 1991, Logitech sold "C-Series" serial
mice. Since 1991, Logitech has sold only "M-Series" Microsoft-compatible serial
mice. To determine which mouse you have, look at the bottom of the mouse. If it
says "CA" or "C7," then it is a C-Series mouse. If not, then you have an M-Series
mouse. Use Selective Install to select the correct Logitech mouse driver.

Logitech Mouse Not Working after Dual Boot from DOS

If your Logitech mouse is not working on a Dual Boot system after you run DOS
and switch to OS/2, your mouse might be running in a mode set by a DOS-based mouse
device driver. To correct the problem:

1. If COM2 port is being used, switch back to DOS and type the following
at the DOS command prompt:

MOUSE PC

or

MOUSE 2 PC

This will reset the mouse to a mode that is recognized by OS/2.

Note: You must use the MOUSE.COM that came with the mouse, or the
command will not work.

2. Then type the following:

C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2

3. Press Enter. OS/2 should start and your mouse should work.
4. If this does not work, disconnect and reconnect the mouse.
5. If these methods do not work, close your programs and turn off the
computer. Then, turn the computer on again.

Mouse Does Not Work on an IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95

If your Model 90 or 95 has the Unattended Start Mode option set (through the
System Programs), the mouse driver will not load during startup.

To correct this situation, disable the Unattended Start Mode.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 215 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Mouse Does Not Work on COM3 or COM4

OS/2 supports connection only to COM1 or COM2, at the standard input/output


(I/O) address and interrupt request (IRQ) setting.

Mouse Pointer Does Not Move

When you move your mouse, the mouse pointer on the screen does not move.

Verify that each device on your computer that uses an IRQ setting is not
conflicting with another IRQ setting.

Mouse Statements in CONFIG.SYS

The mouse statements that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS depend on the type of
mouse connected to your computer.

The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a serial mouse are:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COMx
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$

Where: C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed, and COMx is either COM1
or COM2.

The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a Microsoft or IBM mouse are:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS

Where: C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.

Three-button Mouse Not Working Correctly

You have a 3-button mouse and error SYS1201 is displayed on the screen.

OS/2 supports only the 2-button mode on a 3-button mouse. If your mouse has a
switch to change to a 2-button mode, change the switch. If it doesn't, replace the
mouse with a 2 button mouse.

Erratic Mouse Pointer in WIN-OS/2 Sessions

If you have an erratic pointer in your WIN-OS/2 programs.

Set the following WIN-OS/2 settings:

MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS to On
IDLE_SENSITIVITY to 100
IDLE_SECONDS to 20

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 216 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Mouse Not Recognized on Non-IBM Computer

If your mouse is not recognized on a non-IBM computer that has a mouse port with
an attached mouse, the mouse might be incompatible with the mouse port because of
the chip on the mouse adapter.

Attach the mouse to a serial port. If the mouse still does not work, try a
different mouse with the mouse port.

Mouse and Keyboard Stop Working

If you have AMI BIOS, you might have an old version. Contact your computer
manufacturer for an updated BIOS level.

4.2.7 CD-ROM Problems

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your CD-ROM after
installing OS/2.

Philips** CM 205 CD-ROM

If you have a Philips CM 205 drive and it doesn't work with OS/2, edit your
CONFIG.SYS file and change the line containing LMS205.ADD to LMS206.ADD.

If your CD-ROM drive is not working correctly (does not respond, or generates
errors when trying to read a CD), do the following:

1. Open OS/2 System.

2. Open Command Prompts.

3. Open OS/2 Window.

4. Insert the diskette that came with your CD-ROM drive into drive A.
(This diskette contains the CD-ROM device driver.)

5. Type the following, pressing Enter after each:

COPY A:*.ADD C:\OS2\


COPY A:*.IFS C:\OS2\
COPY A:*.DMD C:\OS2\

where * represents the actual name of the file.

6. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where c is the drive on
which OS/2 is installed).

7. Add the following statements to the CONFIG.SYS file (if not already
there):

DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
BASEDEV=OS2CDROM.DMD
BASEDEV=*.ADD

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 217 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

where * represents the actual name of the .ADD file on the device
driver diskette.

8. If the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file, change it


from:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4

to

REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4

9. Shut down the system.

Problems with Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi** CD-ROM Drives

If you are using a Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi CD-ROM drive and cannot access it,
do the following:

1. Copy the following files from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:

COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD C:\OS2


COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2

2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
statements:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q

3. Shut down the system.

Problems with Sound Blaster CD-ROM Drives

If you are using a Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive with the device driver SBPCD2.SYS
and cannot access the drive, restart your system and do the following:

1. Copy the following file from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:

COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2

2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
statement:

IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q

3. Open OS/2 System.

4. Open Selective Install from the System Setup folder.

5. Select the icon next to CD-ROM Device Support on the System


Configuration screen.

6. Select OTHER from the bottom of the CD-ROM selection list; then select OK.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 218 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

7. When the selective installation is complete, edit the CONFIG.SYS file


and delete the following line:

DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q

8. Shut down the system.

4.2.8 Hard Disk Problems

Following are solutions to problems you might have with hard disk drives after
installing OS/2. Also refer to "Recovery Procedures" in topic 4.2.10.

Slow SCSI Support

After installation, you might experience slow SCSI support. If this occurs,
make sure that the hard disk and the controller card are both set for the ASYNCH
mode or the SYNCH mode.

Problem with Quantum Hardcard or IDE Controller

Add the required switch settings (adapter number and IRQ level) to the
IBM1S506.ADD device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. If you need
assistance with the switch settings or need a BIOS upgrade (for certain

Quantum Hardcards), contact a service representative at Quantum.

Hard Disk Controller Problem

1. Determine the controller manufacturer, model number, and type. Then,


determine which device driver is installed for the controller (for
example, FD7000EX.ADD).
2. Verify that the installed device driver is the correct one.
3. Verify that the BASEDEV= statements are correct in your CONFIG.SYS
file. Verify that the correct device driver is listed in a BASEDEV=
statement. Also, verify that the correct device driver is the only
device driver listed for that controller. For more information about
BASEDEV= statements, refer to the Command Reference in the Information
folder.

Cannot Set Up a Primary Partition

If you have more than two hard disk drives and you cannot set up a primary
partition on one of the hard disk drives, your BIOS could be preventing the setup.

With OS/2, you can have a primary partition on two hard disk drives; however,
the BIOS in your computer determines which two hard disk drives can have primary
partitions.

Cannot Access Entire Hard Disk

Your hard disk drive has more than 1024 cylinders, and you cannot access the
entire drive space, the device driver for your controller might not support more
than 1024 cylinders.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 219 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If you have a non-IBM controller and device driver, contact the manufacturer of
the device driver to ask if your level of the driver supports more than 1024
cylinders.

4.2.9 Desktop Problems

Following are solutions to problems you might have with your Desktop after
installing OS/2.

System Stops Working

The system stops and the keyboard and mouse do not respond.

1. Press Ctrl+Esc or Alt+Esc and wait a few seconds to see if the system
responds.
2. Determine if you can move your mouse but cannot select any object when
you press mouse button 1.
3. Press the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys to see if their status lights
come on.
4. Record a description of what you were doing when the system stopped.
If any messages were displayed on the screen, be sure to record the
message text and number.
5. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
instructions about calling for additional assistance.

Missing Icons

After restarting your system, some of your Desktop icons might be missing.

Check the documentation for the hard drive and the controller card to ensure
that their settings are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode.

Stacked Icons

If the objects on your Desktop appear to be stacked on each other, you can
refresh your Desktop:

1. Position the mouse pointer on a blank area of the Desktop.


2. Press mouse button 2. A pop-up menu appears.
3. Select Refresh.
4. If your screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc to switch between programs
and force the "repainting" of your screen.

DOS and Windows Programs Not Added to the Desktop

During the installation of OS/2, your existing DOS and Windows programs are
automatically added to your OS/2 Desktop. However, the installation program might
not find all programs (for example, programs located on remote servers). If this
happens, restart the system, then run the Add Programs to Desktop utility program.
(Add Programs to Desktop is located in the System Setup folder which is located in
the OS/2 System folder.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 220 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

OS/2 2.x Programs Not Added to the Desktop

If you installed OS/2 on a system that already had OS/2 2.x installed on it and
your OS/2 2.x programs were not added to your Desktop, do the following:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Delete the DESKTOP directory.
5. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system. The Desktop should be
re-created.
6. If the problem continues, re-create the INI files. Follow the
instructions in "Rebuilding Your Desktop" in topic 4.2.10.3.

If you moved program groups off the Desktop and into a folder, you should move
them back on the Desktop before installing OS/2. Otherwise, duplicate icons could
appear on the screen. If you try to delete these icons, the original icons will
also be deleted.

Blank Desktop and Missing Objects

If the Desktop is blank, objects are missing, you cannot delete an object, or
you have another problem that involves objects, run the CHKDSK (check disk) program
until the results indicate there are no errors. To run CHKDSK, do the following:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to


restart your system.
2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
4. Insert Diskette 2.
5. Type: CHKDSK C: /F:2 and press Enter (where: C: is the drive where
OS/2 is installed).

For more information about CHKDSK, select Command Reference in the Information
folder.

Missing Objects in the OS/2 System Folder

Follow the instructions in "Rebuilding Your Desktop" in topic 4.2.10.3.

Folders Open and Close Immediately

Follow the instructions in "Recovering Archived System Files" in topic 4.2.10.1.

Missing, Empty, or Multiple Objects on Desktop

The Desktop is missing objects or there is more than one icon for the
same object.
One or more Desktop folders are empty.
After you shut down the computer and start it again, the objects on
the Desktop are not displayed the same as when you shut down.

Recover the archived Desktop, using the procedure in "Recovering Archived System
Files" in topic 4.2.10.1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 221 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If that does not fix the problem, follow the instructions for "Rebuilding Your
Desktop" in topic 4.2.10.3.

Object Cannot Be Deleted

If you cannot delete an object, do the following:

1. Create a folder.
2. Drag the object you want to delete to the new folder and drop it.
3. Drag the new folder to the Shredder and drop it.

If you cannot shred the folder, do the following:

1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type: CD DESKTOP and press Enter.


2. After the DESKTOP directory opens, type: RD directory and press Enter.
(Where: directory is replaced by the name of the directory (folder)
that you want to delete.)

4.2.10 Recovery Procedures

The procedures that follow provide information about recovering from Desktop
problems and system failures, including:

A damaged, unusable, or unstartable desktop


An invalid CONFIG.SYS file
A damaged INI file
Hard disk errors
A forgotten lockup password

Note: Backing up your system regularly might help you avoid having to
re-create files in the event of a system failure.

If your Desktop becomes damaged, unusable, or unstartable, you can recover in


two ways:

Use the Archive/Recover utility program to restore your Desktop to a


previously saved state
Rebuild your existing Desktop

Subtemas
4.2.10.1 Recovering Archived System Files
4.2.10.2 Recovery Choices during Restart
4.2.10.3 Rebuilding Your Desktop
4.2.10.4 Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File
4.2.10.5 Recovering the User INI File
4.2.10.6 Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk
4.2.10.7 Recovering Memory State Data
4.2.10.8 Recovering from A Forgotten Password

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 222 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2.10.1 Recovering Archived System Files

OS/2 has the capability of archiving key system files as well as the DESKTOP
directory each time you start OS/2. The default setting for this feature is OFF.
(The Archive function can be turned ON via the Archive page of the Desktop Settings
notebook.)

When the Archive function is turned ON, the state of the key system files and
Desktop as they existed at the last three "starts" of OS/2 are saved. Each time you
restart OS/2, the oldest set of archived system files is deleted and the current
system files are saved. OS/2 also keeps a permanent archive of your Desktop and
key files as they existed when OS/2 was first installed, so you can always restore
your system to its original state.

To use archived system files, do the following:

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, perform a shut


down, then press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper-left corner of your screen
(before the OS/2 logo screen appears), press Alt+F1.
3. A screen appears, listing the three most recent archives. Do one of
the following:

Type the number of the archive you want to use to restore your
system.

Type X to restore your system to its original state (as it was


when you first installed OS/2).

Type C to get an OS/2 command prompt (for example, if you want to


edit your CONFIG.SYS file).

Type V to reset your primary display to VGA (for example, if you


think your Desktop is not damaged but cannot be seen because you
need to reinstall your VGA device drivers).

4.2.10.2 Recovery Choices during Restart

The Recovery Choices screen enables you to specify how the system is to restart
while a restart is in progress. You can display the Recovery Choices screen during
restart by pressing Alt+F1 when a small white box appears in the upper left-hand
corner of your screen. If you want the system to display the Recovery Choices
screen each time it restarts, you can select Display Recovery Choices at every
system restart on the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook.

The Recovery Choices screen allows you to:

Select the set of archived system files that the system is to use to
restart

Continue using the original installation files to restart, and go to a


command line

Continue using the current system files to restart, and reset your
primary display to VGA

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 223 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Restart your system using a customized CONFIG.SYS file that you have
created

Each set of archived files appears on the Recovery Choices screen with the date
and time when the files were archived. The files are numbered 1, 2, 3 or, for the
original installation files, X. Select the files that you want the system to
restart with by pressing 1, 2, 3, or X on your keyboard. The system will continue
to restart using the set of archived files represented by the number you pressed.

To go to a command line without changing the system files, press the C key on
your keyboard.

To reset your primary display to VGA, press the V key on your keyboard.

The character keys that you press can be uppercase or lowercase letters.

To restart your system using a customized version of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter
an alphabetic character that corresponds to the name of a CONFIG.SYS file that you
have created. "Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files" in topic 4.2.10.2.1 describes
how to create and name your own customized version of CONFIG.SYS. "Displaying Your
CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen" in topic 4.2.10.2.2 describes how
to display your customized CONFIG.SYS choices on the Recovery Choices screen.

Subtemas
4.2.10.2.1 Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files
4.2.10.2.2 Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen

4.2.10.2.1 Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files

In some cases, you need different CONFIG.SYS files to create environments that
are specific to the kinds of work you are doing. For example, when you use a
laptop computer with a docking station, you might want a CONFIG.SYS file that
supports your laptop computer and one that supports your regular machine. You can
create different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file, and, during restart, specify from
the Recovery Choices screen which version the system is to use. You can also
customize the Recovery Choices screen to display your customized CONFIG.SYS file
choices.

The following steps describe how to create and use multiple CONFIG.SYS files.
In these steps, ? is any unique single alphabetic character except: X, x, C, c, V,
or v. These steps use C as the root directory. If you installed OS/2 on a drive
other than C, replace the C in the path name with your own root directory.

1. Save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file.

You can save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file by copying it to a


diskette. Otherwise, you can copy the current CONFIG.SYS file to the
C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, and rename it to CONFIG.?. If you copy and
rename CONFIG.SYS, be sure to make a note of the new name and
directory so you can restore it later.

2. On the C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, create a file called CONFIG.? and


customize it with the modifications that you need.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 224 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Copy your customized CONFIG.? file to the current CONFIG.SYS file.

There are two ways to copy your CONFIG.? file. You can enter the copy
command at the OS/2 command prompt, or you can create an OS/2 batch
file that will run during restart after the system processes
C:\CONFIG.SYS.

a. Replacing Your CONFIG.SYS file with CONFIG.?

If you have only one customized CONFIG.? file, or if you do not


plan to change between CONFIG.SYS and CONFIG.? often, you might
choose to copy over CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file.
Copying over C:\CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file
replaces CONFIG.SYS in the root directory, and makes your
customized file the default CONFIG.SYS file.

The command to copy your customized file to the current CONFIG.SYS


file is:

COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS

Using your customized CONFIG.? file as the default file allows you
to restart without selecting a CONFIG.? file at the Recovery

Choices screen.

You can now restart your system. When you restart, the system
will automatically use the file in the root directory named

CONFIG.SYS.

b. Creating a Batch File to Replace CONFIG.SYS with CONFIG.?

If you have several customized CONFIG.SYS files, using the batch


file allows you to specify the CONFIG.? you want to use without
entering multiple copy commands. You can simply change the ?
character in your batch file, and enter that character at the
Recovery Choices screen.

Create a batch file on C:\OS2\BOOT, and name it ALTF1?.CMD, where


? is the character that you used in the name of your CONFIG.?
file. Put the following COPY command in the batch file.

COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS

Display the Recovery Choices screen by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del to


restart your system and then pressing Alt+F1.

At the Recovery Choices screen, press the key for the ? single
character in the name of the CONFIG.? file you want to use.

The system continues the restart using your customized CONFIG.?


file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 225 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Note: If you enter a character from the Recovery Choices screen


for which there is no corresponding ALTF1?.CMD batch file,
the system will use the CONFIG.? file that corresponds to
that character. If no CONFIG.? file corresponding to that
character exists, the system will return to the Recovery
Choices screen.

Example

The following example shows how to create a CONFIG.SYS file named

CONFIG.A, and a batch file to copy it during restart. The system


is installed on the C drive. Before you start, save a copy of
your current CONFIG.SYS file.

1) Copy the system version of CONFIG.SYS into a new file called


CONFIG.A

COPY CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A

2) Change to the C:\OS2\BOOT directory

CD OS2
CD BOOT

3) Edit CONFIG.A to customize it, and save your changes

E CONFIG.A

4) Edit a file called ALTF1A.CMD file

E ALTF1A.CMD

5) Put the following COPY command into ALTF1A.CMD, and save your
changes

COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A C:\CONFIG.SYS

6) Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1


when the small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner
of your screen.

7) When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press the letter A.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 226 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2.10.2.2 Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen

You can customize your Recovery Choices screen to display the list of customized
CONFIG.? files that you created. Customizing the Recovery Choices screen will help
you to remember which character to enter for a particular version of CONFIG.?, by
displaying your selections.

To customize the Recovery Choices screen, edit the file


C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR. (If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C,
specify the drive on which OS/2 is installed.) You can add up to 6 lines of text
to the bottom of this file.

Each line that you add should represent a single CONFIG.? file that you created.
Each line should include the alphabetic character that identifies that CONFIG.?
file. You might also want to include a brief, one-line description of when to use
that version of the CONFIG.? file.

For example, to display the option for the CONFIG.A file on the Recovery Choices
screen, you might add the following to the file
C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR:

A CONFIG.A (file for laptop computer)

4.2.10.3 Rebuilding Your Desktop

Use the following procedure if the Archive/Recover procedure did not restore
your Desktop, this procedure will rebuild the Desktop by making new INI files.

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Change to the OS/2 directory on your hard disk. Type the following
commands and press Enter after each:

C:
CD\OS2

5. Type the following commands and press Enter after each:

MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC


MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC

6. Delete the hidden file, WP?ROOT.?SF, from the startable partition.


Type the following commands and press Enter after each:

ATTRIB -h -s -r \WP?ROOT.?SF
DEL \WP?ROOT.?SF

7. Restart the system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 227 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.2.10.4 Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File

The CONFIG.SYS file contains command statements that are used to configure your
system during startup. If the file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able
to restart the system or edit the file. (For example, some programs write
information to the CONFIG.SYS file when they are installed. In some cases, this
information can cause the CONFIG.SYS file to be unusable.) To recover the original
version of the CONFIG.SYS file (as it was created when OS/2 was installed), you can
use the following procedure:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive on which your
operating system resides).
5. Rename the damaged CONFIG.SYS file. For example, type:

REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAD

6. Press Enter.
7. Copy the backup version of the CONFIG.SYS file to the root directory
of the drive where your operating system resides. (The CONFIG.SYS
backup file was created during OS/2 installation). Type:

COPY C:\OS2\INSTALL\CONFIG.SYS C:\CONFIG.SYS

8. Press Enter.
9. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.

As stated, this procedure reestablishes the original version of the CONFIG.SYS


file (as it was created during OS/2 installation). If you made any changes to the
CONFIG.SYS file after that time, you will have to edit the newly copied CONFIG.SYS
file and add those changes.

4.2.10.5 Recovering the User INI File

The OS2.INI file, also referred to as the user INI file, is an operating system
startup file that contains system settings such as program defaults, display
options, and file options. The OS2SYS.INI file, also referred to as the system INI
file, is an operating system file that contains information about installed fonts
and printer drivers. If you receive a message that the OS2.INI file has been
"corrupted", replace both the OS2.INI file and the OS2SYS.INI file on your hard
disk.

Use the following procedure to replace these two files with versions containing
default values:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 228 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive where your
operating system resides).
5. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
6. Type ATTRIB -s -h -r OS2*.INI and press Enter.
7. Type REN OS2.INI OS2.OLD and press Enter.
8. Type MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC and press Enter.
9. Type REN OS2SYS.INI OS2SYS.OLD and press Enter.
10. Type MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC and press Enter.
11. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.

You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
you start your system. For example, if you include the following statements in
your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy of
the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made. (Note
that this example assumes that OS/2 is installed on drive C. Use the letter of the
drive on which you have OS/2 installed.)

CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY

CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX

By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.

4.2.10.6 Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk

The CHKDSK command with the parameter /F can be used to correct disk and
directory errors. However, when you use the /F parameter, no activity can occur on
the disk. Therefore, if you need to correct errors on the drive from which you
normally start OS/2, you must use the version of CHKDSK that is on the installation
diskettes (or installation CD) instead of the version that has been installed on
the hard disk. You can also use the version of CHKDSK on the installation
diskettes or CD if the disk is in use or locked by another process.

To run CHKDSK /F using diskettes:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to


restart your system.

2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.


3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
4. Insert Diskette 2.
5. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then
press Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
6. Remove the diskette from drive A.
7. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.

To run CHKDSK /F from a CD:

1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to


restart your system.
2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
4. Insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
5. Type E: (where E is your CD-ROM drive) and press Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 229 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Type CD\OS2IMAGE and press Enter.


7. Type CD DISK_2 and press Enter.
8. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then
press Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
9. Press Enter.

4.2.10.7 Recovering Memory State Data

The process OS/2 uses to recover the state of memory at the time of a failure is
called a memory dump. A memory dump is performed when a problem is difficult to
reproduce or other methods of problem determination do not identify the problem.
Memory dump information can then be analyzed by a team of technical experts and
determine the cause of the problem.

Important: Do not perform a memory dump unless your Service and Support
Group has recommended this action.

There are two types of memory dumps:

Manual memory dump (used for system hangs and traps that cause the
system to stop)

Automatic memory dump (used for application programs, system traps,


and internal processing errors)

A system memory dump can be placed on a FAT hard-disk partition or formatted


diskettes.

Different situations determine which type of memory dump is needed. Refer to


the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions about
calling for additional assistance.

Using TRACE in CONFIG.SYS File

Before you create the memory dump diskettes, you must use the OS/2 Event Tracing
Service to capture a sequence of system events. To enable system event-tracing,
add the following statements to your CONFIG.SYS file:

TRACEBUF=63
TRACE=ON

The default for TRACE=ON is to trace all static system events.

Restart your system to activate TRACE. Also, turn on two dynamic trace points
as follows:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open Command Prompts.
3. Open OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window.
4. Type the following at the command prompt:

trace on kernel (press Enter)


trace on doscall1 (press Enter)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 230 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Performing the Memory Dump

If you are sending a memory dump to diskettes, you must use formatted diskettes.
Generally, one 1.44MB diskette is used for each 2MB of RAM.

For example, if you have a 16MB system, you will probably use eight 1.44MB

formatted diskettes.

If you are sending a memory dump to a hard disk, you must first create a FAT
partition labeled SADUMP and give it a size greater than the amount of physical
memory (RAM) in your system. For example, if your system has 16MB of RAM, set the
size of the SADUMP partition to 17MB.

To run a memory dump, the Memory Dump facility must be started manually or
automatically as follows:

To start it manually:

Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press the Num Lock key
twice. After a few seconds, the screen clears; after a minute the system beeps and
one of the following messages is displayed:

When dumping to diskettes:

Insert a formatted diskette to commence dumping.

When dumping to a hard disk:

The memory dump is being performed.


The total amount of memory to be dumped is xxxx.

To start it automatically:

Type one of the following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system:

TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter:
TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter:
TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter:

where:

TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter: indicates that no automatic dump is to be


taken. This is the default value; it is generally used when
initiating a manual memory dump.

If REIPL=ON is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system will


restart automatically and no dump will be taken when a system trap or
internal processing error occurs.

TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump


information is written for any access violations. The system will
restart after the TRAPDUMP process has completed. The default drive
is A if no drive is specified.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 231 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump


information is written for system traps and internal processing
errors. The system will restart after the TRAPDUMP process has
completed. The default drive is A if no drive is specified.

TRAPDUMP now initiates a memory dump, depending on which TRAPDUMP

statement is placed in the CONFIG.SYS file.

Warning: Setting TRAPDUMP to ON or R0 enables your system to automatically


initiate a memory dump. Do not enable TRAPDUMP unless you need to troubleshoot
your system and have been instructed to do so by your technical coordinator.

Note: If dumping to diskettes, complete steps 1 through 5. If


dumping to hard disk, skip steps 1 through 5 and read step 6.

1. When prompted, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press
any key to start the dump process. The following message will be
displayed:

The memory dump is being performed...

2. When the memory dump has completed or the current dump diskette is
full, the following messages are displayed:

The diskette is full. Insert another formatted diskette in drive A.

The storage address ranges on this diskette are:

DUMPDATA.xxx yyy - zzz

Press any key to continue.

where xxx is the dump diskette number, yyy is the beginning memory
address, and zzz is the ending memory address on the disk.

Note: If you press Enter without changing the diskette, the system
will prompt you once more before the dump process overwrites the
contents of the current diskette in the drive.

3. Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any key. This
action continues the dump process and displays the following message:

The memory dump is being performed...

Warning: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the


Memory Dump facility.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the dumping is completed and the following
message is displayed:

Insert memory dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.

The storage address ranges on this diskette are:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 232 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

DUMPDATA.xxx yyy - zzz

Press any key to continue.

5. You must reinsert Dump Diskette 1 at this point to properly terminate


the dump process. The control program will write the dump summary
record to Dump Diskette 1 and end the process. After the process has
ended, the following messages are displayed:

The memory dump has completed. Remove the dump diskette and restart the
system.

6. When a memory dump is initiated, the system begins writing the system
memory to the dump partition. When completed, the system restarts
automatically.

Mailing the Dump Diskettes

Do not send dump diskettes unless instructed by the Service and Support Group.
Diskettes must be clearly labeled with the identification number (which is the PMR
number that is provided by the Service and Support Group) and your name. Also, be
sure to number the diskettes.

Send the dump diskettes to the address provided by the Service and Support
Group. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
instructions about calling for additional assistance.

4.2.10.8 Recovering from A Forgotten Password

If you forgot your lockup password, you must use the LOCK.RC file located in the
\OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file. To do this:

1. Turn on the computer.


2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Change from drive A to the drive on which OS/2 is installed. Type:
C: and press Enter.
5. Change to the OS2 directory. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
6. Type the following:

MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC

7. Press Enter.
8. Restart the computer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 233 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3 Chapter 17. Video Procedures

This chapter provides information to help you install and fine tune your OS/2
video. It includes supported chip sets and resolutions, instructions for changing
video settings, plus specific procedures for SVGA, XGA, and LCD or Monochrome
Plasma displays.

Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
information.

Subtemas
4.3.1 Video Device Drivers for OS/2
4.3.2 Installing a Video Device Driver
4.3.3 Video Settings
4.3.4 SVGA Procedures
4.3.5 XGA Procedures
4.3.6 Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays

4.3.1 Video Device Drivers for OS/2

OS/2 contains video device drivers that support the chip sets found on many
system boards and display adapters.

The following table lists the supported chip sets and the video device driver
that should be selected during installation.

Subtemas
4.3.1.1 Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers
4.3.1.2 Accelerated Video Device Drivers
4.3.1.3 Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 234 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.1.1 Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Manufacturer ¦ Chip Set ¦ Video Device Driver ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ ATI ¦ ATI28800 256 color ¦ ATI Technologies ¦
¦ Technologies ¦ ¦ ATI28800 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Cirrus Logic ¦ CL-GD5422, CL-GD5424 ¦ Cirrus Logic ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Headland ¦ HT209 256 color ¦ Headland ¦
¦ Technologies ¦ ¦ Technologies HT209 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ IBM ¦ IBM VGA 16 color ¦ Video graphics ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ adapter (VGA) ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ IBM ¦ IBM VGA256C ¦ IBM VGA256C ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Trident** ¦ TVGA8900B, TVGA8900C 256 ¦ Trident ¦
¦ Microsystems ¦ color ¦ Microsystems ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ TVGA8900 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ TSENG ¦ ET4000 ¦ TSENG Laboratories ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ET4000 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Western ¦ WD90C11, WD90C30, WD90C31 (in ¦ Western Digital ¦
¦ Digital** ¦ WD90C30 compatibility mode) ¦ WD90C11, C30, C31 ¦
¦ ¦ 256 color ¦ (C30 mode only) ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ Note: Use the Selective Install icon to change the resolution and ¦
¦ number of colors for non-accelerated video device drivers. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 235 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.1.2 Accelerated Video Device Drivers

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Manufacturer ¦ Chip Set ¦ Video Device Driver ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ IBM ¦ IBM 8514 ¦ Display Adapter ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ 8514/A ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ IBM ¦ IBM XGA ¦ Extended graphic ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ adapter (XGA) ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ S3 Corporation ¦ S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928 ¦ S3 86C801, 86C805, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ 86C928 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ S3 Corporation ¦ S3 86C864 ¦ S3 864 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Cirrus Logic** ¦ Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, ¦ Cirrus Logic 5426, ¦
¦ ¦ 5434 ¦ 5428, 5430, 5434 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Western Digital ¦ WD 90C24, 90C24A, 90C24A2, ¦ WD 90C24 - 90C31 ¦
¦ ¦ 90C31 ¦ ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Western Digital ¦ WD 90C33 ¦ WD 90C33 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ ATI Technology ¦ MACH 32 ¦ ATI MACH 32 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ ATI Technology ¦ MACH 64 ¦ ATI MACH 64 ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ TSENG** ¦ ETW32, ETW32i, ETW32p ¦ TSENG ET4000/W32, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ /W32i, /W32p ¦
+-----------------+--------------------------------+---------------------¦
¦ Weitek** ¦ Power 9000 ¦ Weitek Power 9000 ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ Note: Not all system boards and display adapters that use these chip ¦
¦ sets are supported. For more information about display adapter and ¦
¦ chip set compatibility, select Help from the Display Driver Install ¦
¦ window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the ¦
¦ Installation Diskette. ¦
¦ ¦
¦ These drivers will be installed in 640x480x256 colors by the OS/2 ¦
¦ installation program. Use the system icon to change the resolution ¦
¦ and number of colors if you are using any of the accelerated video ¦
¦ device drivers except IBM 8514. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 236 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.1.3 Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers

The resolutions that can be set for a particular display adapter, are dependent
on the:

Specific display adapter being used


Graphics accelerator chip set on the adapter
Video device driver being used
Amount of video memory on the adapter

The video device drivers shipped with OS/2 (see the previous table) support the
following resolutions and number of colors. Not all of the device drivers support
all of the resolutions. For more information about the resolutions supported by
each adapter and device driver, select Help from the Display Driver Install window
in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.

+-----------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Resolutions ¦ Number of ¦ Video Memory ¦ Note¦
¦ ¦ Colors ¦ Required ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 640 x 480 ¦ 256 ¦ 1MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 800 x 600 ¦ 256 ¦ 1MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1024 x 768 ¦ 256 ¦ 1MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1280 x 1200 ¦ 256 ¦ 2MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1600 x 1200 ¦ 256 ¦ 4MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 640 x 480 ¦ 65,536 ¦ 1MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 800 x 600 ¦ 65,536 ¦ 1MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1024 x 768 ¦ 65,536 ¦ 2MB ¦ ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1280 x 1024 ¦ 65,536 ¦ 4MB ¦ 2 ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 640 x 480 ¦ 16,777,216 ¦ 1MB or 2MB ¦ 1, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 3 ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 800 x 600 ¦ 16,777,216 ¦ 2MB ¦ 1, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 4, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 6 ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1024 x 768 ¦ 16,777,216 ¦ 4MB ¦ 1 ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1280 x 1024 ¦ 16,777,216 ¦ 4MB ¦ 1, ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦ 2 ¦
+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----¦
¦ 1360 x 1024 ¦ 16 ¦ 1MB ¦ 5 ¦
+-----------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ Note: ¦
¦ ¦
¦ 1. The Western Digital device drivers do not support ¦
¦ 16,777,216 colors. ¦
¦ 2. Most adapter/chip set combinations do not support ¦
¦ these resolutions and colors. ¦
¦ 3. The amount of video memory required for this ¦
¦ resolution is dependent on the display adapter and ¦
¦ the video device driver installed. ¦
¦ 4. Display adapters with the TSENG W32p Rev A chip set ¦
¦ do not support this resolution. ¦
¦ 5. This resolution is supported only for XGA-2. ¦
¦ 6. Cirrus adapters require more than 2MB of video memory ¦
¦ for this resolution. ¦
+-----------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 237 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.2 Installing a Video Device Driver

All display adapters must tailor their output to the capabilities of the display
attached to the system. Unfortunately, there is no standard for communicating the
capabilities of the display to the display adapter. The result is that many
display adapters supply a program to define and select the type of display attached
to the system. OS/2 responds to this situation by permitting the DOS display
selection utilities provided by the manufacturers to be used to properly configure
the system. OS/2 then configures the system in the same manner each time your
computer is started.

If no display is specified, many display adapters make an assumption about the


type of display attached to the system. This default setting is designed to work
with the widest range of displays possible; therefore, it is the safest choice.

During this installation procedure, you will be asked to make a decision about
whether you want to use the defaults for your display type, or use the display
adapter utility program provided by the manufacturer of the adapter. You should
use the utility program provided by the manufacturer if any of the following apply:

Your display adapter is produced by Diamond Computer Systems, Inc..


Your display supports non-interlaced operation only.
Your display does not support VESA standard refresh rates.
Your display adapter requires software configuration to function
properly in DOS.
You want to configure your system to take advantage of the full
refresh capabilities of your display.

Note: Using the utility program provided by the manufacturer requires


exact knowledge about the capabilities of your display. If the
wrong display type is selected, your system might not start.

If you have an SVGA adapter in your system, you must restore it to work in VGA
mode before you can use the following instructions to install a different adapter
in your system. See "Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter" in topic
4.3.4.2 for instructions.

To install a new display adapter or video device driver:

1. Install the display adapter using the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Restart your system.

3. Open OS/2 System.

4. Open System Setup.

5. Open Selective Install.

6. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System


Configuration window.

Note: A secondary display is used for only DOS and full-screen


sessions. Even if two displays are attached to the system only
one is active at a time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 238 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

7. Select the display driver that you want from the list provided. (If
you are unsure of which driver to choose, select Help.)

8. Select OK.

9. Follow the instructions on the screen.

4.3.3 Video Settings

To change video settings for a program:

1. Point to the program icon.


2. Click mouse button 2.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the Session tab.
5. Select the DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 push button.
6. Change the settings (See the online documentation for detailed a
explanation of these settings).
7. Select the Save push button.
8. Close the Settings notebook.

4.3.4 SVGA Procedures

The following procedures provide instructions for enabling and disabling


SVGA after OS/2 is installed.

Subtemas
4.3.4.1 Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions
4.3.4.2 Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
4.3.4.3 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection
4.3.4.4 Capturing the Display Configuration
4.3.4.5 Switching to a Display with Less Capability

4.3.4.1 Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions

You can enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions to run in high-resolution (1024 x


768) mode while the OS/2 Desktop runs in VGA mode.

To enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions for SVGA:

Note: Follow the instructions very carefully. Otherwise, you could cause

your WIN-OS/2 sessions to become inoperable.

1. Use Selective Install to install VGA (640 x 480) support for OS/2.

2. Back up the SYSTEM.INI and WIN.INI files as follows:

a. Open OS/2 System.


b. Open Command Prompts.
c. Open OS/2 Full Screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 239 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

d. At the C prompt, do the following:


Type: CD\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2 and press Enter.
Type: COPY WIN.INI WIN.BAK and press Enter.
Type: COPY SYSTEM.INI SYSTEM.BAK and press Enter.

3. Check the OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory for the desired


high-resolution display device driver.

If the device driver is already on the system, go to step 4.

If the device driver is not found, use your OS/2 or Windows


installation disk to copy the driver to the
\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory.

For example, to use the OS/2 diskettes and install the 8514.DRV
high-resolution device driver:

a. Search the OS/2 installation diskettes for the WIN8514 and


*F.FON files and then do the following:

- DIR A:WIN8514 and press Enter


- DIR A:*F.FON and press Enter

After you find the files, you have to unpack them. The files
are packed with their standard target directory coded into the
packed file.

b. Copy the file to the system disk in the proper directory,


using the UNPACK utility program:

- Type UNPACK A:WIN8514 and press Enter.


- Type UNPACK A:*F.FON and press Enter.

The SVGA driver and font files are now unpacked and in the
correct directory.

4. Edit the SYSTEM.INI file and find the following line:

FDISPLAY.DRV=VGA.DRV

This line specifies the device driver used in WIN-OS/2 full-screen


sessions.

Note: DISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for Microsoft Windows.


FDISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for WIN-OS/2 full-screen
sessions. SDISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for WIN-OS/2
windowed sessions.

5. Change this line to point to the high-resolution device driver that


was unloaded in the steps above. In this example, the device driver
is 8514.DRV.

Note: To install a different driver, substitute the name of your


driver in the statement: FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV

The modified line should look like the following:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 240 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV

6. Change the SYSTEM.INI font entries:

In SYSTEM.INI, these entries are:

FIXEDFON.FON=VGAFIX.FON
OEMFONTS.FON=VGAOEM.FON
FONTS.FON=VGASYS.FON

For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:

FIXEDFON.FON=8514FIX.FON
OEMFONTS.FON=8514OEM.FON
FONTS.FON=8514SYS.FON

Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.

7. Change the WIN.INI font entries

In WIN.INI, the entries are:

SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SYMBOLE.FON


MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SSERIFE.FON
MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SERIFE.FON
SMALL FONTS (VGA RES)=SMALLE.FON
COURIER 10,12,15 (VGA RES)=COURE.FON

For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:

SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SYMBOLG.FON


MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SSERIFG.FON
MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SERIFG.FON
SMALL FONTS (8514 RES)=SMALLG.FON
COURIER 10,12,15 (8514 RES)=COURG.FON

Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.

The system is ready to run Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions


high-resolution mode.

4.3.4.2 Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter

Because SVGA adapters are only compatible at the VGA level, the system
must be restored to VGA in order to safely install a different display
adapter.

To set your system back to VGA:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 241 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.

Your display adapter is restored and can work in VGA mode. If you want to
install a new display adapter or video device driver, complete the steps under
"Installing a Video Device Driver" in topic 4.3.2.

4.3.4.3 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection

If you performed the steps in "Installing a Video Device Driver" in topic 4.3.2
and selected an incorrect display driver you can recover by restoring to VGA mode.

To restore to VGA mode:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
display adapter. See "Installing a Video Device Driver" in
topic 4.3.2 for instructions.

4.3.4.4 Capturing the Display Configuration

SVGA display and video mode configuration under OS/2 is controlled by the
SVGADATA.PMI file. This file can be provided by the display adapter manufacturer
or created using the SVGA utility program.

The SVGA utility program gets information from the SVGA chip set to set

each video mode and captures the current state of the display adapter. This
information is stored in the SVGADATA.PMI file and used when the system is started.

Both the SVGA.EXE and SVGADATA.PMI are located in the \OS2 directory.

To create the SVGADATA.PMI file, type one of the following commands at a DOS
command prompt and press Enter.

SVGA ON Generates the SVGADATA.PMI file which enables OS/2 SVGA


support.

SVGA ON DOS Generates PMI information when executed outside the OS/2
DOS environment. This generates an SVGADATA.DOS file
that can be renamed to .PMI and copied to the \OS2
directory. This entry might be required if your SVGA
adapter uses DOS device drivers to configure the
display. Trident** adapters are an example.

SVGA ON INIT Generates default display information for some TSENG**


and Cirrus Logic** based display adapters.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 242 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

SVGA OFF Deletes the SVGADATA.PMI file, disabling OS/2 SVGA


support.

SVGA STATUS Returns your graphics chipset, as it appears to OS/2.

Note: The SVGA utility program might be affected by video configuration


programs, Terminate Stay Resident programs (TSR), and switches and
jumpers on the display adapter. Configure your video adapter
properly before using the SVGA utility program to create the
SVGADATA.PMI file.

4.3.4.5 Switching to a Display with Less Capability

Switching to a lower capability display after installing high-resolution (SVGA)


drivers might cause the system to start out of synchronization. Follow this
procedure to switch to a display with less capability:

1. Open DOS Full-Screen command prompt.


2. Run the DOS display configuration utility program supplied with your
SVGA adapter to properly configure your display adapter and display.
3. Change to the \OS2 directory on your hard disk.
4. Type SVGA ON.
5. Press Enter to start the SVGA utility program. This utility program
saves the current state of your video configuration.
6. Shut down your system.
7. Restart your system to enable the new display.

Note: You can also use these instructions if you start a specific version
of DOS. Substitute the following step for step 4. Type SVGA ON
DOS and press Enter. When the SVGA utility program finishes, type:

RENAME\OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI

Press Enter.

4.3.5 XGA Procedures

The following information relates to specific situations with high-resolution


XGA displays.

Subtemas
4.3.5.1 XGA-2 Display Type Override
4.3.5.2 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection
4.3.5.3 Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 243 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.5.1 XGA-2 Display Type Override

To correctly operate your display, OS/2 needs to determine the type and
characteristics of the device by using a display identification number. Some
displays have the same identification number but different characteristics. If
OS/2 does not operate your display at the correct refresh rate or display mode, and
you are running an XGA-2 adapter, do the following:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System. The System Settings notebook appears.
4. Select page 2 of the Screen page. (You can go to page 2 by selecting
the right arrow in the lower-right corner of the notebook.)
5. Select the appropriate display type using the list provided.

Note: If an incorrect display type is selected, your display might be


unusable after you restart your system.

6. Close the Settings notebook.

4.3.5.2 Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection

If you performed the steps in "XGA-2 Display Type Override" in topic 4.3.5.1 and
your display is not usable, you can revert back to the previous display type. To
erase the display type override information:

1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Change to the C:\XGA$DMQS directory and delete the XGASETUP.PRO file.
This erases all override information from your system.
5. Remove the diskette and restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
Your display now operates using its default settings.

Note: If you plan to change or replace your display, first delete the
file XGASETUP.PRO from the XGA$DMQS directory and then turn off the
system. If your new display does not operate correctly, repeat the
preceding procedure.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 244 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4.3.5.3 Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors

Note: You cannot use this procedure if you are using the VGA, 8514, or
SVGA driver.

To change the screen resolution or number of colors:

1. Open OS/2 System.


2. Open System Setup.
3. Open System.
4. Select the desired resolution and number of colors from the list.
5. Close the Settings notebook.
6. Shut down and restart your system to make the new resolution and
number of colors operational.

Note: The Microsoft Windows XGA full-screen driver does not support all
the graphic modes handled by the OS/2 PM XGA driver. The
full-screen Windows driver does not support 1024 x 768 x 16 color.
If this mode is selected, the OS/2 Desktop will run at 1024 x 768 x
16 color, but the Windows full screen will operate in 1024 x 768 x
256 color mode.

4.3.6 Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays

Laptop LCDs and computers with monochrome plasma displays use 16 shades of gray
and operate like VGA displays.

Note: If you run VGA DOS graphics programs on the OS/2 Desktop and your
system does not have VGA support, your Desktop might be corrupted.

You can optimize the color scheme for gray-scale usage, and also provide a good
set of colors for a VGA Desktop presentation on a laptop LCD or monochrome plasma
display. To change the color scheme and create a more readable display image:

1. Use your Reference Diskette or hardware Setup program to set your


hardware to VGA color, if possible.
2. Open OS/2 System.
3. Open System Setup.
4. Open Scheme Palette.
5. Select the monochrome scheme in the right-hand column.
6. Close the Scheme Palette.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 245 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.0 Part 5 - Advanced Installation

Subtemas
5.1 Chapter 18. Using Advanced Installation
5.2 Chapter 19. Setting Up Your Hard Disk
5.3 Chapter 20. Special Hardware Considerations

5.1 Chapter 18. Using Advanced Installation

This chapter provides examples of installing OS/2 on your computer using the
Advanced Installation method. Advanced Installation is designed for

experienced computer users who want to customize their installation in one or


more of the following ways:

Select specific software features of OS/2 to install, rather than the


preselected group (see Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
Install OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C (see Examples 1, 2,
and 3)
Install OS/2 in a logical drive (see Examples 1, 2, and 3)
Install OS/2 on a hard disk other than the first disk in the computer
(see Example 3)
Select the HPFS file system (see step 21 in Example 1)
Install OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager (see Examples 1, 2,
and 3)
Install OS/2 on a computer that does not have DOS and Windows on it
(see Examples 4 and 5)
Install OS/2 in one primary partition and delete all existing
information on your hard disk (see Example 5)

If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a screen.
If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error messages,
refer to Chapter 15, "Solving Installation Problems" in topic 4.1.

Subtemas
5.1.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup
5.1.2 Installing the Operating System
5.1.3 Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu
5.1.4 Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu
5.1.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation
5.1.6 Using a Response File to Install OS/2
5.1.7 Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source

5.1.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup

During Advanced Installation, you will be asked to specify how you want to
partition your hard disk. If you are installing more than one operating system,
you will want to consider setting up multiple partitions to contain them. If you
set up multiple partitions, you must install the Boot Manager feature. The Boot
Manager helps you manage the selective startup of your operating systems.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 246 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

To find out more about partitioning your hard disk and installing Boot Manager,
read Chapter 19, "Setting Up Your Hard Disk" in topic 5.2. before continuing with
the Advanced Installation. For information about partition sizes, see Table 2 in
topic 5.2.4.3.

5.1.2 Installing the Operating System

The sections that follow provide examples of typical installation setups.

"Example 1" in topic 5.1.2.1 shows how to repartition your hard disk
to create a Boot Manager partition, a primary partition for DOS and
Windows, and a logical drive for OS/2.
"Example 2" in topic 5.1.2.2 shows how to preserve an existing
partition that already contains DOS and Windows, and create a Boot
Manager partition and a logical drive for OS/2 on a hard disk that has
available free space.
"Example 3" in topic 5.1.2.3 shows an installation on a computer with
two hard disks. In this example, a Boot Manager partition and a
primary partition for DOS and Windows are created on the first hard
disk. On the second hard disk, two logical drives are created, one to
hold data (with drive letter D) and one for OS/2 (with drive letter
E).
"Example 4" in topic 5.1.2.4 and "Example 5" in topic 5.1.2.5 show how
to install OS/2 on a computer that has no other operating systems
already installed on it. The Boot Manager is not installed in these
installation examples.

Note: If you install OS/2 on a computer without Windows, you will not
be able to use Windows programs.

To make the installation as easy as possible, select the example that most
closely resembles your system and the way you want to customize it. If you need
more detailed explanations of the Boot Manager, the FDISK utility, the file systems
available in OS/2, or hard disk partitioning, please read Chapter 19, "Setting Up
Your Hard Disk" in topic 5.2.

Note: Be sure you have read Chapter 1, "As You Begin" in topic 1.1 before
installing OS/2.

Subtemas
5.1.2.1 Example 1
5.1.2.2 Example 2
5.1.2.3 Example 3
5.1.2.4 Example 4
5.1.2.5 Example 5

5.1.2.1 Example 1

Creating a Boot Manager Partition, a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows, and
a Logical Drive for OS/2 and Data

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 247 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

In the following example, a 120MB hard disk that contains one primary partition
with DOS and Windows in it will be deleted and replaced with the following
partitions:

A 1MB Boot Manager partition


A 20MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
A 99MB logical drive for OS/2 and data (drive D)

Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions to
be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your hard disk.

1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use
your existing operating system to back up the data.)

2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.

3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing


OS/2 from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.

4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it. The following screen appears:

5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1


Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see
messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the
following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 248 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced


Installation. Then press Enter.

7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,


specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.

8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to


continue with the installation.

9. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to
delete

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 249 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:

a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.


b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.

11. Create the DOS and Windows primary partition:

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 20) and
press Enter.
d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
f. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
h. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
Enter.

12. Create the logical drive for OS/2 and your data:

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 99) by
pressing Enter.

Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining


space on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 99),
you would also have to indicate if you wanted to create the
logical drive at the end of free space or at the start of
free space.

d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.


e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS2/DATA) and
press Enter.

13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected
at startup time):

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name
you have given the logical drive) and press Enter.
b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the
logical drive will appear next to Default.

Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do
so after installation or you can use the steps under
"Setting the Menu Display Time" in topic 5.1.3.1 now. Then
continue with step d.

d. Press F3.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 250 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

14. Exit the FDISK screen:

a. Press F3.
b. Press any key to remove the message box.
c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
d. When a message appears confirming that the hard disk partitioning
is complete, remove Diskette 1 from drive A. Do not insert the
Installation Diskette. Continue with step 15.

15. Install DOS and Windows:

a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If
prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the
partition and logical drive you created in the previous steps.
c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the
DOS partition and press Enter.
d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in
this example, it is drive C). Follow the installation
instructions that came with Windows.

Note: If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file,


you should avoid putting the swapper file in the same
partition or logical drive as OS/2. However, if you put
the Windows swapper file in the same partition or logical
drive as OS/2, make sure you leave enough free space for
OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper file.

16. Continue the OS/2 installation:

a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
and insert Diskette 1 into drive A. Then press Enter.
c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select
option 2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.

17. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name you have given the
logical drive) and press Enter.
c. Select Set installable and press Enter.
d. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.

18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option
1, Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen
will show drive D as the selected drive.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 251 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert
Diskette 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you
will not see any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)

20. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition,
do one of the following:

Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 22.
Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file
system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 21.

Refer to "Selecting a File System" in topic 5.2.5 for an explanation


of the file systems.

21. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive.

22. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
installation progresses.

After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation


Diskette and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the
screen. After you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the
OS/2 logo screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 252 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

23. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and
the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your
system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the


mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device
name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct
information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the
hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it.
If you need information about which device drivers to select for your
primary or secondary display, refer to Chapter 17, "Video Procedures"
in topic 4.3

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need


more information about any screen you see.

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,


click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super
VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the
Installation program where you can configure your computer for the
SVGA display.

24. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow
keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list
of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is
attached:

If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on


the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1,
LPT2, or LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1,
COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
Setup and Installation screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 253 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

25. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the
OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration
in the menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to "Modifying the
CONFIG.SYS File during Installation" in topic 5.2.6.2 for more
information.

26. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
features you want to install. You will notice that some features have
a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for
installation. The amount of hard disk space required for each feature
is shown to the right of the feature.

Follow these steps:

a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By


deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.

27. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do
not want to select. Then click on OK.

28. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are
installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert
diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After
inserting each diskette, click on OK or press Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 254 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

29. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen; click on Help if you need more information.

30. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are
part of the OS/2 installation.

31. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do
one of the following:

If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:


a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
requested.
If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
type the drive letter and directory name in the field
provided. For example:

e:\winsetup

where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where


\winsetup is the directory that contains the Windows files.

32. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press
Enter.

33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut
down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.

34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your
screen.

Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

5.1.2.2 Example 2

Creating a Boot Manager Partition, Keeping an Existing Primary Partition for DOS
and Windows (without Repartitioning), and Creating Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data

In this example, a hard disk of 120MB currently consists of a primary partition


of 40MB (containing DOS and Windows) and a logical drive of 80MB (which might
contain data). The DOS/Windows primary partition (drive C) will be preserved, but
the logical drive will be deleted and replaced by:

A 1MB Boot Manager partition


A 39MB logical drive for data (drive D)
A 40MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 255 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

In this example, you will create free space on your hard disk and then put the
Boot Manager partition at the end of the free space. Of course, you can customize
the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions to be. Be
aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on the drive you are
repartitioning.

1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing logical drive.
(Use your existing operating system to back up the data.)
2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing
OS/2 from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it. The following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 256 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1


Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see
messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the
following screen appears:

6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced


Installation. Then press Enter.
7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.

8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to


continue with the installation.
9. Delete the existing logical drive (which you have backed up):
a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Highlight the line that contains information about the logical
drive you are going to delete. Then press Enter.
c. Select Delete partition from the Options menu and press Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 257 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
c. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
11. Create the first logical drive (for data):
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Type the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 39)
and press Enter.
d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
12. Create the second logical drive (for OS/2):
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 40
) by pressing Enter.

Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining


space on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 40),
you would also have to indicate if you wanted to create the
logical drive at the end of free space or at the start of
free space.

d.Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.


e.Press Enter to display the Options menu.
f.Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
g.Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
Enter.
13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected
at startup time):
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
logical drive will appear next to Default.

Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do
so after installation or you can use the steps under
"Setting the Menu Display Time" in topic 5.1.3.1 Then
continue with step d.

d. Press F3.
14. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
15. Add a name for the DOS/Windows partition to the Boot Manager startup
menu:
a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the line that contains information
about the DOS/Windows partition.
b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
c. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
d. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 258 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

16. Exit the FDISK screen:


a. Press F3.
b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.

17. Continue with the installation. You will be asked to reinsert the
Installation Diskette and Diskette 1 Follow the messages on the
screen.
18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option
1, Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen
will show drive E as the selected drive.)
19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert
Diskette 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you
will not see any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
20. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
you want to use for your OS/2 drive. (Refer to "Selecting a File
System" in topic 5.2.5)
21. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
installation progresses.

After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation


Diskette and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the
screen. After you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the
OS/2 logo screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:

22. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and
the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your
system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 259 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the


mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device
name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct
information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the
hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it.
If you need information about which device drivers to select for your
primary or secondary display, refer Chapter 17, "Video Procedures" in
topic 4.3.

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need


more information about any screen you see.

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,


click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super
VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the
Installation program where you can configure your computer for the
SVGA display.
23. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow
keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list
of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is
attached:
If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1,
LPT2, or LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1,
COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
Setup and Installation screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 260 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

24. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
25. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file
system you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold
your data (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to
"Selecting a File System" in topic 5.2.5 for an explanation of the
file systems. Click on Format when you are done.
26. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
27. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the
OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration
on the menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to "Modifying the
CONFIG.SYS File during Installation" in topic 5.2.6.2 for more
information.
28. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
features you want to install. You will notice that some features have
a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for
installation. The amount of hard disk space required for each feature
is shown to the right of the feature.

Follow these steps:


a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By

deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.


b.If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
29. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do
not want to select. Then click on OK.
30. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are
installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 261 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After


inserting each diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
31. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen; click on Help if you need more information.
32. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are
part of the OS/2 installation.
33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut
down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your
screen.

Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

5.1.2.3 Example 3

Creating a Boot Manager Partition and a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows on
the First Hard Disk, and Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data on the Second Hard Disk

In the following example, a system with two hard disk drives (one 80MB in size
with DOS and Windows on it, and the other 200MB in size with programs and data on
it) will be reformatted and replaced with the following partitions and logical
drives:

The first hard disk:


- A 1MB Boot Manager partition
- A 79MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
The second hard disk:
- A 155MB logical drive for programs and data (drive D)
- A 45MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)

Notice that in this example, because only one primary partition (drive C) is
created on the first hard disk, no drive remapping occurs for your data drive
(drive D). That is, if your data files were previously in drive D on the second
hard disk, they will still be in logical drive D after repartitioning and
installing OS/2. Of course, you must back up your data files before
repartitioning, and then restore the files to drive D when the OS/2 installation is
completed.

You will also notice that when you create only logical drives on your second
hard disk, the FDISK utility program will automatically set up a small (usually
1MB) primary partition at the start of free space. That is because it must reserve
space for the partition table at the start of the hard disk. However, this
partition will not be assigned a drive letter, and will not cause drive remapping
or interfere with the use of the logical drives you create on this disk.

Use the following steps to set up your hard disks this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions to
be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your hard
disks.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 262 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partitions. (Use
your existing operating system to back up the data.) Be sure to back
up data on both hard disks.

2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.

3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing


OS/2 from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.

4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it. The following screen appears:

5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1


Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see
messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the
following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 263 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced


Installation. Then press Enter.

7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,


specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.

8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to


continue with the installation.

9. Delete the existing partition on the first hard disk (which you have
backed up):

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to
delete on the first hard disk.

10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:

a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.


b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.

11. Create the primary partition for DOS and Windows:

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 79) by pressing
Enter.

Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining


space on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 79),
you would also have to indicate if you wanted to create the
partition at the end of free space or at the start of free
space.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 264 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.


e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
g. Type a name for this primary partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and
press Enter.

12. Delete the existing partition on the second hard disk (which you have
backed up):

a. At the FDISK screen, press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the
top of the screen.
b. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the
second hard disk.
c. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
FDISK screen.
d. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete
and press Enter.
e. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
f. Repeat steps a through e for any other partitions you want to
delete on the second hard disk.

13. Create the logical drive for OS/2:

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.
b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Type the size of the logical drive (in this example, 45) and press
Enter.
d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
e. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
f. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
h. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
Enter.

14. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected
at startup time):

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
have given the logical drive for OS/2) and press Enter.

b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.


c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
logical drive will appear next to Default.

Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do
so after installation or you can use the steps under
"Setting the Menu Display Time" in topic 5.1.3.1 now. Then
continue with step d.

d. Press F3.

15. Create the logical drive for data:

a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press
Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 265 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

b. Select Create partition and press Enter.


c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 155) by
pressing Enter.

Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining


space on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than
155), you would also have to indicate if you wanted to
create the partition at the end of free space or at the
start of free space.

d. Select Extended Logical Drive and Press Enter.

16. Exit the FDISK screen:

a. Press F3.
b. Press any key to remove the message box.
c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
d. When a message appears confirming the hard disk partitioning is
complete, remove Diskette 1 from drive A. Do not insert the
Installation Diskette. Continue with step 17.

17. Install DOS and Windows on the first hard disk:

a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If
prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the
partition and logical drives you created in the previous steps.
c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the
DOS partition and press Enter.
d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in
this example, it is drive C). Follow the installation
instructions that came with Windows.

Note: If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file,


you should avoid putting the swapper file in the same
partition or logical drive as OS/2. However, if you put
the Windows swapper file in the same partition or logical
drive as OS/2, make sure you leave enough free space for
OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper file.

18. Continue the OS/2 installation:

a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
and insert Diskette 1 into drive A. Then press Enter.
c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select
option 2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.

19. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top of the FDISK
screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 266 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

c. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the
second hard disk.
d. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
FDISK screen.
e. Highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you have given the OS/2
logical drive) and press Enter.
f. Select Set installable and press Enter.
g. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.

20. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option
1, Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen
will show drive E as the selected drive.)

21. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert
Diskette 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you
will not see any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)

22. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition,
do one of the following:

Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 24.
Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file
system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 23.

Refer to "Selecting a File System" in topic 5.2.5 for an explanation


of the file systems.

23. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive. If a warning
screen appears, press Enter to continue with the installation.

24. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
installation progresses.

25. After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation


Diskette and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the
screen. After you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the
OS/2 logo screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 267 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

26. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and
the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your
system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the


mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device
name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct
information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the
hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it.
If you need information about which device drivers to select for your
primary or secondary display, refer to Chapter 17, "Video Procedures"
in topic 4.3.

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need


more information about any screen you see.

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,


click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super
VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the
Installation program where you can configure your computer for the
SVGA display.

27. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow
keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list
of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is
attached:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 268 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on


the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1,
LPT2, or LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1,
COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
Setup and Installation screen appears::

28. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.

29. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file
system you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold
data (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to
"Selecting a File System" in topic 5.2.5 for an explanation of the
file systems. Click on Format when you are done.

30. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.

31. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the
OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration
in the menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to "Modifying the
CONFIG.SYS File during Installation" in topic 5.2.6.2 for more
information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 269 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

32. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
features you want to install. You will notice that some features have
a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for
installation. The amount of hard disk space required for each feature
is shown to the right of the feature.

Follow these steps:

a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By


deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.

33. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do
not want to select. Then click on OK.

34. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are
installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert
diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After
inserting each diskette, click on OK or press Enter.

35. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen; click on Help if you need more information.

36. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are
part of the OS/2 installation.

37. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do
one of the following:

If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:


a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
requested.
If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
type the drive letter and directory name in the field
provided. For example:

e:\winsetup

where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where


\winsetup is the directory that contains the Windows files.
d. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and
press Enter.
e. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted
to shut down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press
Enter.
f. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on
your screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 270 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

5.1.2.4 Example 4

Creating a Primary Partition for OS/2 and a Logical Drive for Data

The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
partition and your data in another partition. It does not involve the installation
of the Boot Manager. You can use this setup if you are installing on a computer
that does not have DOS, Windows, or any other operating systems on it, or if you
want to replace all existing operating systems with OS/2.

In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:

A 45MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)


A 35MB logical drive, which will be used to hold programs and data
(drive D)

Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions to
be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your hard
disk.

1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use
your existing operating system to back up the data.)

2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing


OS/2 from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.

3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it. The following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 271 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1


Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see
messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the
following screen appears:

5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced


Installation. Then press Enter.

6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,


specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.

7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to


continue with the installation.

8. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 272 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:

a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.


b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 45) and
press Enter.
d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.

10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:

a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.


b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press
Enter.

11. Create the logical drive for your data:

a. Highlight the Free Space line.


b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
c. Select Create partition and press Enter.
d. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 35)
by pressing Enter.

Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining


space on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 35),
you would also have to indicate if you wanted to create the
logical drive at the end of free space or at the start of
free space.

e. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.

12. Exit the FDISK screen:

a. Press F3.
b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.

13. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.

14. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and
press Enter.

15. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option
1, Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen
will show drive C as the selected drive.)

16. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert
Diskette 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you
will not see any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)

17. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
you want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to "Selecting a File
System" in topic 5.2.5.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 273 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

18. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette
6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then
reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen. After you
remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen,
followed by the System Configuration screen:

19. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and
the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your
system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the


mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device
name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct
information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the
hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it.
If you need information about which device drivers to select for your
primary or secondary display, refer to Chapter 17, "Video Procedures"
in topic 4.3.

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need


more information about any screen you see.

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,


click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
(SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 274 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

20. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow
keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list
of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is
attached:

If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on


the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1,
LPT2, or LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1,
COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
Setup and Installation screen appears:

21. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.

22. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file
system you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold
data (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to
"Selecting a File System" in topic 5.2.5 for an explanation of the
file systems. Click on Format when you are done.

23. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 275 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

24. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the
OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration
on the menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to "Modifying the
CONFIG.SYS File during Installation" in topic 5.2.6.2 for more
information.

25. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
features you want to install. You will notice that some features have
a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for
installation. The amount of hard disk space required for each feature
is shown to the right of the feature.

Follow these steps:

a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By


deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.

26. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do
not want to select. Then click on OK.

27. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are
installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert
diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After
inserting each diskette, click on OK or press Enter.

28. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen; click on Help if you need more information.

29. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are
part of the OS/2 installation.

30. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut
down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.

31. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your
screen.

Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 276 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.1.2.5 Example 5

Creating One Primary Partition for OS/2

The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
primary partition (drive C). It does not involve the installation of the Boot
Manager. You can use this setup if you want to reformat your existing hard disk
and replace all the information on the disk with OS/2. You can also use this
example if you want to reformat your hard disk with a different file system (for
example, you now want to use the FAT file system on a computer that was previously
formatted with the HPFS file system).

In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:

An 80MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)

Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, the size
of your hard disk may be different from the size of the disk used in this example.
Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your hard disk.

1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use
your existing operating system to back up the data.)

2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing


OS/2 from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.

3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it. The following screen appears:

4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1


Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see
messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the
following screen appears:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 277 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced


Installation. Then press Enter.

6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,


specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.

7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to


continue with the installation.

8. Delete existing partitions (which you have backed up):

a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
d. Repeat steps a through c for all partitions you want to delete.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 278 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:

a. Highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.


b. From the Options menu, select Create partition and press Enter.
c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 80) by pressing
Enter.
d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.

10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:

a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.


b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press
Enter.

11. Exit the FDISK screen:

a. Press F3.
b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.

12. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.

13. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and
press Enter.

14. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option
1, Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen
will show drive C as the selected drive.)

15. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert
Diskette 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you
will not see any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)

16. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
you want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to "Selecting a File
System" in topic 5.2.5.)

17. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette
6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then
reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen. After you
remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen,
followed by the System Configuration screen:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 279 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

18. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and
the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your
system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.

If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the


mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device
name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct
information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the
hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it.
If you need information about which device drivers to select for your
primary or secondary display, refer to Chapter 17, "Video Procedures"
in topic 4.3.

Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need


more information about any screen you see.

If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct,


click on OK.

A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super
VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the
Installation program where you can configure your computer for the
SVGA display.

19. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow
keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list
of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is
attached:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 280 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on


the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1,
LPT2, or LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on
the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1,
COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.

If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not


install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
Setup and Installation screen appears:

20. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the
OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration
on the menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to "Modifying the
CONFIG.SYS File during Installation" in topic 5.2.6.2 for more
information.

21. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
features you want to install. You will notice that some features have
a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for
installation. The amount of hard disk space required for each feature
is shown to the right of the feature. Follow these steps:

a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By


deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 281 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

22. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do
not want to select. Then click on OK.

23. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are
installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert
diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After
inserting each diskette, click on OK or press Enter.

24. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen; click on Help if you need more information.

25. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are
part of the OS/2 installation.

26. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut
down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.

27. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your
screen.

Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.

5.1.3 Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu

After installing OS/2 (and the Boot Manager), you can go back and make changes
to the Boot Manager menu, such as how long the menu should be displayed and how
information on the menu should appear. To do so, follow these steps:

1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.

2. Open Drive.

3. Press mouse button 2 to display a pop-up menu.

4. Select Create partition.

5. At the Fixed Disk Utility screen, make any changes you want to the
setting. Select Help if you need more information.

Subtemas
5.1.3.1 Setting the Menu Display Time
5.1.3.2 Setting the Menu Mode

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 282 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.1.3.1 Setting the Menu Display Time

To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
start your system, follow these steps:

1. From the Startup Values menu, you can do one of the following:

If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and
press Enter to change the value to No.

2. If you accepted the value of Yes, indicate how long you want the menu
displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do
one of the following:

Accept the value listed next to Timeout.


Change the value as follows:
a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
displayed before the preselected operating system is
automatically started.
c. Press Enter.

5.1.3.2 Setting the Menu Mode

You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information about
your partitions, as in the following example:

To change the mode that is currently displayed, follow these steps:

1. Highlight Mode on the Startup Values menu.


2. Press Enter.

When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 283 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.1.4 Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu

After the Boot Manager is installed, you can use the SETBOOT command if you want
to restart your computer to a specified drive without going through the Boot
Manager menu. The SETBOOT command immediately restarts the system.

The parameter for SETBOOT is /IBD:drive, where drive is the letter of a


startable partition. For example, from the OS/2 command prompt, you can type:

setboot /ibd:e

to restart your system and start the operating system using drive E, without
displaying the Boot Manager menu.

See the Command Reference for more information about the SETBOOT command. (The
Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.)

5.1.5 What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation

The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most


cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to Chapter
15, "Solving Installation Problems" in topic 4.1.

Problems you might encounter include:

A blank screen after installation.


An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you
are using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)

5.1.6 Using a Response File to Install OS/2

This section describes how to use a response file to install OS/2. It is


intended primarily for people who will be setting up workstations for others to
use.

Subtemas
5.1.6.1 Understanding Response File Installation
5.1.6.2 Adding the Sample Response File to Your System
5.1.6.3 Copying the Response File to

5.1.6.1 Understanding Response File Installation

If you have installed previous versions of OS/2 or other operating systems, you
are familiar with installation procedures that require you to insert and remove a
series of diskettes and answer screen prompts. When you use a response file to
install, it is not necessary to answer any screen prompts. All the answers are in
a response file that you place on installation Diskette 1 The Installation program
reads the file from Diskette 1 instead of prompting you for the installation
information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 284 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.1.6.2 Adding the Sample Response File to Your System

A sample response file is included on the OS/2 installation diskettes. When you
install the operating system, this response file (called SAMPLE.RSP) is placed in
the OS2\INSTALL directory.

The SAMPLE.RSP file and other files needed for a response file installation are
not automatically installed on your system if you installed OS/2 using the Easy
Installation method. You must add these files to your system in order to use them.
Follow these steps:

1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.

2. Open System Setup.

3. Open Selective Install. The Software Configuration screen appears.

4. Select Optional System Utilities.

5. Select the More push button to the right of Optional System Utilities.
A window appears with a list of utilities.

6. Place a check mark next to Installation Utilities; then select


Install.

7. When prompted to do so, insert the requested installation diskettes.


Select OK when you are done.

Subtemas
5.1.6.2.1 Modifying the Sample Response File

5.1.6.2.1 Modifying the Sample Response File

After you install the SAMPLE.RSP file on your own system, you can modify the
SAMPLE.RSP file and use it to install OS/2 on another workstation. Use an editor
(such as the System Editor) to modify the sample response file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 285 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

The following is an excerpt from the sample response file:

*************************************
*AlternateAdapter
*;
* Specifies secondary adapter for two display systems.
* This should be a lower or equal resolution display since
* the highest resolution display will be primary for PM.
*
* Valid Parms
*
* 0=None (DEFAULT)
* 1=Other than following (DDINSTAL will handle)
* 2=Monochrome /Printer Adapter
* 3=Color Graphics Adapter
* 4=Enhanced Graphics Adapter
* 5=PS/2 Display Adapter
* 6=Video Graphics Adapter
* 7=8514/A Adapter
* 8=XGA Adapter
* 9=SVGA Adapter
*************************************
AlternateAdapter=0

5.1.6.3 Copying the Response File to Diskette 1

Use the following steps to make changes to the sample response file. After
making the changes, you will copy the file to a copy of Diskette 1. You must also
make some modifications to the copy of Diskette 1 to make room on it for the
response file.

1. Install OS/2 on a computer.

2. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.

3. Open Command Prompts.

4. Open OS/2 Window.

5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A.

6. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.

7. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert a


blank, formatted diskette. (This diskette will be used to make a copy
of Diskette 1)

8. Make sure the copy of Diskette 1 is in drive A. Then type del


a:\mouse.sys and press Enter.

9. Type del a:\sysinst2.exe and press Enter.

10. If you are installing from a CD, this step is not necessary; go to
step 10. If you are installing from diskettes, type del a:\bundle and
press Enter.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 286 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

11. To edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of Diskette 1 type e


a:\config.sys and press Enter.

12. Change the following statement from:


SET OS2_SHELL=SYSINST2.EXE to the following:
SET OS2_SHELL=RSPINST.EXE A:\OS2SE30.RS
P

13. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:

DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS

14. Save and close the CONFIG.SYS file. At the prompt, type the following
and press Enter after each command:

CD\OS2\INSTALL

COPY SAMPLE.RSP OS2SE30.RSP

15. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to make your changes to the
response file so you can use it for installing OS/2. Then save and
close the file.

16. At the prompt, type the following and press Enter after each command:

COPY OS2SE30.RSP A:
COPY C:\RSPINST.EXE A:\

17. Remove the copy of Diskette 1 from drive A.

18. If you have a non-Micro Channel computer, go to step 20. f you have a
Micro Channel computer and the Reference Diskette contains ABIOS.SYS
and *.BIO files, you will also need to modify the Installation
Diskette that came with OS/2. Follow these steps:

a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.


b. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
c. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette from
drive A and insert a blank, formatted diskette. Then press Enter.
This makes a copy of the Installation Diskette, which you will use
in the next step.
d. Make sure the copy you just made of the Installation Diskette is
in drive A. Type the following and press Enter after each
command:

DEL A:\*.BIO
DEL A:\ABIOS.SYS

e. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette from drive A and


insert the Reference Diskette.
f. Type the following and press Enter after each command:

COPY A:\*.BIO C:\


COPY A:\ABIOS.SYS C:\

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 287 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

g. Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A and insert the copy of
the Installation Diskette. Type the following and press Enter
after each command:

COPY C:\*.BIO A:\


COPY C:\ABIOS.SYS A:\

Note: This Installation Diskette copy is now system-specific.


You will need to create a modified Installation Diskette
for each type of system on which you are installing OS/2.

h. Use this copy of the Installation Diskette during the installation


process.

19. When prompted for Diskette 1 during the installation, insert the
modified copy you made of Diskette 1 and press Enter.

From this point on, the Installation program will prompt only for the
insertion of diskettes. No other installation actions are necessary.

20. When prompted to insert Diskette 1 again, insert the original Diskette
1 into drive A.

Response files can be used to install the same set of options on multiple
workstations. However, be sure that the workstations are set up with the
same set of options and hardware.

5.1.7 Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source

You can use a response file to direct the installation from a source other than
a diskette in drive A. For example, in a local area network (LAN), you could
direct the installation to a drive on the server. This type of installation
requires additional software (such as a LAN support product).

Be aware of the following requirements for remote installation of OS/2:

The RAM requirements vary from 6MB to 10MB or more, depending on the
installation variables.
- Redirected remote installation requires more RAM than disk
installation because the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active.
- If you are doing a redirected remote installation without CID
(configuration, installation, and distribution), you need only
about 6MB of RAM.
- If you are using CID, the RAM requirements usually range from 6MB
to 8MB.
- If you are using a process on top of CID, such as NVDM/2, 8MB to
10MB (or more) might be required. The main variable with CID is
the size of the REXX procedure and which dynamic link libraries it
pulls in. With remote installation, the LAN connection utility
programs are the main variables. The version of OS/2 that you are
installing is another variable.
During remote installation, the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active because
the disk partition containing the active swapper file cannot be
formatted during installation. The SWAPPER.DAT file can be made

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 288 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

active, but the disk partition has to be a local partition and it has
to be preformatted. To activate the SWAPPER.DAT file, you must edit
the CONFIG.SYS file. To do this, replace the existing MEMMAN=NOSWAP
statement with the following:

MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT
SWAPPATH=D:\ 2048 4096

Personal computers might require more RAM because the network drivers
might have to store more data in the RAM buffers until the processor
is able to handle the data.

For more information, refer to the following IBM publications:

OS/2 Version 2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance


(GG24-3780)

NTS/2 Redirected Installation and Configuration Guide (S96F-8488)


NTS/2 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support Configuration Guide (S96F-8489)
Automated Installation for CID-Enabled OS/2 2.x (GG24-3783)
Automated Installation for CID-Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server
V3.0 and Network Transport Services/2 (GG24-3781)

5.2 Chapter 19. Setting Up Your Hard Disk

This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Boot Manager feature


available in OS/2, as well as information about hard disk partitioning and the
FDISK utility program. This chapter will help you plan the setup of your hard disk
before you begin installing OS/2.

In addition, this chapter provides detailed descriptions of some of the


installation tasks that are outlined in Chapter 18, "Using Advanced Installation"
in topic 5.1. If you want more information about an Advanced Installation task as
you are installing, refer to the descriptions in this chapter.

Subtemas
5.2.1 What Is the Boot Manager?
5.2.2 Hard Disk Partitioning
5.2.3 The FDISK Utility Program
5.2.4 Creating a Boot Manager Setup
5.2.5 Selecting a File System
5.2.6 Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window

5.2.1 What Is the Boot Manager?

When you install multiple operating systems on your computer, you can use the
Boot Manager feature to manage the selective startup of those systems. The Boot
Manager startup menu lets you select which operating system you want to be active
each time you start your system.

The following is an example of what the Boot Manager startup menu would look
like if you installed the Boot Manager and three operating systems. This menu would

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 289 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

be displayed each time you started your computer, so that you could select which
operating system should start.

You use the FDISK utility program during the installation of OS/2 to install the
Boot Manager feature. FDISK is a program supplied with OS/2 that can be used to
manage such tasks as creating and deleting the partitions on your hard disk.
Partitions are divisions you create on your hard disk to use as separate storage
areas.

The following is a brief list of the steps you follow to set up your hard disk
for multiple operating systems.

You install the Boot Manager in its own partition (usually 1MB in size).

You then create partitions for any operating systems (including OS/2)
you are going to install.

Next, you install the other operating systems in the partitions


you created for them. (If you want OS/2 to work with DOS and
Windows, you must install DOS and Windows first. Otherwise, most
operating systems can be installed after installing OS/2.)

Finally, you install the OS/2 operating system.

5.2.2 Hard Disk Partitioning

A hard disk can be partitioned in several different ways. For example, your
hard disk can have one partition that takes up the entire hard disk. However, if
you are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk (and install
the Boot Manager feature), you must separate the hard disk into multiple
partitions.

During the Advanced installation, you will be asked how you want your partitions
set up. The default choice is to set up one partition (if you are installing on a
hard disk with no data) or to preserve the setup of an existing hard disk. If you
choose to specify your own partition, the FDISK screen is displayed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 290 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

From the FDISK screen, you specify the number and type of partitions that you
want created. Your hard disk can be separated into a maximum of four primary
partitions. You can create primary partitions, which are typically used for
operating systems.

Note: If a partition is going to contain an operating system, the


partition must be within the first 1024 cylinders.

You can also create logical drives in an area of the hard disk that is outside
the primary partitions. This area is known as the extended partition. The logical
drives within the extended partition are typically used to hold programs and data.

You can have four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one
extended partition. If you are going to install multiple operating systems on your
hard disk, you must create one primary partition to contain the programs that
manage the startup of multiple operating systems. (This partition is referred to
as the Boot Manager partition.)

After the Boot Manager partition is created, you can create up to three
additional primary partitions (to hold three operating systems), as in the
following example:

Figure 1. Hard Disk with Four Primary Partitions

An important aspect of primary partitions is the fact that, at any moment in


time, only one of the primary partitions is active. When a given primary partition
is active, any other primary partitions on the same physical disk cannot be
accessed. Therefore, the operating system in one primary partition cannot access
the data in another primary partition on the same physical disk.

Another way of subdividing your hard disk is to create logical drives within an
extended partition. Logical drives are typically used to hold programs and data.
However, you can also install OS/2 in a logical drive, as in the following example:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 291 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Figure 2. Hard Disk with Primary Partitions and Logical Drives

The extended partition takes the place of one of the primary partitions on your
hard disk. In other words, if you create logical drives within an extended
partition, your hard disk can contain only three primary partitions.

In Figure 2, notice that two logical drives have been set aside for data. That
data can be shared by all the operating systems (provided the file system formats
of the logical drives are compatible with the operating systems).

All of the logical drives exist within one partition--the extended partition.
You don't explicitly create the extended partition. The extended partition is
created the first time you create a logical (non-primary) drive.

One of the differences between a logical drive and a primary partition is that
each logical drive is assigned a unique drive letter. However, all primary
partitions on a hard disk share the same drive letter. (On the first hard disk in
your system, the primary partitions share drive C). This means that only one
primary partition on a hard disk can be accessed at one time. (Note that the Boot
Manager partition is different from other primary partitions because it is never
assigned a drive letter.)

If you want OS/2 to be able to access the data in the partition of another
operating system (for example, the DOS partition), install OS/2 in a logical
drive.

Figure 3. Drive Letter Assignment Example

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 292 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Notice the drive letter assignments in this illustration. The operating system
that is active when you start the system performs a process known as drive mapping,
in which partitions and logical drives are assigned drive letters. All the primary
partitions are mapped first and all logical drives within extended partitions are
assigned subsequent drive letters (up through Z).

Important: Only one primary partition per hard disk can be active at a time.
So, only one primary partition is actually assigned the letter C at any one time.
The other primary partitions are not mapped.

An operating system maps only those drives with a format type that it supports.
For example, DOS does not support the installable file system (IFS) format. (The
High Performance File System is an example of an IFS format.) Therefore, any
partition or logical drive that is formatted with

IFS is not mapped by DOS and is not assigned a drive letter.

In the following figure, DOS is active in a primary partition. (The other


primary partitions are not mapped.) Drive D is formatted for the File Allocation
Table (FAT) file system, which DOS recognizes. However, the next drive is
formatted with a file system that DOS does not recognize. Therefore, DOS ignores
this drive. Some versions of DOS (such as DOS Version 5.0) will recognize the last
partition on the hard disk (in this example) and assign it the letter E. In other
versions of DOS, no drives beyond the HPFS drive are recognized. Therefore, no
data in those partitions can be used by DOS.

Figure 4. Example of Drive Mapping. This example illustrates the problem


that can result when the operating system does not recognize a
file format. You can avoid such a problem by placing the
logical drive formatted for the High Performance File System at
the end of the hard disk.

Because of the problems that can result when drives are remapped, you should
avoid deleting logical drives that exist in the middle of your hard disk. For
example, if you were to delete a logical drive from the middle of your disk, the
subsequent drives would be remapped. (Drive F would become drive E, and so on.)
Problems would result if any programs refer to the former drive letter.

The following figure is an example of how drives are mapped in a system that has
two hard disks.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 293 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Figure 5. Example of Drive Mapping in a System with Two Hard Disks

The important thing to remember when you are setting up your system is that only
one primary partition can be accessible (active) on each hard disk at any system
startup. On the other hand, all the logical drives within the extended partition
are accessible (provided their file system formats are compatible with the starting
operating system). For example, suppose you had DOS 5.0 in one primary partition
and OS/2 in another primary partition. One of your logical drives is formatted for
FAT and contains a variety of DOS programs. You could start the DOS programs from
either of the primary partitions.

It is also important to understand what happens to the drive mapping if you add
a hard disk after you install OS/2. The logical drives on your existing hard disk
will be remapped if your second hard disk has a primary partition on it.

For example, suppose you have an existing hard disk that is set up as follows:

Figure 6. Drive Letter Assignment Before Addition of Second Hard Disk

Now, assume that you add a second hard disk to your system. The primary
partition of that second hard disk will be assigned D. The logical drives of your
first hard disk will be remapped. The existing logical drive D becomes E, E
becomes F, and so forth.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 294 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Figure 7. Example of Drive Mapping After Second Hard Disk is Added

Because OS/2 is now in the logical drive assigned as E, all references to the
drive letter (for example, statements in your CONFIG.SYS and INI files) will have
to change. For this reason, it is strongly recommended that you place only logical
drives on the hard disk that you are adding.

Subtemas
5.2.2.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup

5.2.2.1 Planning for a Boot Manager Setup

When you are planning your Boot Manager setup, be aware of the following:

Use primary partitions for DOS systems or versions of the OS/2


operating system prior to 2.0.

To prevent the loss of usable disk space, create all primary


partitions contiguously, at the beginning or end of the disk free
space area.

Put all installable file systems (such as the High Performance File
System) at the end of the disk configuration.

Be aware of specific operating-system restrictions on the hard disk .


For example, to run properly, DOS 3.3 must be installed in a primary
partition that is within the first 32MB of the hard disk.

If you are installing a primary partition for DOS and you intend to
load that version of DOS into a DOS session of OS/2, you will need to
change the DOS CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (You do this after
you finish installing the operating systems.) Refer to specific DOS
version in the starting topic of the Master Help Index. (The Master
Help Index is displayed on your screen after the OS/2 operating system
is installed.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 295 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

You can install both DOS and a version of the OS/2 operating system in
the same primary partition if you want to use the Dual Boot feature
within your Boot Manager setup. However, if DOS and OS/2 1.3 are in
the primary partition, you will have to copy the BOOT.COM file from
the OS/2 partition to the primary partition after you install OS/2.

If you are using the IBM DOS 5.00 Upgrade to update your DOS 3.3 or
DOS 4.0 system, you should be aware that some versions of the upgrade
will not recognize the DOS partition unless it is the only partition
on the hard disk. You might have to do the following:

1. Make sure that the DOS partition is the only primary partition on
your hard disk.
2. Install the DOS 5.00 Upgrade.
3. Add the Boot Manager partition and install OS/2.

If you have a system with a VESA SUPER I/O controller and two disk
drives, the system will not start DOS from the Boot Manager menu.
Instead, it will display a non-system disk or disk error message. For
more information on this message, check the VESA controller
documentation or contact the manufacturer.

5.2.3 The FDISK Utility Program

When you install OS/2 with the Advanced Installation method, you use the FDISK
utility program to install the Boot Manager feature and to set up the partitions on
your hard disk. During Advanced Installation, the FDISK screen appears so that you
can see how the partitions are currently set up on your system. The following
FDISK screen is an example of an FDISK screen that shows a 120MB hard disk with
three operating systems installed.

Notice the following about the example screen:

The Boot Manager partition is marked Startable. When you start your
system, the Boot Manager will be in control. You can then choose
which operating system you want to run.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 296 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

DOS 3.3 and DOS 5.0 are set up in primary partitions. However, only
DOS Version 3.3 is accessible. Notice that the drive letter (C) is
displayed on the line that contains information about the DOS 3.3
partition. The placement of the drive letter indicates which of the
primary partitions will be active at the next system startup.

OS/2 resides in a logical drive in the extended partition (drive D in


this example). Remember that OS/2 can reside in either a primary
partition or in a logical drive within the extended partition.

The logical drive labeled E is set aside for common tools or programs
that can be shared by the operating systems.

35MB of free space is available. This area can be set aside for
future use. For example, you could later add a logical drive here.

Subtemas
5.2.3.1 The Options Menu

5.2.3.1 The Options Menu

When you press the Enter key from the FDISK screen, the Options menu appears:

The following list describes each of the choices on the Options menu. Some of
the choices are available only under certain conditions. (They appear in black on
the menu.) If you try to select an unavailable choice, the system will respond
with a warning beep.

Install Boot Manager


This choice is used only once--when you create the partition for the
Boot Manager. It is unavailable thereafter.

Create partition
This choice is used to create primary partitions and logical drives
within the extended partition. You can use this choice whenever free
space is available on the hard disk.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 297 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Add to Boot Manager menu


This choice is used to add the name of a partition or logical drive to
the Boot Manager startup menu. You should use this choice for any
operating system that you want to be able to select when you start the
system. When you select this choice, the New Name window is
displayed. You use the New Name window to assign a meaningful name to
the partition or logical drive.

Change partition name


This choice is used to change the name that you have previously
assigned to a partition or logical drive.

Assign C: partition
This choice is used to specify which primary partition you want to be
active (when more than one primary partition is installed on your
system). The placement of the drive letter (C) tells you which
primary partition will be visible (or accessible) after you restart
the system.

Set startup values


This choice is used to specify the actions of the Boot Manager startup
menu. For example, with Set startup values, you can specify how long
you want the Boot Manager menu to be displayed before the default
operating system is started. You can also specify which operating
system you want as the default.

Remove from Boot Manager menu


This choice is used to delete a name from the Boot Manager startup
menu. When you delete the name, you can no longer select the
operating system associated with that name from the Boot Manager
startup menu.

Delete partition
This choice is used to delete information about a primary partition or
logical drive. After you exit from FDISK, all the data in the
partition or logical drive is deleted. (If you want to save any of
the data in a partition, be sure to back up the data be fore deleting
the partition.)

Set installable
This choice is used to mark a partition or logical drive as the target
for installation. For example, during the installation of OS/2, you
set one primary partition (or logical drive) as installable. (This
partition or drive is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)

After you install the operating system, the status of this partition
will change from Installable to Bootable.

If you use FDISK after the OS/2 installation (in preparation for
installing other operating systems), you can mark only primary
partitions on the first hard disk as installable.

Any partition that is set installable must reside within the first
1024 cylinders of the hard disk. In addition, if you have more than
two hard disk drives, be aware that some adapter manufacturers
support the booting of partitions on the first two hard disk drives
only.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 298 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Also note that some SCSI drives that use removable media cannot be
partitioned.

Make startable
This choice is used to determine which primary partition is activated
when you start your system. When you install the Boot Manager, it is
automatically marked as Startable. This means that the Boot Manager
is in control when you start your system. Only one primary partition
on the first hard disk can be made startable. If you set any other
primary partition startable, the Boot Manager startup menu will not
appear when you start the system.

5.2.4 Creating a Boot Manager Setup

The following sections describe in detail how to delete and create partitions,
how and why to make selections from the Options menu, and how to specify options
for how the Boot Manager will start up. Chapter 18, "Using Advanced Installation"
in topic 5.1 provides quick procedures you can follow to perform these actions.
You can refer to the sections here if you need more detailed information.

Subtemas
5.2.4.1 Deleting Existing Partitions
5.2.4.2 Creating the Boot Manager Partition
5.2.4.3 Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems
5.2.4.4 Creating the Partition for OS/2
5.2.4.5 Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition
5.2.4.6 Specifying the Default Operating System
5.2.4.7 Setting the Menu Display Time

5.2.4.1 Deleting Existing Partitions

To set up your system for installation, you must make sure there is enough room
on your hard disk to accommodate the desired partitions. If you use the Advanced
Installation method to install OS/2, it might be necessary for you to delete some
or all of the existing partitions on your hard disk.

For example, if your hard disk currently has only one partition that takes up
the entire hard disk and you want to put OS/2 in its own partition, you must delete
the existing partition. However, if your hard disk has ample free space for OS/2,
you can keep one or more existing partitions and add to them.

Important: All information you want to save must be backed up. Changing the
size of a partition deletes all information in that partition, and the entire
operating system must be reinstalled when the new partition is created.

To delete an existing partition, you would follow these steps:

1. On the FDISK screen, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the
partition you want to delete.

2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 299 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Select Delete partition and press Enter. The information about that
partition is deleted, and the words Free Space appear in the space
formerly occupied by the partition information.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other partitions you want to delete.

After deleting the partitions on your hard disk, you must create the Boot
Manager partition.

5.2.4.2 Creating the Boot Manager Partition

During the Advanced Installation method, you must create a Boot Manager
partition. To create this partition, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.

2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

3. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.

4. Specify whether the Boot Manager partition should be at the beginning


or at the end of the available free space on the hard disk.

Note: The only restriction on the placement of the Boot Manager


partition is that it be within the first 1024 cylinders of the first
hard disk. Typically, the first 1024 cylinders is equal to 1GB
(gigabyte), or 1024MB.

After creating the Boot Manager partition, you can create any other
partitions you need to install OS/2 and the other operating systems you
want to use on your computer.

5.2.4.3 Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems

After you create the partition for the Boot Manager, you create primary
partitions for any DOS or Windows versions or previous versions of OS/2 that you
are going to install. At this time, you can also create any logical drives for
data or programs or to install OS/2.

Consider the following before you begin creating the partitions:

If you prefer, and if you have sufficient free space on the hard disk,
you can leave existing partitions intact until you have completely
transferred data processing operations to OS/2.

You can install OS/2 in its own partition and place your programs and
data in a separate logical drive. This arrangement makes it easier to
back up those programs and data.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 300 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If multiple types of file systems are needed, determine if you want


them in a separate partition or placed on a logical drive.

When determining how much space to allocate for the OS/2 partition,
consider some of the tools and applications you will be installing and
whether you want to install them in the OS/2 partition or on another
logical drive. For example, if you want to install the OS/2 Toolkit,
you can install it on a separate logical drive instead of the default
partition used for OS/2.

Allow enough room in your OS/2 partition for the growth of a swap
file. A swap file contains segments of a program
or data temporarily moved out of main storage. The swap file
(SWAPPER.DAT) requires at least 2MB of hard disk space but might
require much more. You can include this space in your OS/2 partition,
or you can set up a logical drive for the swap file.

Some operating systems, such as AIX*, require that their own disk
utility program create the installation partition. The OS/2 FDISK
utility program cannot create the partition for these operating
systems. If you are going to install AIX, make sure you leave
sufficient free space for it on the hard disk.

If you have applications that require other operating systems, such as


AIX, check the amount of storage space recommended by the supplier.

To create partitions and logical drives for your other operating systems
and for your programs and data, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.

2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

3. Select Create partition and press Enter.

4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition you are creating. Use the
following table to help you determine a minimum size for the
partition. For specific information about partition sizes, refer to
the documentat ion that came with the product you will be installing.

rules=horiz hdframe=rules hp='2 0 0 0' split=yes expand.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 301 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Table 2. Planning Table for Partition Sizes ¦
+------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ Contents ¦ Size ¦ Hard Disk Considerations ¦
+----------+----------- -+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ DOS 3.3 ¦ 2MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition within the first 32MB ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ on the first hard disk. ¦
+----------+-------- ----+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ DOS 4.0 ¦ 3MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition on the first hard disk. ¦
+----------+----------- -+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ DOS 5.0 ¦ 4MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition on the first hard disk. ¦
+----------+-------- ----+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ DOS 6.x ¦ 8MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition on the first hard disk. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ OS/2 1.x ¦ 20MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition on the first hard disk. ¦
¦ SE ¦ ¦ Installs in less than 20MB, but segment swapping is ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ inhibited. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ OS/2 1.x ¦ 30MB ¦ Must be in a primary partition on the first hard disk. ¦
¦ EE ¦ ¦ Installs in less than 30MB with reduced function. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ OS/2 2.0 ¦ 15-33MB ¦ Can be in a primary partition or logical drive. If ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ you choose a minimum size for the partition, you might ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ want to place the swap file on another partition. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ OS/2 2.1 ¦ 20-40MB (Plus ¦ OS/2 2.1 can be in a primary partition or logical ¦
¦ ¦ 10MB for swap ¦ drive. If you choose a minimum size for the ¦
¦ ¦ file and 5MB ¦ partition, you might want to place the swap file on ¦
¦ ¦ for ¦ another partition. ¦
¦ ¦ multimedia) ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ If you want to install all the features and you want ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the swap file in the same partition, consider making ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the OS/2 partition larger. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ OS/2 ¦ 25-45MB (Plus ¦ OS/2 can be in a primary partition or logical drive. ¦
¦ Version ¦ 10MB for swap ¦ If you choose a minimum size for the partition, you ¦
¦ 3 ¦ file and 10MB ¦ might want to place the swap file on another ¦
¦ ¦ for ¦ partition. ¦
¦ ¦ multimedia) ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ If you want to install all the features and you want ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the swap file in the same partition, consider making ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the OS/2 partition larger. ¦
+----------+---------------+--------------------------------------------------------¦
¦ AIX ¦ ¦ Partition size determined and built by AIX Disk ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ utility program. Partition is created at the end of ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the hard disk. ¦
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

Place system tools or common applications in a logical drive within


the extended partition so that the data can be shared among the
operating systems.

5. Specify whether this is a primary partition or a logical drive within


the extended partition. Consider the following:

All versions of DOS must reside in primary partitions on the first


hard disk. Versions of OS/2 before 2.0 must also reside in
primary partitions. (Remember that primary partitions cannot
share data.)

Logical drives within an extended partition are shareable. This


means that any data installed in the logical drive can be used by
an operating system running from any other active logical drive on
the system, if the file system formats are compatible.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 302 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to


create. Select either Create at Start of Free Space or Create at End
of Free Space. Note that the logical drives cannot be intermixed with
primary partitions.

Note: This option is not available when the amount of free space
equals the size of the request.

When you have set up the partition, you use the Options menu choices to

specify information about the partition.

Subtemas
5.2.4.3.1 Specifying Options for the New Partition

5.2.4.3.1 Specifying Options for the New Partition

To specify options for the partition you just created, use the following
procedure. Refer to "The Options Menu" in topic 5.2.3.1 for detailed explanations
of the choices on the Options menu.

1. From the FDISK screen, Press Enter to display the Options menu.

2. Select Add to Boot Manager menu if you want this partition displayed
on the Boot Manager startup menu. If you do not select this choice
for the partition, you cannot select the operating system that exists
in this partition from the menu at startup time.

3. If you selected Add to Boot Manager menu, you see the window in which
you are asked to type a name for the partition. Type the name, and
then press Enter.

If you have additional partitions to set up, follow the instructions outlined in
"Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems" in topic 5.2.4.3. Otherwise,
continue to "Creating the Partition for OS/2."

5.2.4.4 Creating the Partition for OS/2

After you have created the partitions for the Boot Manager and for each of the
other operating systems you plan to install, create the partition or logical drive
in which you will install OS/2, OS/2 can be installed in either a primary partition
or a logical drive within the extended partition.

Remember that some operating systems, such as AIX, use their own disk utility
program to set up partitions. The partitions for such operating systems are
created when you actually install the operating systems. You must leave sufficient
space on the hard disk to accommodate these operating systems.

To create the partition or logical drive for OS/2, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted. If it is not,


press the Up Arrow ( ) or Down Arrow ( ) key to highlight it.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 303 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

3. Select Create partition and press Enter.

4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition or logical drive you are
creating.

Note that the size of the swap file is based on the size of installed
memory. The less memory you have, the larger the swap file. Thus, if
your computer has a small amount of memory, you will need a larger
partition. (You can also place the swap file on another partition.
To do this, select Software configuration from the OS/2 Setup and
Installation window that appears during the Installation program. ) If
you want to install all features and you want the swap file on the
same partition, consider making the OS/2 partition large enough to
accommodate all of those files.

5. Specify whether this partition is a primary partition or a logical


drive within the extended partition.

If you have already marked three partitions as primary partitions, you


might want to select Extended Logical Drive for OS/2. Your hard disk
can be made up of a maximum of four primary partitions or three
primary partitions and multiple logical drives within one extended
partition. So, if you create a primary partition for OS/2 when three
primary partitions already exist, you cannot create any logical
drives.

6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to


create.

Note: This option is not available when the amount of free space
equals the size of the request.

5.2.4.5 Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition

During the Installation program, you can use the Options menu choices to specify
information about the OS/2 partition or logical drive:

1. From the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.

2. Highlight Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.

3. Type the name you want to assign to this partition or logical drive,
and press Enter.

4. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

5. Highlight Set installable and press Enter.

You must select Set installable for this partition or logical drive.
By selecting Set installable, you indicate which partition or logical
drive should be used for OS/2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 304 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.2.4.6 Specifying the Default Operating System

After you create partitions for all of your operating systems, including OS/2,
you may specify which operating system should be started (by default) every time
you start your computer. Follow these steps:

1. Highlight the line on the FDISK screen that contains the information
for the operating system you want preselected at startup time. For
example, if you want OS/2 to be the preselected choice on the Boot
Manager startup menu, highlight the OS/2 Version 3 line.

2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.

3. Select Set startup values and press Enter.

4. With Default highlighted, press Enter. Notice that the name of the
partition you chose is listed next to Default.

5. Press F3.

If you want to set the timer for how long the Boot Manager menu should
be displayed and how information on the menu should appear, you can do
so during the installation of OS/2 or you can do so after
installation. To set the timer and display mode now, continue with
the sections that follow, "Setting the Menu Display Time" and "Setting
the Menu Mode." Otherwise, go to step 6.

6. Press F3

5.2.4.7 Setting the Menu Display Time

To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
start your system, follow these steps:

1. From the Set startup values menu, you can do one of the following:

If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.

If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you


explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and
press Enter to change the value to No.

2. If you selected Yes for Timer, indicate how long you want the menu
displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do

one of the following:

Accept the value listed next to Timeout.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 305 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Change the value as follows:

a. Select Timeout and press Enter.


b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
displayed before the preselected operating system is
automatically started.
c. Press Enter.

Subtemas
5.2.4.7.1 Setting the Menu Mode

5.2.4.7.1 Setting the Menu Mode

You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information about
your partitions.

To change the mode that is currently displayed:

1. Highlight Mode on the Set startup values menu.

2. Press Enter.

When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3. Then
continue with the installation of OS/2.

5.2.5 Selecting a File System

If you choose to format an existing partition during the Installation program,


you will be asked to select a file system. A file system is the part of the
operating system that provides access to files and programs on a disk. You can
select either the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system or the High Performance
File System (HPFS).

Select the FAT file system if you intend to share data in the
partition with a version of DOS that is running independently of OS/2.
(For example, if you occasionally need to start DOS from a diskette
and access the data in the OS/2 partition, the partition would have to
be formatted for the FAT file system.) DOS uses the FAT file system,
and does not recognize files created by HPFS. Although DOS does not
recognize HPFS, this is not the case for DOS sessions that are part of
OS/2. If you plan to run you r DOS programs in the DOS
sessions that are part of OS/2, you can format for either file system.
The only restriction for DOS programs running in these DOS sessions is
that they will not recognize the longer file names in the HPFS
partition.

HPFS has features that make it a better choice for larger hard disk
partitions. It puts the directory at the seek center of the partition
and is designed to allocate contiguous space for files. This feature
helps prevent disk fragmentation. HPFS also handles write errors by
writing to alternate space reserved for that purpose.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 306 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

HPFS also supports file names up to 254 characters in length.

If you format an OS/2 partition for the FAT file system and the system
memory is less than or equal to 6MB, support for HPFS is not automatically
installed. You can add this support later (for example, if you want to

format another partition for HPFS) using the Selective Install utility
program (located in the System Setup folder).

If you are trying to decide whether to use HPFS, consider that it takes at
least 200KB of system memory. If your computer has 6MB or less of memory,
your system performance will be adversely affected.

5.2.6 Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window

During Advanced Installation, the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears so
you can select the features of the operating system that you want to install. You
can also use the menu bar at the top of the window to indicate an alternate drive
for your swap file, and to modify your CONFIG.SYS file.

Subtemas
5.2.6.1 Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive
5.2.6.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation

5.2.6.1 Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive

If you use the Advanced Installation method, you can install the swap file and
WIN-OS/2 support in another partition or logical drive to save hard disk space in
your OS/2 partition. When you are setting up your partitions with the FDISK
utility program, you can create a logical drive just for this purpose.

When the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during the installation
process, follow these steps:

1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar of the OS/2 Setup and
Installation window.

2. Select Change OS/2 parameters.

3. Make sure the cursor is in the SWAPPATH field by selecting the field
with the mouse or the Tab key. Replace the default location of the
swap file with the desired location. For example, to place the swap
file in the root directory of logical drive D, type
d:\.

4. Select OK or press Enter.

5. Select the More push button next to WIN-OS/2 Support.

6. Select the Down Arrow in the Destination drive field to change the
drive to the desired logical drive (drive D in this example).

7. Select OK.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 307 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.2.6.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation

During Advanced Installation, you can customize your system by modifying the
CONFIG.SYS file. To do so, follow these steps when the OS/2 Setup and Installation
window appears during installation:

1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar at the top of the
window.

2. Select either Change OS/2 parameters or Change DOS parameters.

For example, if you want to change the MINFREE setting for the swap
file, select Change OS/2 parameters. Then specify the size on the
window that is displayed. The MINFREE setting is used to specify when
the system should warn you about the growth of the swap file.

3. Select OK when you have finished making all the selections in the
window. The OS/2 Setup and Installation window will reappear.

4. Make your selections in the OS/2 Setup and Installation window to


continue with the installation of OS/2.

5.3 Chapter 20. Special Hardware Considerations

This chapter provides information to help you if you are installing OS/2 Version
3 on or using the following hardware:

Gateway 2000
A system with Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
ATI Graphics Ultra Pro display adapter
An EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card
IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
IBM PS/2 Model 76
IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
A system with an Aox upgrade
Quantum II Hard Card
Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or
Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination
IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
Sound Blaster
Pro AudioSpectrum 16

Subtemas
5.3.1 Using Gateway 2000 Computers
5.3.2 Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
5.3.3 Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter
5.3.4 Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card
5.3.5 Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
5.3.6 Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
5.3.7 Using a System with an Aox Upgrade
5.3.8 Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card
5.3.9 Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR,
or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive
5.3.10 Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 308 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.11 Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter


5.3.12 Using a Sound Blaster Adapter
5.3.13 Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16

5.3.1 Using Gateway 2000 Computers

If you have an early version of a Gateway 2000 computer that does not work
properly, your BIOS might be an early version. The company suggests that you
replace the system board. Contact Gateway 2000, Inc. for information about
upgrading your computer.

Subtemas
5.3.1.1 486 Math Coprocessors
5.3.1.2 TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation
5.3.1.3 Gateway Nomad Notebook

5.3.1.1 486 Math Coprocessors

If you have a Gateway 2000 computer with a 486 processor and a revision E system
board, you could experience a divide underflow error. The error can occur when you
are running software that takes advantage of the 486 math coprocessor. If this
error occurs, you can upgrade to a revision F system board by contacting Gateway.

5.3.1.2 TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation

Gateway computers that cause a TRAP0002 error are caused by one of the
following:

A bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board


Bad memory

When the problem is a bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board, press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to display a menu from which you can disable the external caching.
Refer to your Gateway documentation for more information. Contact Gateway when this
problem is encountered.

When the problem is bad memory, try moving each memory module to a different
memory controller. If the problem is not corrected, determine which memory module
is bad and replace it.

5.3.1.3 Gateway Nomad Notebook

If you receive a message that OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your
diskette drive, your computer needs a BIOS upgrade.

If a TRAP error appears when the system is started, or during installation,


disable caching on the system board. If the problem persists, contact Gateway
2000, Inc.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 309 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.2 Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS

This section provides information about computers that require a BIOS upgrade to
support OS/2 Version 3.

Subtemas
5.3.2.1 Phoenix BIOS
5.3.2.2 AMI BIOS
5.3.2.3 Micronics BIOS

5.3.2.1 Phoenix BIOS

For questions about products that use Phoenix BIOS, call the computer
manufacturer directly. If there are additional questions, contact Phoenix.

5.3.2.2 AMI BIOS

The later BIOS versions from American Megatrends, Inc. (AMI) provide a screen ID
code, which is visible at the lower-left corner of the screen during the initial
random access memory (RAM) count. The code can be made to reappear if you restart
the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or it can be frozen on screen by holding down
the Ins key during system startup. This creates a keyboard error, which will stop
the screen. On a system that uses AMI BIOS or AMI BIOS Plus, the message will be
in the form:

aaaa-bbbb-mmddyy-Kc

On a system than uses AMI HI-Flex BIOS, the message will be in the form:

ee-ffff-bbbbbb-gggggggg-mmddyy-hhhhhhhh-c

If the screen ID code is in a form other than those above, one of the following
is true:

The BIOS is a very early version. In this case, contact Washburn &
Co.

The BIOS was produced by a company with source-code license. In this


case, the system board manufacturer will be able to provide further
information or updates. All Everex** 368 BIOS versions are in this
category.

Subtemas
5.3.2.2.1 General Rules
5.3.2.2.2 BIOS Updates

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 310 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.2.2.1 General Rules

If an IDE-type hard drive is installed, the date mmddyy should be


040990 or later for use with any operating system, including DOS.
Special timing requirements of IDE drives were accommodated on the
date noted.

If you use any other drive type, such as MFM, RLL, ESDI, or SCSI, the
OS/2 operating system might install and operate correctly if mmddyy is
092588 or later, provided that the Keyboard Controller revision level
is suitable for the OS/2 version being used. Also, in the case of
SCSI hard drives, a driver compatible with the version of OS/2
operating system being installed might be provided by the controller
manufacturer, and if so, a special installation procedure might apply.

Keyboard Controller revision level F (represented by "c" in the


previous screen ID code examples) is expected to produce proper
installation and operation of OS/2 versions 1.3x and 2.x.

OS/2 1.0 or 1.1: 8, B, D, or F


OS/2 1.2x: D or F
OS/2 1.3x or 2.x: F

If the Keyboard Controller revision level shows as 0 or M, the


Keyboard Controller chip is not an AMI chip, even if an AMI license
sticker was applied to it. If it is not an AMI chip, its performance
under the OS/2 operating system is unknown. It might or might not
work correctly. For some revision levels (usually "M"), an AMI chip
can successfully replace a non-AMI chip, but this is not a general
rule. Sometimes the nonstandard Keyboard Controller (usually "0") was
used to combine system board functions not normally part of the
controller. Substituting a standard chip causes the board to not
function at all. In this case, there is no solution other than to
replace the board. A revision level of 9 accompanied by a nonstandard
ID code also indicates a nonstandard controller (and BIOS). The
system board manufacturer should be contacted for further information.

5.3.2.2.2 BIOS Updates

If a BIOS prior to the previously noted dates requires replacement, note the
following:

AMI BIOS and BIOS Plus series BIOS (16 character ID code) for cached
system boards are customized for individual system board designs. You
can obtain updates only from the system board manufacturer, unless you
have one of the following:

1. A BIOS with "aaaa" = E307. This BIOS can be replaced with a


standard type.

2. A BIOS for Northgate** or Motherboard Factory** system boards,


except the Northgate Slimline**. This BIOS can be replaced by a
standard type. The Slimline BIOS has the VGA BIOS in the same
chips. They can be updated to the 040990 release, provided they
are identified as Slimline, and the speed is specified (20, 25, or

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 311 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

33 MHz). The speed must be specified because different VGA code


is required for the various speeds.

3. A BIOS with "aaaa" = DAMI, DAMX, or EDAMI (usually for cached


boards d esigned or built by AMI). This BIOS can be updated.
Mylex or Leading Technology** boards with these prefixes can only
be updated by the board manufacturer.

The complete screen ID code is necessary to determine whether a BIOS


update for other system boards can be provided. In the case of the
HI-Flex BIOS, the complete second and third lines of the ID code are
also necessary. If not immediately visible on the screen, they can be
viewed by pressing the Ins key during system startup.

If you have a hard disk drive from another manufacturer, it must be


dated 092588 or later. If your hard disk drive is an earlier version,
contact the dealer at your place of purchase, or the hard disk
manufacturer, for information about upgrading the drive.

5.3.2.3 Micronics BIOS

If you have revision E of a Micronics system board, you might receive a divide
underflow message, or your computer might not work properly. This board contains
an early version of BIOS. If you purchased the board from Gateway, contact Gateway
2000, Inc. request an upgrade to revision F.

5.3.3 Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter

If you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must run the INSTALL.EXE utility
program provided by ATI before you install OS/2 Version 3. Note that this is a DOS
program and you must, therefore, start DOS before you run the program.

Note: If you have a Gateway 2000 system, refer also to "Black Lines on an
OS/2 Logo Screen" in Chapter 15, "Solving Installation Problems" in
topic 4.1

1. Start DOS on your computer.

2. Insert the ATI diskette into drive A.

3. Type a:install.exe and press Enter. The Set Power-Up Configuration


menu appears.

4. Select Custom for Monitor Type.

5. Make sure that VGA Memory Sizeis set to Shared for 1 MB video memory
boards.

6. Make sure that the refresh rate for 640 x 480 resolution is set to IBM
Default or 60 Hz.

Note: Later during the installation of OS/2 Version 3, be sure to


select 8514 as the primary display type.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 312 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.4 Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card

If you have an EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card, you must run
the Setup Configuration program provided on the Adaptec Card Setup Diskette before
installing OS/2 Version 3. To set up the Adaptec card in the configuration using
the Setup Diskette, do the following:

1. Set the Enhanced mode setting to OFF.

2. Set the Standard mode setting to ON.

3. Set the Hex Address setting to C800.

4. Set the I/O Port setting to 230H.

5. Set the DMA channel setting to 5.

6. Set the Parity Check setting to OFF.

7. Set the Synchronous Negotiation setting to ON. If CD-ROM is not


recognized, set this setting to OFF.

8. Set the Enabled Disconnect setting to YES.

9. Set the IRQ setting to 11 (default is 2).

5.3.5 Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette

As part of the setup of your computer, you might have been advised to create a
Reference Diskette (sometimes called a "Hardware System Program Diskette"). The
Reference Diskette contains BIOS information (code about how your diskette drives,
hard drives, and keyboard interact). The OS/2 Version 3 Installation program may
prompt you to insert this diskette.

If you have not created the Reference Diskette, do so before you begin the
installation of OS/2 Version 3. Refer to your PS/2 documentation for instructions
on creating this diskette.

5.3.6 Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station

If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or an IBM ThinkPad
700, 700C, 720, or 720C attached to a 3550 Docking Station, you need to replace the
ABIOS files on the OS/2 Installation Diskette with files from the Reference
Diskette. Do the following:

1. If you are using a ThinkPad, detach it from the Docking Station.

2. Create a Reference Diskette by following the documentation that came


with your computer.

3. Make a copy of the Installation Diskette. Type diskcopy a: a: and


press Enter. Remove and insert diskettes when prompted to do so.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 313 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

4. Remove the copy from drive A and insert the original Installation
Diskette.

5. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press


Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.

6. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette,


insert Diskette 1, and press Enter.

7. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display the command


prompt.

8. Insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into drive A.

9. Type a:\del *.bio and press Enter.

10. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette and insert the Reference
Diskette you created into drive A.

11. If your computer has more than one diskette drive, insert the copy of
the Installation Diskette into drive B. In the next two steps, you
will be prompted to insert diskettes into both drive A and drive B.

If you computer has only one diskette drive, when you are asked to

insert a diskette into drive A, insert the Reference Diskette into


your diskette drive. When you are asked to insert a diskette into
drive B, insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into your
diskette drive.

12. Type copy a:\*.bio b:\ and press Enter.

13. Type copy a:\abios.sys b:\ and press Enter.

14. Turn off your computer. If you are using a ThinkPad, return it to the
Docking Station.

5.3.7 Using a System with an Aox Upgrade

If you have a system with a 286 processor that has been upgraded to a 386SX with
an Aox upgrade and you want to install OS/2 Version 3, you must start the system
with DOS and run the AOX232.EXE. Contact the Aox Technical Support Group to
request a copy of AOX232.EXE before continuing with the installation of OS/2.

5.3.8 Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card

If you have a Quantum hard card, you must make a modification to the
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. To modify the BASEDEV statement,
do the following:

1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.

2. Change the BASEDEV statement to:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 314 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /A:1 /IRQ:11

(The settings shown are the defaults for the Quantum hard card.)

3. Save the CONFIG.SYS file.

4. Install OS/2 Version 3.

5.3.9 Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR,
or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive

For the Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
non-SCSI drives to be recognized by OS/2 Version 3, the base port address specified
on the CD-ROM BASEDEV statement in the CONFIG.SYS file must match the base I/O port
address specified on the CD-ROM host adapter card.

Note: If you are installing OS/2 from a CD-ROM, you might first need to
modify the BASEDEV statement for your CD-ROM device driver in the
CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette labeled Diskette 1. See also the
section called "Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM
Combination."

Subtemas
5.3.9.1 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver
5.3.9.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver
5.3.9.3 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver
5.3.9.4 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers
5.3.9.5 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver

5.3.9.1 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver

The Sony SONY31A.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305


Sony CDU-33A, CDU-7405

This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD line in
the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default, software
polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV
statement is as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD [/A:d][/AT:dd][/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]

where:

[/A:d] Identifies a specific adapter, d. The adapter is specified as a


single-digit value which is zero based (for example, the first
adapter is specified as /A:0).

[/AT:dd] Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. Supported
values are:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 315 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

00 = Sony CDB-334 (default)


05 = Echo** Speech (with ESC614 chip)
Orchid** SoundWave 32
Orchid GameWave 32
Cardinal DSP16
08 = MediaVision** Pro AudioSpectrum 16

[/P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The
port address is specified as a four-digit hex value. Leading
zeros should be specified. The value must be the same number as
the port address selected by the jumper on the host interface
card.

If this parameter is not specified, the default port address for


the host adapter is used. For the Sony CDB-334 host interface
card, the default is 0340. For the Media Vision Pro
AudioSpectrum 16 card, the default is 1F88.

[/I:nn] Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must
match the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface
card. If this parameter is not specified, the device driver
will use software polling transfer.

Note: Some Sony CDB-334 host adapter cards do not include the
plastic jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the
IRQ jumper block. You must obtain and install the
plastic jumper switch to enable the IRQ channel.

[/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver


revision level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.

The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the
most common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch
settings for each CD-ROM drive.

Example 1: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony


CDB-334 host adapter.

The Sony CDB-334 host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 320h,
330h, 340h, or 360h. If the host adapter is set to its default port
address of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement does not need to be modified and
should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD

If the CDB-334 host adapter is set to any port address other than the
default of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement must be modified. For example,
if the Sony CDB-334 host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360,
the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360

If, in the above situation, the driver is operating in interrupt mode at


IRQ channel 5, the line in your CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 316 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360 /I:5

Example 2: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a


MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 host adapter.

In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT:08

Note: The default port address for the CDU-31A when attached to the
PAS-16 card is 1F88. The Sony Desktop Library model numbers
CDU-31A-LL/L and CDU-7305 include the PAS-16 adapter.

Example 3: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a


Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster 16
MultiCD host adapter.

The port address specified on the BASEDEV statement in CONFIG.SYS should


be 10h above the base I/O port address specified on these adapter cards.
For example, if the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O port address
of 220h, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0230

Example 4: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to the


Echo Speech, Orchid SoundWave 32, Orchid GameWave 32, or Cardinal DSP16
host adapter.

In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:

BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT:05

5.3.9.2 Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver

The Sony SONY535.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Sony 531 series (CDU-531, 6201, 6205)


Sony 535 series (CDU-535, 6205, 7205)

This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD line in
the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default, software
polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV
statement is as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD [P:nnn][/I:nn][/U:d,d...][/V]

where:

[/P:nnn]. Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The
value must be the same number as the port address specified by
the jumper on the host interface card.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 317 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

[/I:nn]. Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must
match the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface
card. If this parameter is not specified, the device driver
will use software polling transfer.

Note: Some Sony host adapter cards do not include the plastic

jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper


block. You must obtain and install the plastic jumper
switch to enable the IRQ channel.

[/U:d,d...]. Specifies the drive unit number which the Sony CD-ROM drive
is set to. The value of d must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. If
more than one Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, this
parameter must be specified. If only one CD-ROM drive is
attached to the adapter, and this parameter is not specified,
then the default unit ID used by the driver is 0.

[/V]. Instructs the device driver to display the device driver


revision level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.

The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for each
CD-ROM drive.

Example 1: A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host


adapter.

If the Sony host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360

Example 2: A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host


adapter.

If the Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the Sony host adapter at a base
I/O port address of 360h, and the driver is operating in interrupt mode at
IRQ channel 5, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360 /I:5

Example 3: Multiple Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained to a Sony


CDB-240 series host adapter.

If two Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained from the Sony host adapter
with the first drive set to drive unit 0 and the second set to drive unit
1, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:340 /U:0,1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 318 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

5.3.9.3 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver

The Panasonic device driver (SBCD2.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Panasonic CR-521, 522, 523, 562, 563


Creative Labs OmniCD
IBM ISA CD-ROM drive

This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Panasonic CD-ROM
device driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD
line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the
BASEDEV statement is as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD [/P:nnn][/T:n][/NS][/V]

where:

[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The
value must be the same number as the port address selected by
the jumper on the host interface card.

[./T:n] Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. The
supported value is:

Creative Labs CD-ROM interface card (not Sound Blaster)

[./NS] Disables drive select scan. Driver will not scan for more than
one CD-ROM drive.

[./V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver


revision level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.

The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for each
CD-ROM drive.

Example 1: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is


attached to a standard Panasonic or IBM ISA CD-ROM host adapter.

The standard Panasonic or IBM ISA host adapter supports base I/O port addresses
of 300h, 310h, 320h, or 330h. For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O
port address of 300, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300

Example 2: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is


attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster
16 MultiCD.

If the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O address of 220h, the line in
CONFIG.SYS should appears as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:220

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 319 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Example 3: A Creative Labs OmniCD is attached to a standard Creative Labs CD-


ROM host adapter (not Sound Blaster).

The standard Creative Labs host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 250h
or 260h. For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 250, the
line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:250 /T:2

Example 4: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is


attached to a MediaVision Jazz 16 sound card.

If the MediaVision card is set for a base I/O port address of 300h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300 /NS

Example 5: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is


attached to a Reveal audio card.

If the Reveal audio card is set to a base I/O port address of 630h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:630

5.3.9.4 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers

The Philips device driver (LMS205.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Philips CM205, CM225

The Philips device driver (LMS206.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Philips CM205MS,CM225MS (multisession photo CD version of CM205)

Philips CM206, CM226

Note: If you have installed OS/2 and find that your CD-ROM drive does not
function, you must copy the LMS206.ADD file from Diskette 1 to the
\OS2 directory and add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:

BASEDEV=LMS206.ADD

This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Philips CD-ROM
device drivers. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD
(or LMS206.ADD) line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from
the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax
for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:

BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD [/P:nnn][/U:x][/M:y][/V]

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 320 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

where:

[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The
value must be the same number as the port address selected by
the jumper on the host interface card.

[/U:x] Identifies a specific unit, x. Valid values for x are 0, 1, 2,


and 3. The default is zero. LMS205 and LMS206 locate all CM250
and CM260 host adapters and assign unit numbers based on the
order in which each was found. This parameter tells LMS205 and
LMS206 which BASEDEV line it is currently processing.

[/M:y] Indicates the number of 2500-byte CD frame buffers that should


be allocated by the LMS205.ADD or LMS2056.ADD driver. Valid
values for y are 8,...,26. The default is 16. Any value below
the minimum (8) will be assigned the minimum (8).

[/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver


revision level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.

5.3.9.5 Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver

The Mitsumi device driver (MITFX001.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

Mitsumi CRMC-FX001D
Mitsumi CRMC-FX001
Mitsumi CRMC-LU005S
Mitsumi CRMC-LU002S
BSR 6800
Tandy CDR-1000

This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Mitsumi CD-ROM
device driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD
line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the
BASEDEV statement is as follows:

BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD [/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]

where:

[/P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. This
must be the same number as specified by the DIP switch on the
interface card.

[/I:nn] Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must
match the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface
card. If this parameter is not specified, the device driver
will use software polling transfer.

[/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver


revision level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 321 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for each
CD-ROM drive.

Example 1: A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Mitsumi host adapter.

The Mitsumi host adapter supports I/O port address ranges from 300h to 3FCh. If
the Mitsumi host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of either 300h or 340h,
the statement in CONFIG.SYS does not need to be modified and should appear as
follows:

BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD

If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to an address other than those specified
above, the BASEDEV statement needs to be modified. For example, if the Mitsumi
host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 320, the line in the CONFIG.SYS
file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320

Example 2:A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster 16
MultiCD.

If the Mitsumi CD-ROM port on the Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD is set to an I/O port
address of 340, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:340

Note: To enable interrupt transfer mode, which improves performance,


the /I parameter must be specified. For example, to enable
interrupt transfer mode for IRQ channel 10 at I/O port address of
320h, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:

BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320 /I:10

5.3.10 Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination

If you find that your drive or combination of CD-ROM drive and SCSI adapter is
not supported by OS/2 Version 3, you can contact the manufacturer and obtain an
OS/2 Adapter Device Driver (.ADD) file. Then, after you receive the .ADD file, use
your current operating system and follow this procedure before you install OS/2:

1. Make a copy of Diskette 1. At a command prompt, type diskcopy a: a:


and press Enter.

2. Copy the .ADD file to the root directory on the copy of Diskette 1.
(The root directory is the first directory on the diskette.) If there
is not enough room, delete the following files from the copy of
Diskette 1:

For an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer: IBM2*.*


For a Micro Channel computer: IBM1*.*

You will now have room to add device drivers to Diskette 1. However,
if the .ADD driver is on a diskette, you might have to copy it to your
hard disk before copying it to the copy of Diskette 1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 322 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file located on the copy of Diskette 1:

a. At the end of the file, add the appropriate BASEDEV= statement for
your adapter. For example, if your .ADD file is named
T128SCSI.ADD, add the following BASEDEV= statement shown in
capital letters:

set cdrominst=1
ifs=cdfs.ifs /q
BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD

The lowercase letters represent lines that already exist in your


CONFIG.SYS file, and uppercase letters represent lines you need to
insert. This ensures proper placement and installation.

Do not specify a file path for the .ADD file.

b. Insert the letters REM before any lines in the CONFIG.SYS file
that refer to the file you deleted in step 2 above.

4. Begin the installation by inserting the Installation Diskette into


drive A and restarting the system. When prompted to insert Diskette
1, insert the copy that you modified.

5. Install OS/2 Version 3, following the instructions in Chapter 2,


"Using Easy Installation" in topic 1.2 or Chapter 18, "Using Advanced
Installation" in topic 5.1

When the installation is complete, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
located in the root directory of the OS/2 partition in order to make your CD-ROM
accessible. You must also copy the .ADD that you put on the copy of Diskette 1 to
the \OS2 directory of the OS/2 drive. The OS/2 Installation program does not copy
unsupported .ADD files automatically. Do the following (in the following examples,
X represents the OS/2 partition):

1. Open the OS/2 System folder on the Desktop.

2. Open Command Prompts.

3. Open OS/2 Window.

4. At the command prompt, type cd\os2 and press Enter.

5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A. Then type the following, pressing


Enter after each:

COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD
COPY A:\CDFS.IFS

6. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert the manufacturer-supplied


device driver diskette (which contains the .ADD file).

7. Type the following and then press Enter:

COPY A:\T128SCSI.ADD

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 323 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

where T128SCSI.ADD represents the name of the device driver file.

8. Using a system editor, add the lines shown in uppercase letters to the
CONFIG.SYS file as shown below. (Lowercase letters represent lines
that already exist in your CONFIG.SYS file; uppercase letters
represent lines you need to insert. This ensures proper placement and
installation.)

basedev=ibm1s506.add
basedev=os2dasd.dmd
DEVICE=X:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
IFS=X:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
set bookshelf=x:\os2\book . . .

codepage=437,850
devinfo=kbd,us,x:\os2\keyboard.dcp
BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
devinfo=scr,vga,x:\os2\viotbl.dcp

9. Save the CONFIG.SYS file and exit the editor.

10. Shut down your system.

The above procedure is not guaranteed to make your CD-ROM work properly because
the device drivers are made by manufacturers other than IBM. For further
assistance, contact the manufacturer or your CD-ROM drive.

5.3.11 Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter

The M-Audio adapter can be configured to automatically route any audio source
attached to its LINE-IN jack to the LINE-OUT jack. This might be necessary if your
CD-ROM drive is not attached internally to the audio card outputs. To enable this
feature of the M-Audio card, add a P to the end of the DEVICE= statement for M-
Audio in the CONFIG.SYS file, as in the following example:

DEVICE=d:\MMOS2\ACPADD2.SYS A P

where d represents the drive letter, which will already appear in your
CONFIG.SYS file.

5.3.12 Using a Sound Blaster Adapter

Before you install the Sound Blaster adapter into your computer, you must know
the interrupt level, I/O port address, and the DMA channels. These values were
shown when you installed the adapter into your computer. If you do not know these
values, you can do the following:

On a Micro Channel computer, run the Reference Diskette and look at


the system configuration.
On an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer, check the Dip switches on
your Sound Blaster.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 324 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

If your computer has a Token Ring Adapter or a SCSI adapter, you might have
problems if you set Sound Blaster to use I/O port address 220. Choose a different
address if you have either of these adapters installed. I/O address 240 is a good
choice if 220 cannot be used.

ISA and EISA (non-Micro Channel) computers use Interrupt level 7 for the printer
(LPT) port. If you have this type of computer with a parallel printer, choose a
different interrupt.

This release of OS/2 does not support MIDI recording.


Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) does not support software volume control.
The MMPM/2 Volume Control application will, therefore, be ineffective
for these adapters.
If you have an older Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) card, ensure that you
upgrade the DSP module to Version 2.0 or higher. Versions 1.0 and 1.5
are not supported by the Sound Blaster device drivers.

5.3.13 Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16

The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is conceptually two sound cards in one adapter. The
adapter provides support for the MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 and the Sound
Blaster 2.0. A Yamaha OPL-3 chip is included for FM MIDI synthesis. It is used by
the OS/2 device driver for MIDI playback and for MIDI background sound when playing
games.

The FM MIDI hardware is the same as used in Creative Labs Sound Blaster adapters
and is fixed to always respond at a single I/O base address. This commonality of
hardware is the reason that multiple Pro AudioSpectrum 16 adapters and multiple
Sound Blaster adapters cannot be used in a single computer.

The OS/2 physical device driver does not use the Sound Blaster wave audio side
of the adapter. This is left free for use by WIN-OS/2 sessions or by games running
in DOS sessions.

The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 side of the adapter requires one interrupt (IRQ), one
Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and two I/O addresses. The Sound Blaster side
also uses one interrupt (IRQ), one DMA channel, and two I/O addresses. The values
for each side of the adapter must be unique just as those selected for other
hardware adapters must be unique. I/O addresses 388 and 330 will not be seen in
the device driver statement.

The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 configurations (DMA and IRQ) are set via software at
system startup, based on parameters specified on the DEVICE= line of the CONFIG.SYS
file. The values are set by OS/2 Multimedia installation. An example of the
DEVICE= line that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS file for the Pro AudioSpectrum
16 device driver follows:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 325 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

DEVICE=D:\MMOS2\MVPRODD.SYS /I:10 /D:5 /S:1,240,1,5 /N:PAS161$

where:

/N:xxxxx Specifies the name of the driver.

/T:x /T:1 = use on-board oscillator for OPL-3 (the default is /T:0).

/D:x Sets the DMA channel.

/Q:x Sets the IRQ channel.

/I:x Sets the IRQ channel.

/B:xxx Specifies HEX base board I/O location (the default is /B:388).

/W:x If /W:1, enables warm boot reset (the default is /W:0).

/M:x,xxx MPU [enabled,base address]

/F:x FM synthesis (/F:1 is enabled by default).

/J:x /J:1 causes a joystick to be enabled (the default is /J:0).

/S:x,xxx,x,x Sound Blaster [enable,base address,DMA,IRQ]

The Sound Blaster DMA is fixed at DMA channel 1. The I/O base address and IRQ
settings are set differently based on the version of the Pro AudioSpectrum 16
adapter. Older adapters have these values set via jumpers on the card. The
current versions set the Sound Blaster settings via software on the command line to
MVPRODD.SYS (or MVSOUND.SYS for DOS).

As of this release of OS/2, the device driver MVPRODD.SYS does not know how to
set the Sound Blaster IRQ from software. Only the first two parameters of the /S:
parameters are used (enable and I/O location).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 326 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

A.0 Appendix A. Keyboard and Mouse Use

The following tables list some of the most common tasks you can do, using either
the keyboard or a mouse. The plus (+) sign between key names means to press and
hold down the keys in the order shown and release them together.

When a column is left blank under the Mouse heading, it means that there is no
equivalent mouse function. The keyboard must be used.

The following terms are used to describe actions taken with a mouse:

Click Press and release a mouse button. Instructions explain


whether you should click mouse button 1 or 2.

Double-click Press and release mouse button 1 twice in quick succession.

Drag Move an object across the computer screen with a mouse.

Open Point to an item and double-click. Instructions explain


which item to point to.

Point Move the mouse pointer.

Select Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions


explain which item to point to.

Note: For a detailed list of specific key assignments, see the Master
Help Index.

Subtemas
A.1 System Tasks
A.2 Object Tasks
A.3 Window Tasks
A.4 Notebook Tasks
A.5 Help Window Tasks
A.6 Master Help Index Tasks

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 327 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

A.1 System Tasks

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+------------------------+-------------+---------------------------------¦
¦ Get help. ¦ F1 ¦ Select the word Help. ¦
+------------------------+-------------+---------------------------------¦
¦ Restart the system. ¦ Ctrl+Alt+Del¦ ¦
+------------------------+-------------+---------------------------------¦
¦ Switch to the next ¦ Alt+Tab ¦ Select the window. ¦
¦ window. ¦ ¦ ¦
+------------------------+-------------+---------------------------------¦
¦ Switch to the next ¦ Alt+Esc ¦ Press both mouse buttons at the ¦
¦ window or full-screen ¦ ¦ same time; open the window. ¦
¦ session. ¦ ¦ ¦
+------------------------+-------------+---------------------------------¦
¦ Display the Window ¦ Ctrl+Esc ¦ Point to an empty area on the ¦
¦ List. ¦ ¦ desktop; click both mouse ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ buttons at the same time. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

A.2 Object Tasks

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move among objects. ¦ Up-, Down-, Right-, ¦ Point to the object. ¦
¦ ¦ Left-arrow ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select an object. ¦ Use the arrow keys to ¦ Select the object. ¦
¦ ¦ move among the ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ objects. Press the ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ Spacebar to select an ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ object. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select more than one ¦ Shift+F8 to begin Add ¦ Press and hold the ¦
¦ object. ¦ mode. Use the arrow ¦ Ctrl key. Select an ¦
¦ ¦ keys to move among ¦ object. Repeat as ¦
¦ ¦ objects. Press the ¦ needed. Release the ¦
¦ ¦ Spacebar to make each ¦ Ctrl key when done. ¦
¦ ¦ selection. Repeat as ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ needed. Press ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ Shift+F8 again to end ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ Add mode. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select all objects. ¦ Press Ctrl+/ ¦ Press and hold mouse ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button 1; then drag ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the pointer over ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ every object. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Deselect all objects. ¦ Press Ctrl+\ ¦ Select an empty area ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ on the desktop. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Open an object. ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ ¦ Enter. ¦ then double-click. ¦

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 328 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Delete an object. ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ ¦ Shift+F10. Select ¦ then press and hold ¦
¦ ¦ Delete from the ¦ down mouse button 2. ¦
¦ ¦ pop-up menu. ¦ Drag the object to ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the Shredder object. ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ Release mouse button ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Print an object. ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ ¦ Shift+F10. Select ¦ then press and hold ¦
¦ ¦ Print from the pop-up ¦ down mouse button 2. ¦
¦ ¦ menu. ¦ Drag the object to ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the Printer object. ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ Release mouse button ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move an object. ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ ¦ Shift+F10. Select ¦ then press and hold ¦
¦ ¦ Move from the pop-up ¦ down mouse button 2. ¦
¦ ¦ menu. ¦ Drag the object to ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ another folder ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ object. Release ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Copy an object. ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Press and hold down ¦
¦ ¦ Shift+F10. Select ¦ the Ctrl key; then ¦
¦ ¦ Copy from the pop-up ¦ point to the object. ¦
¦ ¦ menu. ¦ Press and hold down ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2. Drag ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the object to where ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ you want a copy to ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ appear. Release ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ release the Ctrl key. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Change the name of an ¦ Select the object; ¦ Press and hold down ¦
¦ object. ¦ then press Shift+F10. ¦ the Alt key; select ¦
¦ ¦ Press the Right-arrow. ¦ the name (title). ¦
¦ ¦ key; then press Enter. ¦ Release the Alt key. ¦
¦ ¦ Select the General ¦ Edit the name. ¦
¦ ¦ tab. Select the Title ¦ Select an area away ¦
¦ ¦ field; then edit the ¦ from the name. ¦
¦ ¦ name. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display the pop-up ¦ Press Alt+Shift+Tab; ¦ Point to an empty ¦
¦ menu for the desktop ¦ then press Ctrl+\. ¦ area of the desktop ¦
¦ folder. ¦ Then press Shift+F10. ¦ folder; then click ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display the pop-up ¦ Select it; then press ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ menu for an object. ¦ Shift+F10. ¦ then click mouse ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select the first ¦ Home ¦ Select the choice. ¦
¦ choice in a pop-up ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ menu. ¦ ¦ ¦

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 329 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select the last ¦ End ¦ Select the choice. ¦
¦ choice in a pop-up ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ menu. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select a choice using ¦ Type the underlined ¦ ¦
¦ the underlined ¦ letter. ¦ ¦
¦ letter. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Get Help. ¦ Select and object; ¦ Point to the object; ¦
¦ ¦ then press F1. ¦ then click mouse ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button 2. Select ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ Help. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move between the ¦ Press Alt+F6. ¦ Select the window or ¦
¦ object and the Help ¦ ¦ object. ¦
¦ window. ¦ ¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

A.3 Window Tasks

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Get Help. ¦ F1. ¦ Select the word Help; ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ then select the type ¦

¦ ¦ ¦ of help you want. ¦


+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display the pop-up ¦ Alt+Spacebar ¦ Point to the ¦
¦ menu for a window. ¦ ¦ title-bar icon; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ click mouse button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move a window. ¦ Alt+F7; then use the ¦ Point to the title ¦
¦ ¦ arrow keys. ¦ bar; then press and ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ hold down mouse ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button 2. Drag the ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ window to the new ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ location. Release ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Size a window. ¦ Alt+F8; then use the ¦ Point to the border; ¦
¦ ¦ arrow keys. ¦ then press and hold ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ down mouse button 2. ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ Drag the border of ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ the window in any ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ direction. Release ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ mouse button 2. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Set a default size ¦ Press Alt; then press ¦ Press and hold the ¦
¦ for a window. ¦ S. Use the up, down, ¦ Shift key; then point ¦
¦ ¦ left, or right cursor ¦ to a corner of the ¦
¦ ¦ keys to adjust two of ¦ window border. Press ¦
¦ ¦ the borders; then ¦ and hold mouse button ¦
¦ ¦ press Enter. ¦ 1; then drag the ¦

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 330 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

¦ ¦ ¦ border to the desired ¦


¦ ¦ Note: If you press ¦ size. Release mouse ¦
¦ ¦ the mnemonic ¦ button 1; then ¦
¦ ¦ key for Hide, ¦ release the Shift ¦
¦ ¦ Minimize, or ¦ key. ¦
¦ ¦ Maximize, ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ instead of the ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ S for Size, the ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ selected choice ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ will become the ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ default size of ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ the window. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Minimize a window. ¦ Alt+F9 ¦ Select the Minimize ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Hide a window. ¦ Alt+F11 ¦ Select the Hide ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Maximize a window. ¦ Alt+F10 ¦ Select the Maximize ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Close a window. ¦ Alt+F4 ¦ Double-click on the ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ title bar icon. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move up through the ¦ Page Up or PgUp. ¦ Select the area above ¦
¦ contents of a window, ¦ ¦ the slider box on the ¦
¦ one page at a time. ¦ ¦ scroll bar. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move down through the ¦ Page Down or PgDn. ¦ Select the area below ¦
¦ contents of a window, ¦ ¦ the slider box on the ¦
¦ one page at a time. ¦ ¦ scroll bar. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to and from the ¦ F10 ¦ Select the menu bar ¦
¦ menu bar. ¦ ¦ or the window. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

A.4 Notebook Tasks

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Get Help ¦ F1 ¦ Select the Help push ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ button. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to the next ¦ Alt+Page Down ¦ Select a notebook ¦
¦ page. ¦ ¦ tab. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to the previous ¦ Alt+Page Up ¦ Select a notebook ¦
¦ page. ¦ ¦ tab. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move the cursor from ¦ Alt+Up Arrow ¦ Select a notebook ¦
¦ the notebook page to ¦ ¦ tab. ¦
¦ a tab. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 331 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

¦ Move the cursor from ¦ Alt+Down Arrow ¦ Select the notebook ¦


¦ a tab to the notebook ¦ ¦ page. ¦
¦ page. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to the next ¦ Tab ¦ Select the field. ¦
¦ field. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to the next item ¦ Up, Down, Left, or ¦ ¦
¦ within a field. ¦ Right Arrow ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select an item in a ¦ Enter ¦ Select the item. ¦
¦ single selection ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ field. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select an item in a ¦ Spacebar ¦ Select the button or ¦
¦ multiple selection ¦ ¦ box next to the item. ¦
¦ field. ¦ ¦ ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

A.5 Help Window Tasks

These tasks only work from within a help window.

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Switch between a help ¦ Alt+F6 ¦ Select the window. ¦
¦ window and the object ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ or window for which ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ help was displayed. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display General help. ¦ F2 ¦ Select Help; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ select General help. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display Keys help. ¦ F9 ¦ Select Help; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ select Keys help. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display Help index. ¦ F11 or Shift+F1 ¦ Select Help; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ select to Help index. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display Using help. ¦ Shift+F10 ¦ Select Help; then ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ select Using help. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display help for a ¦ Use Tab to move the ¦ Double-click on the ¦
¦ highlighted word or ¦ cursor to the ¦ highlighted word or ¦
¦ phrase. ¦ highlighted word or ¦ phrase. ¦
¦ ¦ phrase; then press ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ Enter. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display the previous ¦ Esc ¦ Select the Previous ¦
¦ help window. ¦ ¦ push button. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Search for a word or ¦ Ctrl+S ¦ Select Services; then ¦
¦ phrase ¦ ¦ select Search. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 332 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

A.6 Master Help Index Tasks

+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
¦ Task ¦ Keys ¦ Mouse ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Open the Master Help ¦ Enter ¦ Double-click on the ¦
¦ Index. ¦ ¦ Master Help Index. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move through the ¦ Up-arrow, Down- arrow ¦ Select the topic. ¦
¦ topics, one line at a ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ time. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Select the area above ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ the slider box on the ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ scroll bar. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move down through the ¦ Page Down or PgDn. ¦ Select the area below ¦
¦ topics, one page at a ¦ ¦ the slider box on the ¦
¦ time. ¦ ¦ scroll bar. ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move up through the ¦ Page Up or PgUp. ¦ ¦
¦ topics, one page at a ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ time. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Move to the topics ¦ Type the letter of the ¦ Select the letter of ¦
¦ beginning with a ¦ alphabet ¦ the alphabet. ¦
¦ letter. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Switch between an ¦ Alt+F6 ¦ Select the window. ¦
¦ entry and the Master ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Help Index. ¦ ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Display related ¦ Use Tab to move the ¦ Double-click on an ¦
¦ information. ¦ cursor to the entry ¦ entry listed under ¦
¦ ¦ listed under related ¦ related information. ¦
¦ ¦ information; then ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ press Enter. ¦ ¦
+-----------------------+------------------------+-----------------------¦
¦ Return to the ¦ Esc ¦ Select the Previous ¦
¦ previous help window. ¦ ¦ push button. ¦
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 333 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

B.0 Appendix B. Notices

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not


imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to
state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of
IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be used
instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of
operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those
expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of
Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.

Subtemas
B.1 Trademarks

B.1 Trademarks

The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are


trademarks or service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other
countries:

AT IBM
IBMLink Micro Channel
Operating System/2 OS/2
PC/XT Personal System/2
Presentation Manager Proprinter
PS/2 Screen Reader
ThinkPad ValuePoint
WIN-OS/2 Workplace Shell
XGA XT

The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this


publication, are trademarks of other companies as follows:

Trademark Owner
Adaptec Adaptec, Inc.
Adobe Adobe Systems Incorporated
Adobe Type Manager Adobe Systems Incorporated
After Dark Berkely Systems, Inc.
Allways Funk Software, Inc.
ALR Advanced Logic Research, Inc.
AMI American Megatrends, Inc.
Aox Aox Corporation
APM Astek International
ATI ATI Technologies, Inc.
Borland C++ Borland International, Inc.
Bubble-Jet Canon, Inc.
Canon Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Central Point Anti-Virus Central Point Software, Inc.
Central Point Backup Central Point Software, Inc.
Cirrus Logic Cirrus Logic, Inc.
Compaq Compaq Computer Corporation
CompuServe CompuServe Incorporated
Echo Echo Speech Corporation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 334 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Everex Everex Systems, Inc.


Flexview Nutmeg Systems
Freelance Lotus Development Corporation
Future Domain Future Domain Corporation
Gateway 2000 Gateway 2000, Inc.
Graphics Ultra Pro ATI Technologies, Inc.
Helvetica Linotype Company
Hewlett-Packard Hewlett-Packard Company
Hitachi Hitachi Ltd.
HP Hewlett-Packard Company
Intel Intel Corporation
IOMEGA IOMEGA Inc.
LaserJet Hewlett-Packard Company
Leading Technology Leading Technology, Inc.
Legend Sigma Designs Inc.
Logitech Logitech, Inc.
Lotus Lotus Development Corporation
McAfee McAfee Associates
Media Vision Media Vision, Inc.
Micronics Micronics Electronics, Inc.
Microsoft Microsoft Corporation
Mitsumi Mitsumi Denki Kabushki Kaisha
Motherboard Factory Motherboard Factory
Mylex Mylex Corporation
NetWare Novell, Inc.
Nomad Gateway 2000, Inc.
Northgate Northgate Computer Systems
Orchid Orchid Technology Inc.
Panasonic Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association
Philips Philips Electronics N.V.
Phoenix Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
PostScript Adobe Systems Incorporated
Pro AudioSpectrum Media Vision, Inc.
ProComm Datastorm Technologies, Inc.
Quantum Quantum Corporation
Reveal Reveal Computer Products, Inc.
SlimLine Northgate Computer Systems
Sony Sony Corporation
Sound Blaster Creative Labs, Inc.
Stacker Stac Electronics
S3 S3 Incorporated
Times New Roman Monotype Corporation, Limited
Trident Trident Microsystems, Incorporated
Toshiba Toshiba Corporation
Tseng Tseng Laboratories Inc.
Ventura Publisher Ventura Software, Inc.
VESA Video Electronics Standards Association
Video 7 Video Seven, Inc.
Weitek Weitek Corporation
Western Digital Western Digital Corporation
Windows Microsoft Corporation
WordPerfect WordPerfect Corporation
Zenith Data Systems Zenith Electronics Corporation
ZEOS ZEOS International Ltd.
1-2-3 Lotus Development Corporation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 335 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

GLOSSARY Glossary

+---+
¦ A ¦
+---+

archive. (1) A flag of files and directories that OS/2 uses to determine
which files are new or modified. Files with this flag are included when a
backup copy is made or when all the files are restored on a hard disk.
(2) A copy of one or more files or a copy of a database that is saved for
future reference or for recovery purposes in case the original data is
damaged or lost.

attribute. A characteristic or property of a file, directory, or object;


for example, its size, last modification date, or flag. See also setting.

audio. Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.

AUTOEXEC.BAT. A batch file whose main purpose is to process commands that


set up the operating system for DOS sessions.

audio. Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.

audio processing. In multimedia applications, manipulating digital audio;


for example, by editing or creating special effects.

audio segment. A contiguous set of recorded data from an audio track. An


audio segment might or might not be associated with a video segment.

audio track. (1) The audio portion of a program. (2) The physical
location where the audio is placed beside the image. (A system with two
audio tracks can have either stereo sound or two independent audio
tracks.) (3) Synonymous with sound track.

AudioVisual Connection (AVC). An IBM product that enables a user to


develop and deliver professional-quality audio-visual shows on a PS/2
computer.

authoring. A structured approach to combining all the media elements in


an interactive production, assisted by computer software designed for this
purpose.

authoring system. The software tools necessary to integrate computers and


peripherals, such as CD-ROMs and laser videodiscs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 336 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ B ¦
+---+

background. In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority


programs run when high-priority programs are not using the system
resources. A background session runs one program step at a time. It does
not run interactively with the user; processing continues on other
sessions in the foreground.

back up. To copy information onto a diskette or hard disk for record
keeping or recovery purposes.

batch file. A file that contains a series of commands to be processed


sequentially. A batch file can have either a CMD or a BAT extension.

baud rate. A number representing the speed at which information travels


over a communication line. The higher the number, the faster
communication occurs.

bit map. A representation of an image by an array of bits.

bookmark. A menu choice in online books that is used to save your place
in the document that you are viewing, by marking the topic that is
displayed.

border. A visual indicator of a window's boundaries.

button. A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, or an area on


the computer screen, used to request or initiate an action. See also
maximize button, hide button, push button, radio button, and restore button.

byte. A group of eight adjacent binary digits that are treated as a unit,
and that often represent a character.

+---+
¦ C ¦
+---+

cache. A storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions


and data; it is used to reduce hard disk access time.

cascade. A choice in a menu that arranges the secondary windows so that


each window is offset on two sides from the window it overlaps. The
windows appear to be stacked, one behind the other.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 337 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

cascading choice. A menu choice that has an arrow to the right of it. If
this arrow is selected, a cascaded menu appears. A three-dimensional
arrow indicates that a cascaded choice is preselected and is the default
action when you select the main choice. A one-dimensional arrow indicates
that additional choices are available; however, there is no default
action. See also cascaded menu.

cascaded menu. A menu that appears when the arrow to the right of a
cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of choices that are
related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the
length of a menu.

case-sensitive. A condition in which entries for an entry field must


conform to a specific lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format in order
to be valid.

CD-ROM. High capacity, read-only memory in the form of an optically read


compact disc. See also compact disc.

character. A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the


organization, control, or representation of data.

check box. A square box with associated text that represents one choice
in a set of multiple choices. When you select a choice, a check mark
appears in the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. You
can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with
radio button.

check mark. A symbol that shows that a choice is currently active. This
symbol is used in menus and check boxes. See also checkbox.

chip set. An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits which


provide hardware support for a related set of functions, such as
generation of video.

choice. Any item that you can select. A choice can appear in a selection
field, in a menu, or in text (a list of selectable choices), or it might
be represented by an icon.

circular slider control. A knob-like control that performs like a control


on a TV or stereo.

click. To press and release the select button on a pointing device


without moving the pointer off the choice. See also double-click.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 338 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

clip. A section of recorded, filmed, or videotaped material.

clipboard. An area of memory that temporarily holds data being passed


from one program to another. Data is placed on the clipboard by selecting
from a menu.

close. A choice in Window List and in those programs that have a system
menu. This is also a cascading choice from the Windows choice on a pop-up
menu. This choice ends highlighted programs and objects and their
associated windows.

command prompt. A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter


commands.

compact disc. A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is
read optically by means of a laser.

CONFIG.SYS. A file that the operating system adds to the root directory
during installation. This file contains statements that set up the system
configuration each time you restart the operating system.

configuration. (1) The manner in which hardware and software of an


information processing system are organized and interconnected. (2) The
arrangement and relationship of the components in a system or network.

configure. To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and


programs installed on the system.

container. An object that holds other objects. A folder is an example of


a container object.

copy. (1) A reproduction of an original. (2) To make a reproduction of


an object in a new location. After the copy action, the original object
remains in the original location and a duplicate exists in the new
location. A menu choice that places onto the clipboard a copy of what you
have selected. This choice is also used to make copies of objects from a
pop-up menu.

cut. A choice in a menu of a program that removes a selected object, or a


part of an object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it
occupied in a window. Removes a selected object or a part of an object to
the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 339 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ D ¦
+---+

data. The coded representation of information for use in a computer.


Data has certain attributes such as type and length.

database. A collection of data with a given structure for accepting,


storing, and providing, on demand, data for multiple users.

data-file object. An object that represents a file in the file system.


The primary purpose is to convey information, such as text, graphics,
audio, or video. A letter or spreadsheet is an example of data-file
objects.

default. A value, attribute, or option that is assumed when another is


not explicitly specified.

default action. An action that is performed when you press Enter while
pointing at an object, double-click the selection button on an object, or
perform a direct-manipulation operation. The default action is intended
to be the action that you would most likely want in the given situation.

default choice. A selected choice that a program provides for the initial
appearance of a group of selection choices.

deselect. The process of removing selection highlighting from one or more


choices. Contrast with select.

desktop. A folder that fills the entire screen and holds all of the
objects that enable you to interact with and perform operations on the
system.

device driver. A program that contains the code needed to attach and use
a device, such as a display, plotter, printer, or mouse. The driver might
also include data such as help information.

device font. A font particular to, and loaded in the memory of a device
such as a video display or printer. Some device fonts have size and
language-support restrictions.

device object. An object that provides a means of communication between a


computer and another piece of equipment, such as a printer or disk drive.
See also printer object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 340 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

digital. Pertaining to data in the form of numeric characters.

digital audio. Audible information that has been converted to and stored
in digital form.

digital video. Visual material that has been converted to digital form.

direct manipulation. The action of using a mouse or another pointing


device to work with objects, rather than through menus. For example,
changing the size of a window by dragging one of its edges is direct
manipulation. Moving or printing an object by dragging it to the printer
is another example. See also drag.

directory. (1) A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette.
A directory also contains information about the file such as size and date
of last change. (2) A named grouping of files in a file system. See also
folder.

directory tree. An outline of all the directories and subdirectories on


the current drive.

disk. A round, flat, data medium that is rotated in order to read or


write data. See also compact disc, hard disk, and diskette.

diskette. A removable magnetic disk enclosed in a protective cover used


to store information. See also diskette drive.

diskette drive. A mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on


diskettes.

DOS command prompt. A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter
commands. The DOS command prompt is displayed in a DOS window or DOS full
screen. Contrast with OS/2 command prompt.

DOS session. A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports
the independent execution of a DOS program. The DOS program appears to
run independent of any other programs in the system.

double-click. To press and release the select button on a pointing device


twice in rapid succession while the pointer is over the intended target of
the operation. See also click.

downloaded font. A soft font copied (downloaded) to the memory of a


printer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 341 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

drag. To use a mouse or another pointing device to move an object. The


following are examples: (1) pointing to an object; then pressing and
holding mouse button 2 while moving to a new location, or (2) pointing to
a window border; then holding down mouse button 1 or 2 while moving the
border to change the size of the window. Dragging ends when the mouse
button is released.

dynamic data exchange. The exchange of data between programs or between a


program and a data-file object. Any change you make to information in one
program or session is applied to the identical data created by the other
program. For example, with the dynamic data exchange (DDE) feature
enabled, you can select the duplicate of a spreadsheet that is embedded in
a report. Then, if you make changes to the spreadsheet copy in the
report, the same changes are made to the original spreadsheet file.

+---+
¦ E ¦
+---+

enable. (1) To make functional. (2) The state of a processing unit that
allows the occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (3) To initiate
the operation of a circuit or device.

environment variables. A series of commands placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT


and CONFIG.SYS files that dictate the way the operating system is going to
run and what external devices it is going to recognize. These commands
also can be specified as settings of DOS programs.

extended attributes. Additional information that the system or a program


associates with a file. An extended attribute can be any format, for
example text, a bit map, or binary data.

+---+
¦ F ¦
+---+

field. An identifiable area in a window used to contain data. Examples


of fields are: an entry field, into which you can type text; and a field
of radio buttons, from which you can select one choice.

file. A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an


assigned name. For example, a file can include information that starts a
program, program-file object, can contain text or graphics data-file
object, or can process a series of commands such as a batch file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 342 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

file allocation table (FAT). A table used by DOS to allocate disk space
for a file. It also locates and chains together parts of the file that
may be scattered on different sectors so that the file can be used in a
random or sequential manner. Contrast with High Performance File System
(HPFS).

file name. (1) The name used by a program to identify a file. (2) When
referring to the file allocation table (FAT) file system, the file name is
the portion of the identifying name that precedes the extension. When
referring to the high performance file system (HPFS), the file name
includes an extension (if there is one).

If you are using the HPFS, the file name can be up to 254 characters and
can include any number of periods. The following is an example of a path
and file name in the HPFS file system where C: is the drive, the first \
is the root, INCOME is the directory, and SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER is the
file name:

C:\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER

If you are using the FAT file system, the file name can be up to eight
characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extension.
The following is an example of a path and file name in the FAT file system
where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory,
TAX is a subdirectory, and SALES.TXT is the file name and extension:

C:\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT

flag. A characteristic of a file or directory that enables it to be used


in certain ways. See also archive, hidden, read-only, and system.

folder. A container used to organize objects, programs, documents, other


folders, or any combination of these. The folders on the desktop
represent the directories in the file system. For example, a folder can
have other folders within it. This is similar to a subdirectory within a
directory.

font. A particular style (shape), size, slant, and weight, defined for an
entire character set; for example, 9-point Helvetica italic bold. When
applied to outline or scalable character sets, which can be scaled to any
size, font refers to style, slant, and weight, but not to size.

foreground. In multiprogramming, the environment in which interactive


high-priority programs run. These programs run interactively with the
user.

format. To check a hard disk or diskette for defects and prepare it to


hold information.

Format 0 MIDI file. All MIDI data is stored on a single track.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 343 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Format 1 MIDI file. All MIDI data is stored on multiple tracks.

+---+
¦ H ¦
+---+

hard disk. A rigid disk in a hard disk drive that you cannot remove. The
hard disk can be partitioned into storage areas of variable sizes that are
subdivided into directories and subdirectories. See also partition.

Help. A choice on a pop-up menu that gives you assistance and


information; for example, general help about the purpose of the object.
(This information is the same as highlighting the choice and pressing F1.)
If you select the arrow to the right of Help, a cascaded menu appears from
which you can request further help.

The Help choice also can appear in those programs that have a menu bar.

Help Index. A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents an


alphabetic listing of help topics for an object.

The Help index choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on
a menu bar.

Help push button. A push button that, when selected, provides information
about the item the cursor is on or about the entire window.

hidden. A flag that indicates that a file or directory should not be


displayed in the directory tree or the directory window.

hide. To remove a window from the desktop. Hidden windows are displayed
in the Window List.

hide button. A small button located in the right-hand corner of the title
bar of a window that, when selected, removes all of the windows associated
with that window from the screen and are displayed in the Window List.

highlighting. Emphasizing a display element or segment by modifying its


visual attributes.

high performance file system (HPFS). An installable file system that uses
high-speed buffer storage, known as a cache, to provide fast access to
large disk volumes. The file system also supports the coexistence of
multiple, active file systems on a single personal computer, with the
capability of multiple and different storage devices.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 344 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.

+---+
¦ I ¦
+---+

icon. A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image,


image background, and a label.

image file. A file that is created from a DOS startup diskette. The
image file is a copy of the information on the startup diskette. Just as
a DOS session can be started from a DOS startup diskette, a DOS session
can be started from an image file of that same diskette.

inactive window. A window you are not currently interacting with. This
window cannot receive input from the mouse or keyboard. Contrast with
active window.

install. (1) To physically copy the files from the shipped diskettes of
an operating system or program to specified areas (directories) of a hard
disk. (2) Installing a printer driver, queue driver, or port means adding
the driver to the INI file (and copying to the hard disk only if

required). Deleting a printer driver, queue driver, or port removes the


entry from the INI file, but leaves the program file on your hard disk.

interrupt request (IRQ). A request for processing on a particular


priority level. It may be generated by the active program, the processing
unit, or an I/O device.

IRQ. See interrupt request (IRQ).

+---+
¦ J ¦
+---+

job. A data file sent to a printer to be printed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 345 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ K ¦
+---+

kernel. (1) The part of an operating system that performs basic functions
such as allocating hardware resources. (2) A part of a program that must
be in main storage in order to load other parts of the program.

keys help. A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents a listing of
all the key assignments for an object or a product. This choice also can
appear in those programs that have Help on a menu bar.

kilobyte (KB). A term meaning 1024 bytes.

+---+
¦ L ¦
+---+

LAN. Local Area Network. (1) Two or more computing units connected for
local resource sharing. (2) A network in which communications are limited
to a moderate-sized geographic area, such as a single office building,
warehouse, or campus, and that do not extend across public rights-of-way.

list box. A vertical, scrollable list of objects or settings choices that


you can select.

log in. (1) To begin a session with a remote resource (2) The act of
identifying yourself as authorized to use the resource. Often, the system

requires a user ID and password to check your authorization to use the


resource.

log out. (1) To end a session or request that a session be ended. (2)
The act of removing access to a remote resource from a workstation.
Contrast with log in.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 346 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ M ¦
+---+

M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA). An adapter card (for use
with the IBM PS/2 product line) that provides the ability to record and
play back high quality sound. The adapter converts the audio input
(analog) signals to a digital format that is compressed and stored for
later use.

mark. A menu choice of a program that you select to highlight text or


graphics that you want to perform clipboard operations on. The clipboard
operations are cut, copy, paste, clear, and delete.

Master Help Index. An object on the desktop that, when selected, presents
an alphabetic listing of operating system tasks and topics.

maximize. A menu choice available from the Windows choice on a pop-up


menu. Select this choice to enlarge the window to its largest possible
size.

maximize button. A large, square button located in the rightmost corner


of the title bar of a window that, when selected, enlarges the window to
its largest possible size. Contrast with hide button. See also restore
button.

megabyte (MB). A term meaning approximately 1 000 000 bytes.

memory. (1) The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access
memory, where your programs and data are held while you use them, or
read-only memory where information is stored that your system can refer to
but not change. (2) Program-addressable storage; the locations by which
the operating system and your programs can locate information that is
temporarily held in memory. With the OS/2 operating system,
program-addressable memory might be larger than the electronic chip memory
in your computer.

menu. A displayed list of available items from which you can make a
selection. See also popup menu.

menu bar. The area near the top of the window, below the title bar and
above the rest of the window, that contains choices that provide access to
other menus.

MIDI. Musical Instrument Digital Interface.

MIDI Mapper. Provides the ability to translate and redirect MIDI messages
to achieve device-independent playback of MIDI sequences.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 347 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

migrate. (1) To move to a changed operating environment, usually to a new


release or version of a system. (2) To move data from one hierarchy of
storage to another.

minimize. To remove a window (using the minimize button) to one of the


following:

Minimized Window Viewer


Window List
Desktop Folder.

See also hide.

minimize button. A button, located next to the rightmost button in a


title bar, that when selected, reduces the window to its smallest possible
size and removes all of the windows associated with that window from the
screen. Contrast with maximize button and hide button.

Minimized Window Viewer. A folder that contains icons of minimized


windows. See also minimize button and minimize.

mix. The combining of audio or video sources during postproduction.

mixer. A device used to simultaneously combine and blend several inputs


into one or two outputs.

modem. A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog


signal that can be transmitted on a telecommunications line and that
converts the received signal to data for the computer.

mouse. A pointing device that you move on a flat surface to position a


pointer on the screen. It allows you to select a choice or function to be
performed or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or
drawing lines from one position to another.

mouse button. A mechanism on a mouse that you press to select choices or


initiate actions.

move. To change the location of an object. After the move action, the
original exists in its new location and no longer exists in its original
location. Contrast with copy.

Move. A choice on the pop-up menu of objects that you select to move the
objects to other containers. Select to position a window on the screen.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 348 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

multimedia. (1) The combination of different elements of media (for


example, text, graphics, audio, and still images) for display and control
from a personal computer. (2) Material presented in a combination of
text, graphics, video, image, animation, and sound.

multimedia system. A system capable of presenting multiple types and


formats of material in their entirety.

multiple DOS sessions. A system service that coordinates the concurrent


operation of separate DOS sessions.

multiple virtual DOS machines. See multiple DOS sessions.

multitasking. A mode of operation that provides for concurrent


performance, or interleaved execution of two or more tasks.

Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI). A protocol that enables a


synthesizer to send signals to another synthesizer or to a computer, or
enables a computer to send signals to a musical instrument or to another
computer.

+---+
¦ N ¦
+---+

network. A configuration of data-processing devices and software


connected for the purpose of sharing resources and for information
interchange. See also LAN.

network administrator. The person responsible for the installation,


management, and control of a network. The network administrator gives
authorization to you for accessing shared resources and determines the
type of access those users can have.

network group. A folder representing a Local Area Network or a group of


objects that you have permission to access.

notebook. A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that


contains pages separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It
contains a mechanism that you can use to turn the pages. For example, you
can select a tab to turn the page to the section identified by the tab
label.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 349 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ O ¦
+---+

object. Something that you work with to perform a task. Text and
graphics are examples of objects. See also data-file object, folder,
program object and device object.

open. To create a file or make an existing file available for processing


or use.

operating system. Software that controls the processing of programs and


that may provide services such as resource allocation, scheduling,
input/output control, and data management. Although operating systems are
predominantly software, partial hardware implementations are possible.

OS/2 command prompt. A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter
commands. The OS/2 command prompt is displayed in an OS/2 window or OS/2
full screen. Contrast with DOS command prompt.

+---+
¦ P ¦
+---+

parallel. Pertaining to the simultaneous transmission of individual parts


of a whole. When a printer is connected to a parallel port, it receives
an entire byte (character) at a time. See also serial.

parameter. A variable used in conjunction with a command to affect its result.

parity check. A mathematical operation on the numerical representation of


the information communicated between two pieces. For example, if parity
is odd, any character represented by an even number has a bit added to it,
making it odd, and an information receiver checks that each unit of
information has an odd value.

PARSEDB. A utility program that creates a similar database to the Migrate


Applications default database (DATABASE.DAT). The Migrate Applications
program uses information in this database when migrating programs. The
database you create with PARSEDB contains similar information to the
default database, but for different programs.

partition. A fixed-size division of storage. On a personal computer hard


disk, one of four possible storage areas of variable size; one might be
accessed by DOS, and each of the others might be assigned to another
operating system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 350 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

password. A string of characters that you, a program, or a computer


operator must specify to meet security requirements before gaining access
to a system and to the information stored within it.

paste. (1) A choice in the menu of a program that, when selected, moves
the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can
select in a window. (2)Move the contents of the clipboard into a
preselected location that you can select in a window.

path. A statement that indicates where a file is stored on a particular


drive. The path consists of all the directories that must be opened to
get to a particular file. The directory names are separated by the
backslash (\). The first backslash represents the root directory. For
example, a file named things that is located in the EDIT directory of
drive C has a path of:

c:\edit\things

A path is sometimes followed by a file name and a file name extension (if
there is one). It is sometimes preceded by a drive letter and a colon
(:).

path and file name. The path and file name make up a statement that
indicates where a file is stored in a particular drive. It consists of
all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular file. The
backslash (\) separates directory names and the file name; the first \
indicates the root.

File names in the HPFS file system can be up to 254 characters and can
include any number of periods. The following is an example:

\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.FOR.SEPTEMBER

File names in the FAT file system can be up to eight characters and can be
followed by an optional three-character extension. The following is an
example:

\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT

plotter. An output device that uses multiple pens to draw on paper or


transparencies.

pointer. The symbol displayed on the screen that you move with a pointing
device, such as a mouse.

pop-up menu. A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object
it is associated with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 351 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

or set of objects in their current context. The menu is displayed by


clicking mouse button 2 on an object or on the desktop.

pop-up window. A movable window, fixed in size, in which you provide


information required by an application so that the application can
continue to process your request.

port. A connector on a computer to which cables for devices, such as


display stations and printers, or communications lines are attached.
Ports can be parallel or serial.

port designation. A 4-character identifier (such as LPT1 or COM1)


assigned to a printer, plotter, or communications device so that the
system has a unique way to refer to the resource.

printer driver. A file that describes the physical characteristics of a


printer, plotter, or other peripheral device, and is used to convert
graphics into device-specific data at the time of printing or plotting. A
Presentation Manager printer driver allows you to print or plot from an
application program that creates printer-independent files.

printer-independent file. A file in a format that is independent of a


particular printer type. For example, with a Presentation Manager
spooler, a file in the metafile format is printer-independent. See also
printer-specific file.

printer object. An object representing a physical printer or plotter, its


printer driver, queue, and other settings. See also device object.

printer-specific file. A file that can be printed on only one type of


printer. See also printer-independent file.

private. When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to Off, this disables


(makes private) the sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2 and
Windows programs.

When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting is set to Off, this
disables (makes private) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows
programs.

program. A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and


process.

program-file object. An object that starts a program. Program files


commonly have extensions of .EXE, .COM, .CMD, or .BAT. Contrast with
data-file object.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 352 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

program object. An object representing the file that starts a program.


You can change the settings for this object to specify how you want the
program to start or where the files related to the program are stored.
For example, you can specify that an editor always starts with the NOTABS
option.

See also program-file object.

program title. A name that you type for a selected program. It is


displayed with the icon. It can be any name you want to use to refer to
the program. For example, My Favorite Editor could be used as the program
title for an editor whose actual title is ABC.

program type. See session.

property. (1) Synonym for setting. (2) Like a setting, but used by the
OS/2 operating system to refer to printer, plotter, or print job set up.

public. When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to On, this enables (makes
public) the sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2, and Windows
programs.

When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting set to On, this enables
(makes public) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.

push button. A rounded-corner rectangular control containing text or


graphics, or both. Push buttons are used in windows for actions that
occur immediately when the push button is selected.

+---+
¦ Q ¦
+---+

queue. A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for


example, a list of print jobs waiting to be printed. See also spooling
and spooler.

queue driver. A software processor that takes a print job from a queue,
and sends it to the appropriate printer driver to prepare it for printing.

+---+
¦ R ¦
+---+

radio button. A round button on the screen with text beside it. Radio
buttons are combined to show you a fixed set of choices from which only

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 353 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

one can be selected. The circle is partially filled when a choice is


selected. Contrast with check box.

read-only. A flag that prevents a file from being modified. The file
with this flag set can be viewed, copied, or printed.

refresh. An action that updates changed information to its current


status.

remote. Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed


through a telecommunication line.

resolution. (1) Density or sharpness of an image. For bit-map material,


resolution is expressed in dots-per-inch, with higher quality output
having more dots-per-inch. Resolution can be adjusted for some printers.
Low-resolution images are printed faster, but appear coarser than
high-resolution images. A printer's memory size can limit the resolution
you can choose. (2) The number of lines in an image that an imaging
system (for example, a telescope, the human eye, or a camera) can resolve.
Higher resolution makes text and graphics appear clearer.

resource. Any facility of a computing system or operating system needed


to perform required operations; includes disk storage, input devices,
output devices (such as printers), a processing unit, data files, and
programs.

restore button. A button that appears in the rightmost corner of the


title bar after a window has been maximized. When the restore button is
selected, the window returns to the size it was before it was maximized.
See also maximize button and hide button.

root directory. The first directory on a drive in which all other files
and subdirectories exist, such as C:\.

+---+
¦ S ¦
+---+

scroll. To move a display image vertically or horizontally to view data


that is not otherwise visible in a display screen or window.

scroll bar. A part of a window, associated with a scrollable area, that


you interact with to see information that is not currently visible.
Scroll bars can be displayed vertically and horizontally. The scroll bar
can be selected only with a mouse.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 354 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

select. To use the selection button to highlight or choose an item such


as an object or a menu choice. When you make a selection, there is a
subsequent action that will apply. Contrast with deselect.

serial. Pertaining to the sequential transmission of one element at a


time. Serial ports pass one bit at a time. If a port has word length 7,
it must pass seven separate elements before the receiver can assemble
those elements into a single recognizable whole unit (character). See
also parallel.

server. (1) On a local area network (LAN), a workstation that provides


facilities to other workstations. (2) A computer that shares its
resources with other computers on a network. An example of a server is a
file server, a print server, or a mail server.

session. (1) A logical connection between two machines on a network. (2)


One instance of a started program or command prompt. Each session is
separate from all other sessions that might be running on the computer.
The operating system is responsible for coordinating the resources that
each session uses, such as computer memory, allocation of processor time,
and windows on the screen. The session types are OS/2 window, OS/2 full
screen, DOS window, DOS full screen, WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2
window, and WIN-OS/2 window separate session.

setting. A unique characteristic of an object that can be changed or


modified. The setting of an object describes the object. The name of the
object is an example of a setting.

Settings. A choice that defines characteristics of objects or displays


identifying characteristics of objects.

shadow. A link between duplicate objects. The objects can be located in


different folders. If you make a change in either the duplicate or the
original, the change takes effect in the other as well. Or, suppose you
have a program on a drive other than drive C and want to use it from the
desktop. You can make a shadow of the program for the desktop. The
program is not physically moved or copied, which means you save space on
your hard disk, but you can use it from the desktop.

shutdown. The process of selecting the Shut down choice before the
computer is powered off so that data and configuration information is not
lost.

slider. A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the


range of possible values for that quantity. In some cases, you can change
the value of the quantity.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 355 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

soft font. Optional fonts shipped as files. Soft fonts must be installed
onto the hard disk before they can be selected from programs. See also
downloaded font.

source diskette. In a diskette-copying procedure, the diskette from which


information is read. Contrast with target diskette.

source drive. The drive from which information is read. Contrast with
target drive.

specific DOS. An actual DOS program product that is purchased


independently of the OS/2 operating system. Examples include IBM DOS
Version 3.x, Microsoft DOS Version 3.x, Digital Research** Version 5.0.
Some programs are dependent on the internals of a specific DOS version.
You can run these programs with the OS/2 operating system by starting a
DOS session with a specific DOS version. Contrast with DOS session.

spooler. A program that intercepts data going to a device driver and

writes it to disk. The data is later printed or plotted when the required
device is available. A spooler prevents output from different sources
from being intermixed.

spooling. The process of temporarily storing print jobs while waiting for
an available printer or port. Spooling jobs frees system resources from
waiting for a relatively slow device to provide output, and keeps the
contents of each print job separated from the contents of every other
print job.

sticky keys. An input method that enables you to press and release a
series of keys sequentially (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del), yet have the keys
behave as if they were pressed and released at the same time. This method

can be used for those who require special-needs settings to make the
keyboard easier to use.

system. A flag that indicates that a file or directory is part of the


operating system.

system font. One of the fonts available for screen display and printing.
You can specify any size for this font, and it supports any language.
Contrast with device font.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 356 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ T ¦
+---+

tab. (1) An action, achieved by pressing the Tab key that moves the
cursor to the next field. (2) A graphical representation of a book-like
tab on a notebook that, when selected, turns the notebook page.

target diskette. In a diskette or storage copying procedure, the diskette


onto which information is written. Contrast with source diskette.

target drive. The drive to which information is written. Contrast with


source drive.

template. An object that you can use as a model to create additional


objects. When you drag a template you create another of the original
object, as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack.

tile. A choice in a menu that modifies the size of each window and
arranges them so that they appear side-by-side and top-to-bottom.

title bar. The area at the top of each window that can contain the window
title and a title-bar icon. When appropriate, it also contains the hide,
maximize, and restore buttons.

title-bar icon. The mini-icon in the upper-left corner of the title bar
that represents the object that is open in the window. You can use the
object to display the pop-up menu or close a window.

+---+
¦ U ¦
+---+

user interface. The hardware, software, or both that allows you to


interact with and perform operations on a computer.

Using Help. A cascaded choice on the Help menu that gives you information
about how the help function works. This choice is also available on those
programs that have Help as a choice on a menu bar.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 357 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

+---+
¦ V ¦
+---+

value. A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, or a parameter.

videodisc. A disc on which programs are recorded for playback on a


computer (or a television set); a recording on a videodisc.

view. The appearance of the contents of an open object (for example, a


folder can be displayed in icon view, tree view, settings view or details
view.

virtual device driver. A type of device driver used by DOS programs


running in a DOS virtual machine, in order to access devices such as the
screen or mouse which must be shared with other processes in the system.
The virtual device driver maps DOS device commands to the normal
(physical) device driver under OS/2 Version 3.

virtual DOS machine. See DOS session.

+---+
¦ W ¦
+---+

waveform. (1) A graphic representation of the shape of a wave that


indicates the wave's characteristics, such as frequency and amplitude.
(2) A digital method of storing and manipulating audio data within a
computer. (3) A series of digital samples of the audio input stream
taken at regular intervals over the duration of the audio event.

wildcard character. Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as


a variable in a file name or file name extension when referring to a
particular file or group of files.

WIN-OS/2*. WIN-OS/2 is a feature of OS/2 that enables OS/2 to run


supported Windows programs. See supported Windows programs.

WIN-OS/2 session. A WIN-OS/2 session created by the OS/2 operating system


that supports the independent processing of a Windows program. The
Windows program can run in a WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or
WIN-OS/2 window separate session.

window. An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which


information is displayed. A window can be smaller than or the same size

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 358 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

as the screen. Windows can appear to overlap on the screen.

Window List. A menu choice that displays a list of all of the open
windows in a product. Use the Window List choice to switch to an active
program, to tile or cascade open program windows, to surface hidden
windows, or to close a program.

Windows program. A program written for the Microsoft Windows application


programming interface.

workarea. A folder setting that enables you to organize your desktop by


grouping together objects for a specific task. For example, you could
group a plotter object with data-file objects that contain charts and
documents.

working directory. A specified directory that becomes the current


directory when a program is started. The current directory is the first
directory in which the operating system looks for programs and files and
stores temporary files and output. Some programs require a working
directory.

Workplace Shell. A graphical user interface that makes working with your
computer easier. The Workplace shell lets you manage your work without
having to learn the complexities of the operating system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 359 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Index

Special Characters
.MET format, viewing 3.9.1.5
.PIF format, viewing 3.9.1.5
.SPL format, viewing 3.9.1.5

Numerics
486 ISA-bus computer 4.1.5
8514/A adapter 4.1.7 4.2.5

A
active partition 5.2.2
adapter support, updating 3.1.15.3
Add Programs object 3.1.6
Adobe Type Manager (ATM) 3.1.4 3.1.17
advanced installation 5.1
advanced power management (APM) 3.1.14
alarm, setting system clock 3.1.12
Allways IN2000 SCSI adapter 4.1.4
ALTFL?.CMD file 4.2.10.2.1
AMI BIOS 4.2.6
analog clock display 3.1.12
antivirus programs
Central Point Anti-Virus 4.1.4
IBM Anti-Virus/2 4.1.4
McAfee Clean and Scan 4.1.4
Norton Antivirus 4.1.4
Aox systems 4.1.7
aperture, physical address 4.2.5
APM (advanced power management) 3.1.14
application programs
See programs
applications, adding 3.1.6
archive process 4.2.10.1
archive recovery choices
archived system files 4.2.10.2
command line 4.2.10.2
customized CONFIG.SYS file 4.2.10.2
original installation files 4.2.10.2
reset to VGA mode 4.2.10.2
archive, definition of GLOSSARY
assistance, getting 4.1.1
asynchronous memory 4.1.4
ATI Graphics Ultra Pro 4.1.5 4.1.7 4.2.5
ATM (Adobe Type Manager) 3.1.4 3.1.17
attribute, definition of GLOSSARY
audio, definition of GLOSSARY
authoring, definition of GLOSSARY
AUTOEXEC.BAT file
definition of GLOSSARY
editing 3.9.1.4
modifying to load DOS from within OS/2 5.2.2.1
automatic startup of programs, preventing 3.2.2
AUTOSTART statement 3.2.3

B
background bit map 3.1.8.4
background, definition of GLOSSARY
backing up OS/2 3.1.17 3.1.18
backup, definition of GLOSSARY
BASICA, starting and exiting 3.4.6
batch files
automatic startup of 3.2.1.1
definition of GLOSSARY
recovery choice 4.2.10.2.1
battery 3.1.14
baud rate, definition of GLOSSARY
beep
constant 4.1.7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 360 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

in PCMCIA 3.1.16.4
warning, changing 3.1.9
BIOS level 4.1.3
BIOS power management 3.1.14
bit map
background 3.1.8.4
definition of GLOSSARY
editing 3.9.1.3
bookmark, definition of GLOSSARY
bookmarks in Command Reference 3.10.2.4
Boot Manager
hard disk management 5.2.2
startup menu, example of 5.2.1
system setup recommendations 5.2.2.1
border, definition of GLOSSARY
borders of windows, changing 3.1.8.1
button, definition of GLOSSARY
byte, definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY

C
cache, definition of GLOSSARY
cache, external 4.1.7
card services (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.2
cascade, definition of GLOSSARY
case-sensitive, definition of GLOSSARY
CD-ROM drives
Hitachi 4.2.7
Mitsumi 4.2.7
Sony 4.2.7
Sound Blaster 4.2.7
CD-ROM problems, after installation
cannot access 4.2.7
doesn't respond 4.2.7
doesn't work 4.2.7
generates errors 4.2.7
CD-ROM problems, during installation 4.1.6
CD-ROM, definition of GLOSSARY
changing
See customizing
character, definition of GLOSSARY
check box, definition of GLOSSARY
check mark, definition of GLOSSARY
checking disk 3.3.4
chess game 3.9.2.2
chip set, definition of GLOSSARY
chip sets, video 4.3.1
CHKDSK utility program 3.2.3 4.2.9 4.2.10.6
choice, definition of GLOSSARY
circular slider control, definition of GLOSSARY
click, definition of A.0 GLOSSARY
clip, definition of GLOSSARY
clipboard
See dynamic data exchange
Clipboard Viewer object 3.9.1.1
clipboard, definition of 3.1.13 GLOSSARY
clock for system 3.1.12
close, definition of GLOSSARY
closing sessions 3.4.1
CMOS settings 4.1.7
collapsing Command Reference topics 3.10.2.1
Color Palette object 3.1.1
color scheme, change 4.3.6
colors
changing number of 4.3.5.3
new, creating 3.1.1.3
number of supported 4.3.1.3
object title, changing 3.1.1.2
parts of a window, changing 3.1.1.1 3.1.8.1
Scheme Palette 3.1.8
screen, changing 3.1.1.1
window schemes, changing 3.1.8.1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 361 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

windows, changing 3.1.1.1


command prompt, definition of GLOSSARY
Command Prompts folder
DOS sessions, starting and closing 3.4.2
multiple sessions, starting 3.4.5
OS/2 sessions, starting and closing 3.4.1
switching from a DOS session 3.4.2
switching from an OS/2 session 3.4.1
switching from WIN-OS/2 sessions 3.4.4
WIN-OS/2 sessions, starting and closing 3.4.4
Command Reference 3.10.2
commands, help for 3.10.2
compact disc, definition of GLOSSARY
Compaq 386/331 Deskpro 4.1.4
compatibility, display adapter/chip set 4.3.1.2
CONFIG.? file
creating 4.2.10.2.1
displaying 4.2.10.2.2
replacing 4.2.10.2.1
CONFIG.DOS file 4.2.5
CONFIG.SYS file
BASEDEV statement 4.1.3 4.1.7 4.2.7
CD-ROM statements 4.2.7
creating 4.2.10.2.1
customizing for startup 3.2.3
definition of GLOSSARY
DEVICE statement 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7
diskette 1 4.1.2
DOS=LOW,NOUMB 4.2.5
editing 3.9.1.4 4.1.2
FAT file system 3.2.3
HPFS 3.2.3
IFS statement 4.2.7
invalid 4.2.10
modifying to load DOS from within OS/2 5.2.2.1
mouse driver statements 4.2.6
multiple 4.2.10.2.1
recovering 4.2.10.4
recovering deleted files 3.6.2
SET VIDEO_APERTURE statememt 4.2.5
startup, customizing 3.2.3
configuration, definition of GLOSSARY
confirming delete message 3.1.11.1
constant beep 4.1.7
container, definition of GLOSSARY
contents window (Command Reference), using 3.10.2.1
copy file error 4.1.3
copy, definition of GLOSSARY
copying objects 3.3.2.3
Core Fonts, IBM 3.1.4
Country object 3.1.2
country, changing settings for 3.1.2
currency format, changing 3.1.2
cursor blink rate, changing 3.1.5
customizing
advanced power management 3.1.14
background bit map 3.1.8.4
colors 3.1.1
country settings 3.1.2
creating a new color 3.1.1.3 3.1.8.3
cursor blink rate 3.1.5
fonts (screen) 3.1.4 3.1.4.1 3.1.8.4
keyboard keys 3.1.5
mouse settings 3.1.7
PCMCIA 3.1.16.4.1
power consumption 3.1.14
printer driver 3.8.1.4
printer objects 3.8.1.1
printer properties 3.8.2
screen colors 3.1.1.1
system defaults 3.1.11

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 362 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

system startup 3.2.3


templates 3.7.3
time, setting 3.1.12
typeface 3.1.4.2
window borders 3.1.8.1
window colors 3.1.1.1
cut, definition of GLOSSARY
cutting and pasting 3.1.13

D
data-file object
associating 3.7.1.2
editing 3.9.1.2
data-file template 3.7.1.2
data, definition of GLOSSARY
date
country format of 3.1.2
setting 3.1.12
DDE
See dynamic data exchange
debugger hangs system 4.2.5
decimal conversion 4.1.3
default operating system, setting (for Boot Manager) 5.2.4.6
default, definition of GLOSSARY
DELDIR statement 3.6.2
delete message confirmation 3.1.11.1
deleting objects 2.1.6.3 3.3.2.5 3.6
deselect, definition of GLOSSARY
Desktop
definition of GLOSSARY
exploring 2.1
rebuilding 4.2.10.3
desktop problems
blank 4.2.9
damaged 4.2.10
empty objects 4.2.9
folders 4.2.9
keyboard doesn't respond 4.2.9
missing icons 4.2.9
missing objects 4.2.9
mouse doesn't respond 4.2.9
multiple objects 4.2.9
object cannot be deleted 4.2.9
password, forgotten 4.2.10
programs not added to 4.2.9
stacked icons 4.2.9
system stops working 4.2.9
unstartable 4.2.10
unusable 4.2.10
details view of disk contents 3.3.2.2
Device Driver Install object 3.1.3
device drivers
definition of GLOSSARY
from another manufacturer 3.8.1.6
installing (nonprinter) 3.1.3
installing for WIN-OS/2 (printer) 3.8.1.5
missing 4.1.7
printer or plotter, installing 3.8.1.2
printer properties, setting 3.8.2
recovering deleted 3.1.17
removing 3.1.17
video 4.3.1
device font, definition GLOSSARY
device object, definition of GLOSSARY
diagnostic information 4.2.10
digital clock display 3.1.12
digital, definition of GLOSSARY
direct manipulation, definition of GLOSSARY
directory
See folder object
directory, definition of GLOSSARY

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 363 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

disabled user, keyboard support for 3.1.5


disk
See hard disk
disk caching 4.1.4
disk images, create 4.1.6
disk read error 4.1.3
disk space error 4.1.3
disk, definition of GLOSSARY
DISKCACHE statement 3.2.3
diskette drive failure 4.1.3
diskettes
See also Drive A
capacity 3.3.1
checking disk 3.3.4
contents 3.3.2.2
copying objects from 3.3.2.3
copying objects to 3.3.2.3
creating Utility Diskettes 3.1.18
definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
deleting objects from 3.3.2.5
details view, definition 3.3.2.2
displaying contents of 3.3.2.2
drive letter 3.3.1
expanding contents 3.3.2.2
formatting 3.3.3
icon view, definition 3.3.2.2
information about 3.3.2.1
moving objects from 3.3.2.4
moving objects to 3.3.2.4
tree view, definition 3.3.2.2
write protect 3.3.1
disks, types of 3.3
display
8514/A 4.1.7
lower capability 4.3.4.5
override 4.3.5.1
selection, incorrect 4.3.4.3 4.3.5.2
switching 4.3.4.5
display adapter
adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
changing after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.3
display driver, installing 4.3.2
display problems
bit maps corrupted 4.2.5
blank screen 4.2.5
color icons corrupted 4.2.5
colors changing behind icons 4.2.5
colors corrupted 4.2.5
configuration failure, display 4.2.5
corruption on IBM P75 system 4.2.5
desktop corrupted 4.2.5
discolored bit maps 4.2.5
DOS corrupted using dual displays 4.2.5
DOS session corrupted 4.2.5
DPMS not enabled 4.2.5
Dual Boot with XGA-2 4.2.5
dual displays, minor corruption using 4.2.5
general protection fault 4.2.5
graphics corrupted 4.2.5
half-white screen 4.2.5
high-resolution failure 4.2.5
incorrect graphics mode 4.2.5
incorrect refresh rate 4.2.5
limited resolutions on IBM P75 4.2.5
lines around system clock, additional 4.2.5
logo screen/system stop 4.2.5
missing icons 4.2.5
missing utility program for Radius XGA adapter 4.2.5
poor performance 4.2.5
program performance 4.2.5
stacked icons 4.2.5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 364 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

synchronization lost 4.2.5


system hang 4.2.5
text strings clipped 4.2.5
TRAP 4.2.5
TRAP D error 4.2.5
video corruption 4.2.5
white screen 4.2.5
WIN-OS/2 failure (ThinkPad) 4.2.5
WIN-OS/2 session corrupted 4.2.5
documentation
adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.2 3.1.15.4
Application Considerations 2.1.4.2.2
Command Reference 3.10.2
Glossary 2.1.4.2.2 3.10.3
Information folder 3.10
Master Help Index 3.11
Multimedia 2.1.4.2.2
OS/2 Tutorial 2.1.6.3 3.10.1
Performance Considerations 2.1.4.2.2
Printing in OS/2 2.1.4.2.2
REXX Information 2.1.4.2.2 3.10.4
Trademarks 2.1.4.2.2
DOS 5.00 Upgrade, note about installing 5.2.2.1
DOS cache programs 4.2.3
DOS command prompt
definition of GLOSSARY
DOS from drive A, starting 3.4.3.2
multiple sessions, starting 3.4.5
starting and closing a session 3.4.2
DOS Programs folder, creation of 3.1.6
DOS session, definition of GLOSSARY
DOS settings, changing 4.3.3
DOS settings, video 4.2.6 4.3.3
DOS startup diskette, creating 3.4.3.1
DOS, installing 1.2.3.2
double-click, definition of A.0 GLOSSARY
downloaded font, definition of GLOSSARY
drag, definition of A.0 GLOSSARY
Drive A
check diskette for defects 3.3.11
check diskette for free space 3.3.11
check diskette for usage 3.3.11
check for total diskette space 3.3.11
copy object from diskette 3.3.7
copy object to diskette 3.3.7
delete object from diskette 3.3.9
details view 3.3.6
display creating date 3.3.6
display date updated 3.3.6
display details about objects 3.3.6
display flags 3.3.6
display objects 3.3.5.1
display real name of object 3.3.6
display size of object 3.3.6
display title of object 3.3.6
format diskette 3.3.10
icon view 3.3.5.1
move object from diskette 3.3.8
move object to diskette 3.3.8
object on LaunchPad 2.1.6.3
purpose of 3.3.5
tree view 3.3.5.1
drive mapping 5.2.2
Drives object
copying objects from 3.3.2.3
copying objects to 3.3.2.3
moving objects from 3.3.2.4
moving objects to 3.3.2.4
dual boot 1.2.3
dump, memory 4.2.10.7
dynamic data exchange

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 365 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

definition of 3.1.13 GLOSSARY


private 3.1.13
public 3.1.13
sharing data between sessions 3.1.13
dynamic link library error 4.1.3

E
Easy Installation 1.2
EC=00BF error 4.1.3
editor, tiny 4.1.2
editors, text 3.9.1.2
EEPROM level 4.2.5
EISA system, installing on 4.1.7
enable, definition of GLOSSARY
Enhanced Editor object 3.9.1.2
environment for Workplace Shell 3.2.3
environment variables, definition of GLOSSARY
expanding Command Reference topics 3.10.2.1
extended attributes, definition of GLOSSARY
extended partition 5.2.2
external cache 4.1.7

F
FAT file system
definition of GLOSSARY
starting up with DISKCACHE statement 3.2.3
FDISK error 4.1.3 4.1.4
field, definition of GLOSSARY
files
See also data-file object
copying to and from disk 3.3.2.3
definition of GLOSSARY
deleting 2.1.6.3 3.3.2.5
editing 3.9.1.2
finding 2.1.6 3.9.1.7
moving to and from disk 3.3.2.4
recovering deleted 3.1.17 3.6.2
removing 3.1.17
undeleting 3.6.2
Find push button 2.1.6
finding files and text strings 2.1.6 3.9.1.7
fixed disk
See hard disk
flag, definition of GLOSSARY
folder object
creating another 3.7.3
creating from a template 3.7.1.1
title color, changing 3.1.1.2
folder template 3.7.1.1
folder, definition of GLOSSARY
Font Palette object 3.1.4
fonts
adding 3.1.4.3
Adobe Type 1 3.1.4
Adobe Type Manager 3.1.4 3.1.17
definition of 3.1.4 GLOSSARY
deleting 3.1.4.4
IBM Core Fonts 3.1.4
printer 3.1.4
removing 3.1.4.4
scheme, changing in a 3.1.8.4
screen 3.1.4
styles, changing 3.1.4.2
system proportional 4.2.5
foreground, definition of GLOSSARY
format, definition of GLOSSARY
formatting disks 3.3.3
Freelance 4.2.5
Future Domain 16xx 4.2.5
Future Domain adapter 4.1.3

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 366 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

G
Games folder
description 3.9.2
Klondike Solitaire 3.9.2.1
OS/2 Chess 3.9.2.2
Gateway 2000 4.1.5
GB, definition of 3.3.1
gigabyte, definition of 3.3.1
glossary, using the 3.10.3

H
handicapped, keyboard support for 3.1.5
hangs, system 4.1.7
Happy Birthday Joshi 4.1.4
hard disk
capacity 3.3.1
checking disk 3.3.4
contents 3.3.2.2
copying objects from 3.3.2.3
copying objects to 3.3.2.3
definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
deleting objects from 3.3.2.5
details view, definition 3.3.2.2
display contents of 3.3.2.2
drive letter 3.3.1
Drives object, using the 3.3
errors 4.1.3 4.2.10
expanding contents 3.3.2.2
failure 4.1.3
formatting 3.3.3
icon view, definition 3.3.2.2
information about 3.3.2.1
management 5.2.2
moving objects from 3.3.2.4
moving objects to 3.3.2.4
recovering 4.2.10.6
tree view, definition 3.3.2.2
unusable 4.1.3
hard disk problems
cannot access entire disk 4.2.8
cannot set primary partition 4.2.8
caused by improper shutdown 3.2.3
disk controller problem 4.2.8
slow SCSI support 4.2.8
switch settings 4.2.8
hard file
See hard disk
Headland Adapters 4.2.5
Help, definition of GLOSSARY
help, online 1.2.1 1.2.2 3.10 3.11
Hewlett Packard Systems 4.2.5
hexadecimal conversion 4.1.3
hide, definition of GLOSSARY
High Performance File System
See HPFS
highlighting, definition of GLOSSARY
Hitachi CD-ROM drive 4.2.7
HPFS
definition of GLOSSARY
starting up with DISKCACHE statement 3.2.3

I
I/O cards (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.3
IBM Core Fonts 3.1.4
IBM mouse 4.2.6
IBM PC/XT mode 4.1.4
IBM PCAT mode 4.1.4
IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgrades 4.1.7
IBM PS/2 Models 90 and 95
EC level 4.1.7
memory modules 4.1.7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 367 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

IBM ThinkPad 4.2.5


IBM ValuePoint system 4.2.5
IBM1FLPY.ADD file, bad 4.1.4
Icon Editor object 3.9.1.3
icon view of drive contents 3.3.2.2
icons
changing 3.9.1.3
definition of GLOSSARY
title color of, changing 3.1.1.2
IDE controller 4.2.8
image file, definition of GLOSSARY
image files, editing 3.9.1.3
inactive window, definition of GLOSSARY
information
Command Reference 3.10.2
Glossary 3.10.3
Master Help Index 3.11
OS/2 Tutorial 3.10.1
REXX Information 3.10.4
searching for 3.10.2.3 3.10.3 3.11.2
INI files
damaged 4.2.10
making 4.2.10.3
recovering 4.2.10.5
input/output cards (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.3
install, definition of GLOSSARY
installation diskette problems 4.1.4
installation diskettes, creating 4.1.6
installation errors
copy file 4.1.3
disk read 4.1.3
disk space 4.1.3
diskette drive failure 4.1.3
dynamic link library 4.1.3
EC=00BF 4.1.3
FDISK 4.1.3
hard disk failure 4.1.3
hard disk, unusable 4.1.3
memory 4.1.3
memory segment 4.1.3
SYS0005 4.1.3
sys1200 4.1.3
SYS1201 4.1.3
SYS1475 4.1.3
SYS1719 4.1.3
SYS2025 4.1.3
SYS2026 4.1.3
SYS2027 4.1.3
SYS2028 4.1.3
SYS2029 4.1.3
SYS2030 4.1.3
SYS3146 4.1.3
SYS3147 4.1.3
SYS3161 4.1.3
trap0002 4.1.3
traps 4.1.3
installation screen problems
black lines on logo screen 4.1.5
white screen 4.1.5
white screen with disk light on 4.1.5
installing
device drivers (nonprinter) 3.1.3
DOS 1.2.3.2
fonts (screen) 3.1.4.3
online documentation after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.2
options after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
OS/2 1.2
OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version 1.2
PCMCIA 3.1.16.1
PCMCIA support after installation 3.1.15.4
printer drivers 3.8.1.2

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 368 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

printer or plotter 3.8.1


software features 1.2.2
Windows 1.2.2 1.2.4.1
international settings, changing 3.1.2
interrupt request level conflict 4.1.3
interrupt request, definition of GLOSSARY
IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90 4.1.7
IPE error 4.1.4
IRQ level conflict 4.1.3
IRQ settings 4.1.4 4.2.5 4.2.6
ISA system, installing on 4.1.7

J
job, definition of GLOSSARY
Joshi virus 4.1.4

K
KB, definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
kernel, definition of GLOSSARY
keyboard
country settings, changing 3.1.2
cursor blink rate 3.1.5
directing activity of 3.1.11.2
handicapped support 3.1.5
settings, changing 3.1.5
special needs, support for 3.1.5
sticky keys, setting 3.1.5
using A.0
keyboard and mouse use A.0
Keyboard object 3.1.5
keys help, definition of GLOSSARY
kilobyte, definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
Klondike Solitaire object 3.9.2.1

L
LAN, definition of GLOSSARY
laptop display 4.3.6
launching an object (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.5
LaunchPad 2.1.5
LCD display 4.3.6
learning about OS/2 2.1 3.10.1
left-handed use of mouse 3.1.7
list box, definition of GLOSSARY
locking up the system 2.1.5.1.1
Lockup push button 2.1.5.1.1
log in, definition of GLOSSARY
log out, definition of GLOSSARY
logical drive, description of 5.2.2
Logitech C-Series mouse 4.2.6
Logitech M-Series mouse 4.2.6
logos, changing display time 3.1.11.6
Lotus 1-2-3 4.2.5

M
M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter, definition of GLOSSARY
mark, definition of GLOSSARY
marking Command Reference topics 3.10.2.3
Master Help Index 3.11
Master Help Index, definition of GLOSSARY
maximize, definition of GLOSSARY
MB, definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
megabyte, definition of 3.3.1 GLOSSARY
memory
definition of GLOSSARY
error 4.1.3
modules 4.1.7
segment error 4.1.3
shared 4.1.7
memory cards (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.3
memory dump
diskettes, mailing 4.2.10.7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 369 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

parameters 4.2.10.7
performing 4.2.10.7
memory management
dump 4.2.10.7
error 4.2.4
parity errors 4.2.4
state data, recovering 4.2.10.7
video 4.3.1.3
menu, definition of GLOSSARY
message help 3.10.4.1
messages
delete confirmation 3.1.11.1 3.6.1
title conflicts 3.1.11.3
messages, error 4.1.3
messages, help for 3.10.4.1
metafiles, viewing 3.9.1.5
Microsoft mouse 4.2.6
MIDI, definition of GLOSSARY
migrate, definition of GLOSSARY
migrating programs 3.1.6
Minimized Window Viewer 3.5
minimizing
definition of GLOSSARY
objects on the desktop 3.5
objects, customizing hide feature 3.1.11
Mitsumi CD-ROM drive 4.2.7
mix, definition of GLOSSARY
Mixed Color Palette 3.1.1
modem card manager (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.2
modem, definition of GLOSSARY
modules, memory 4.1.7
monochrome displays 4.3.6
mouse
adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
button combinations, changing 3.1.7
definition of GLOSSARY
directing activity of 3.1.11.2
IBM 4.2.6
installing another pointing device 3.1.7
left- or right-hand use 3.1.7
Logitech 4.2.6
Microsoft 4.2.6
pointer speed 3.1.7
right- or left-hand use 3.1.7
serial 4.2.6
settings, changing 3.1.7
three-button 4.2.6
timing 3.1.7
Mouse object 3.1.7
mouse problems
3-button mouse error 4.2.6
after installation 4.2.6
COM3 connection failure 4.2.6
COM4 connection failure 4.2.6
erratic mouse pointer 4.2.6
failure after Dual Boot 4.2.6
incompatible 4.2.6
jerky movements 4.2.6
Logitech mouse failure 4.2.6
missing CONFIG.SYS statements 4.2.6
no movement 4.2.6
not recognized 4.2.6
serial mouse 4.2.6
stops working 4.2.6
won't load 4.2.6
move, definition of GLOSSARY
moving objects 3.3.2.4
multimedia, definition of GLOSSARY
multiple DOS sessions, definition of GLOSSARY
multiple operating systems, installing 5.2
multiple sessions, starting 3.4.5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 370 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

multiple virtual DOS machines, definition of GLOSSARY


multitasking, definition of GLOSSARY
Mylex system 4.1.4

N
network, definition of GLOSSARY
new features, OS/2 Version 3 PREFACE.1
notebook, definition of GLOSSARY

O
object launcher (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.5
object, definition of GLOSSARY
objects
adding to the LaunchPad 2.1.6.4
copying to and from disk 3.3.2.3
creating a template of an object 3.7.2
creating another 3.7.3
creating from a template 3.7.1
deleting 2.1.6.3 3.3.2.5
finding open 2.1.6.1
moving to and from disk 3.3.2.4
program, creating 3.1.6
recovering deleted 3.6.2
title color of, changing 3.1.1.2
undeleting 3.6.2
online books
Application Considerations 2.1.4.2.2
Glossary 2.1.4.2.2
Multimedia 2.1.4.2.2
Performance Considerations 2.1.4.2.2
Printing in OS/2 2.1.4.2.2
REXX Information 2.1.4.2.2
Trademarks 2.1.4.2.2
open, definition of 2.1.1 A.0 GLOSSARY
opening Command Reference topics 3.10.2.1
operating system, definition of GLOSSARY
operating systems
installing multiple 5.2
recommended partition sizes for 5.2.4.3
switching between 1.2.3
options, adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
OS/2 Chess object 3.9.2.2
OS/2 command prompt
definition of GLOSSARY
LaunchPad, from 2.1.6.3
location on the Desktop 3.4
multiple sessions, starting 3.4.5
starting and closing session 3.4.1
switching from a session 3.4.1
OS/2 files, removing 3.1.17
OS/2 partition, creating 5.2.4.4
OS/2 System Editor 3.7.1.2 3.9.1.4
OS/2 System object
Command Prompts 3.4
Drives 3.3
Games 3.9.2
Productivity 3.9
Startup 3.2
System Setup 3.1
OS/2 Window object (on LaunchPad) 2.1.6.3
OS2_SHELL statement 3.2.3
OS2BOOT file 4.1.3
OS2KRNL file 4.1.3
OS2KRNLI file 4.1.3
OS2LDR.MSG file 4.1.3

P
parallel, definition of GLOSSARY
parameter, definition of GLOSSARY
parity check, definition of GLOSSARY
parity errors, memory 4.2.4

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 371 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

PARSEDB, definition of GLOSSARY


partition
active 5.2.2
creating OS/2 5.2.4.4
definition of GLOSSARY
extended 5.2.2
restriction on number of 5.2.2
size and considerations 5.2.4.3
password
definition of GLOSSARY
forgotten lockup 4.2.10
setting a lockup 2.1.5.1.1
paste, definition of GLOSSARY
path, definition of GLOSSARY
PC card 3.1.16
PCI system, installing on 4.1.7
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) 3.1.16
Personal System/2
EC level 4.2.4
memory errors 4.2.4
memory parity 4.2.4
mouse problems 4.2.6
unattended start mode 4.2.6
Philips CM 205 CD-ROM 4.2.7
picture interchange format files, viewing 3.9.1.5
Picture Viewer object 3.9.1.5
planning the Boot Manager setup 5.2.2.1
plotter
See printer
Plug and Play for PCMCIA 3.1.16.3
point, definition of A.0
pointer, definition of GLOSSARY
pointers, changing 3.9.1.3
pointing device, installing another 3.1.7
pop-up menu, definition of GLOSSARY
pop-up window, definition of GLOSSARY
port, definition of GLOSSARY
power management 3.1.14
Power object 3.1.14
primary partitions, restriction on number of 5.2.2
print screen 3.1.11.5
printer
changing to a different driver 3.8.1.4
non-OS/2 driver, installing 3.8.1.6
properties, setting 3.8.2
removing support for 3.1.17
setting up 3.8.2
WIN-OS/2, installing 3.8.1.5
printer driver 3.8.1.2
printer driver, definition of GLOSSARY
printer object 2.1.6.3 3.8
printer object, definition of GLOSSARY
printer-independent file, definition of GLOSSARY
printer-specific file, definition of GLOSSARY
printing
a window 3.1.11.5
Command Reference topics 3.10.2.5
large print jobs 3.1.10.2
Master Help Index entries 3.11.3
priority of job, changing 3.1.10.3
priority of print jobs, changing 3.1.10.3
private, definition of GLOSSARY
processor power, monitoring 3.9.1.6
ProComm Micro Channel SCSI adapter 4.2.5
Productivity folder
Clipboard Viewer 3.9.1.1
Enhanced Editor 3.9.1.2
Icon Editor 3.9.1.3
OS/2 System Editor 3.9.1.4
Picture Viewer 3.9.1.5
Pulse 3.9.1.6

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 372 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Seek and Scan Files 3.9.1.7


program object template 3.7.1.3
program objects
adding to Desktop 3.1.6
associating 3.7.3
automatic startup of 3.2.1.1
creating new (using Add Programs) 3.1.6
creating new (using template) 3.7.1.3
definition of GLOSSARY
program-file object, definition of GLOSSARY
program, definition of GLOSSARY
programs
See also program objects
adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
adding to the Desktop 3.1.6
automatic startup, disabling 3.2.2
removing 3.1.17
Promise IDE cached controller 4.1.7
property, definition of GLOSSARY
PS/ValuePoint system 4.2.5
public, definition of GLOSSARY
Pulse object 3.9.1.6
push button, definition of GLOSSARY

Q
QBASIC, starting and exiting 3.4.6
Quantum Hardcard 4.2.8
queue, definition of GLOSSARY

R
radio button, definition of GLOSSARY
Radius XGA adapter 4.2.5
read-only, definition of GLOSSARY
recommendations for a Boot Manager setup 5.2.2.1
recommended partition sizes 5.2.4.3
recovery choices
batch file 4.2.10.2.1
customizing 4.2.10.2.2
displaying 4.2.10.2 4.2.10.2.1
explanation of 4.2.10.2
recovery procedures
archived desktop 4.2.10.1
CONFIG.SYS file 4.2.10.4
hard disk errors 4.2.10.6
memory state data 4.2.10.7
rebuild desktop 4.2.10.3
user INI file 4.2.10.5
refresh loses synchronization 4.2.5
refresh, definition of GLOSSARY
register shadowing 4.2.5
registering an object (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.4.2
registration number 4.2.1
remote, definition of GLOSSARY
removing objects 3.6
requirements, minimum system 1.1.1
reset VGA mode 4.2.10.2
resolution
changing screen 4.3.5.3
definition of GLOSSARY
loses synchronization 4.2.5
supported video 4.3.1.3
VGA 4.2.5
XGA, changing 3.1.11.7
resource client (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.2
resource, definition of GLOSSARY
response file 5.1.6.2.1
RESTARTOBJECTS statement 3.2.3
restore button, definition of GLOSSARY
RESTORE.EXE 3.1.17
REXX Information 2.1.4.2.2 3.10.4
right-handed use of mouse 3.1.7

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 373 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

ROM shadowing 4.1.7


root directory, definition of GLOSSARY
RUNWORKPLACE statement 3.2.3

S
S3 video adapter 4.2.5
Scheme Palette object 3.1.8
screen resolution
See resolution
scroll, definition of GLOSSARY
SCSI adapters
Allways IN2000 4.1.4
Future Domain 16xx controller 4.2.5
ProComm Micro Channel 4.2.5
searching all Command Reference topics 3.10.2.3
Seek and Scan Files object 3.9.1.7
select, definition of 2.1.1 GLOSSARY
Selective Install object 3.1.15
selective install, problems after using 4.2.5
Selective Uninstall program 3.1.17
serial mouse 4.2.6
serial, definition of GLOSSARY
server, definition of GLOSSARY
sessions
definition of GLOSSARY
DOS command prompt 3.4.2
DOS from drive A 3.4.3.2
DOS, starting and closing 3.4.2
exiting OS/2 sessions, temporarily 3.4.1
from a command prompt 3.4
multiple, starting 3.4.5
OS/2 command prompt 3.4.1
OS/2, closing 3.4.1
OS/2, starting and closing 3.4.1
WIN-OS/2, starting and closing 3.4.4
SET AUTOSTART statement 3.2.3
SET OS2_SHELL statement 3.2.3
SET RESTARTOBJECTS statement 3.2.3
SET RUNWORKPLACE statement 3.2.3
SET SYSTEM_INI statement 3.2.3
SET USER_INI statement 3.2.3
setting the Boot Manager default operating system 5.2.4.6
setting, definition of GLOSSARY
Settings, definition of GLOSSARY
setup
See system setup
shadows
definition of GLOSSARY
of program files in Startup folder 3.2.1.1
shared memory 4.1.7 4.2.5
Shredder object 2.1.6.3 3.6
Shut Down push button 2.1.6.2
shutdown, definition of GLOSSARY
shutting down the system 2.1.6.2
Sigma Legend adapter 4.2.5
slider, definition of GLOSSARY
socket services (PCMCIA) 3.1.16.2
soft font, definition of GLOSSARY
software features, installing 1.2.2
software motion video feature 4.2.5
Solid Color Palette 3.1.1
Sony CD-ROM drive 4.2.7
Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive 4.2.7
Sound object 3.1.9
sound, changing beep 3.1.9
source diskette, definition of GLOSSARY
source drive, definition of GLOSSARY
special needs keyboard settings 3.1.5
specific DOS, definition of GLOSSARY
Speedstar VGA 4.2.5
spooler

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 374 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

definition of GLOSSARY
disabling 3.1.10.4
enabling 3.1.10.1
large print jobs, procedure for 3.1.10.2
print job priority, changing 3.1.10.3
spooler files, viewing 3.9.1.5
Spooler object 3.1.10
spooling, definition of GLOSSARY
startup
automatic, preventing 3.2.2
CONFIG.SYS statements 3.2.3
customizing for 3.2.3
DISKCACHE statement, using 3.2.3
DOS startup diskette, creating 3.4.3.1
operating system (Dual Boot) 1.2.3
Startup object 3.2.1
Startup Problems
Boot Manager menu missing 4.2.3
DOS 4.2.3
Dual Boot 4.2.3
internal processing error 4.2.3
PS/1 System 4.2.3
VESA SUPER I/O controller 4.2.3
STARTUP.CMD file 3.2.1.2
sticky keys
activating 3.1.5
definition of GLOSSARY
storage media 3.3.1
SVGA
enabling 4.3.4.1
installing OS/2 for 1.2.2
utility program 4.2.5 4.3.4.4
video adapter 4.2.5
SVGA procedures
display adapter, preparing for a 4.3.4.2
display configuration, capturing 4.3.4.4
display driver, installing 4.3.2
display, downgrading 4.3.4.5
enabling SVGA 4.3.4.1
incorrect display selection 4.3.4.3
number of colors, changing 4.3.5.3
screen resolution, changing 4.3.5.3
video driver, installing 4.3.2
switching displays 4.3.4.5
switching sessions 3.4.3.2
SYS0005 error 4.1.3
SYS1200 error 4.1.3
SYS1201 error 4.1.3 4.2.6
SYS1475 error 4.1.3
SYS1719 error 4.1.3
SYS2025 error 4.1.3
SYS2026 error 4.1.3
SYS2027 error 4.1.3
SYS2028 error 4.1.3
SYS2029 error 4.1.3
SYS2030 error 4.1.3
SYS3146 error 4.1.3
SYS3147 error 4.1.3
SYS3161 error 4.1.3
System Clock object 3.1.12
system editor 3.7.1.2 3.9.1.4
system font, definition of GLOSSARY
system hangs 4.1.7
System object 3.1.11
system proportional font 4.2.5
system requirements, minimum 1.1.1
system setup
Add Programs 3.1.6
Color Palette 3.1.1
Country 3.1.2
Device Driver Install 3.1.3

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 375 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

Font Palette 3.1.4


Keyboard 3.1.5
Mixed Color Palette 3.1.1
Mouse 3.1.7
PCMCIA 3.1.16
Power 3.1.14
Scheme Palette 3.1.8
Selective Install 3.1.15
Solid Color Palette 3.1.1
Sound 3.1.9
Spooler 3.1.10
System 3.1.11
System Clock 3.1.12
WIN-OS/2 Setup 3.1.13
System Setup object 3.1
SYSTEM_INI statement 3.2.3
system, definition of GLOSSARY

T
tab, definition of GLOSSARY
target diskette, definition of GLOSSARY
target drive, definition of GLOSSARY
templates
creating 3.7.2
definition of GLOSSARY
using 3.7.1
text editors 3.9.1.2
text strings, finding 3.9.1.7
ThinkPad 750C Series 4.2.5
three-button mouse 4.2.6
time, setting system clock 3.1.12
title conflicts, resolving 3.1.11.3
title, definition of GLOSSARY
tools, productivity
adding after OS/2 installation 3.1.15.1
Clipboard Viewer 3.9.1.1
Enhanced Editor 3.9.1.2
Icon Editor 3.9.1.3
OS/2 System Editor 3.9.1.4
Picture Viewer 3.9.1.5
Pulse 3.9.1.6
Seek and Scan Files 3.9.1.7
TRACE, using 4.2.10.7
TRAP D error 4.2.5
trap explanation 4.1.3
trap0002 error 4.1.3 4.1.7
TRAP0008 error 4.1.4
TRAP000D error 4.1.4
tree view of disk contents 3.3.2.2
troubleshooting, installation
CD-ROM problems 4.1.6
diskette problems 4.1.4
during OS/2 installation 1.2.5
error messages 4.1.3
error messages, numbered 4.1.3
miscellaneous problems 4.1.7
screen problems 4.1.5
steps 4.1.1
troubleshooting, post-installation
booting problems 4.2.3
CD-ROM problems 4.2.7
desktop problems 4.2.9
display problems 4.2.5
Dual Boot does not work 1.2.3.3
hard disk problems 4.2.8
memory problems 4.2.4
mouse problems 4.2.6
startup problems 4.2.3
steps 4.2.1
tutorial 2.1.6.3 3.10.1
typeface, changing 3.1.4.2

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 376 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

U
unattended start mode 4.2.6
UNDELETE command 3.6.3
Uninstall program 3.1.17
unmarking Command Reference topics 3.10.2.3
unpacking files for WIN SVGA 4.3.4.1
unstartable desktop 4.2.10
unusable desktop 4.2.10
Upgrade, DOS 5.00 5.2.2.1
upgrading to DOS 5.00 before installing Boot Manager 5.2.2.1
user INI file 4.2.10.5
user interface, definition of GLOSSARY
USER_INI statement 3.2.3
Using Help, definition of GLOSSARY
Using OS/2 object 2.1.6.3
Utility Diskettes
creating 3.1.18
for backing up OS/2 3.1.18
utility programs
Archive/Recovery 4.2.10
CHKDSK 4.2.9
configuration 4.2.5
power management 4.2.5
SVGA 4.2.5 4.3.4.4 4.3.4.5
UNPACK 4.3.4.1
VMODE 4.2.5
VPXGA 4.2.5

V
value, definition of GLOSSARY
Ventura Publisher 4.2.5
vertical refresh rates 4.2.5
VESA SUPER I/O controller 4.2.3
VGA instructions 4.2.5
VGA, restoring 4.3.4.2
video
autosensing 4.1.5
chip sets 4.3.1
driver, installing 4.3.2
resolutions, supported 4.3.1.3
Video 7 adapter 4.2.5
video procedures
display adapter, preparing for a 4.3.4.2
display configuration, capturing 4.3.4.4
display driver, installing 4.3.2
display, downgrading 4.3.4.5
DOS settings, changing 4.3.3
incorrect display selection, SVGA 4.3.4.3
incorrect display selection, XGA 4.3.5.2
screen colors, changing number of 4.3.5.3
screen resolution, changing 4.3.5.3
video driver, installing 4.3.2
WIN-OS/2, enabling SVGA 4.3.4.1
XGA-2 display, override 4.3.5.1
videodisc, definition of GLOSSARY
view, definition of GLOSSARY
virtual device driver, definition of GLOSSARY
virtual DOS machine, definition of GLOSSARY
virus, Joshi 4.1.4
VMODE utility program 4.2.5

W
waveform, definition of GLOSSARY
wildcard character, definition of GLOSSARY
WIN-OS/2
clipboard 3.1.13
definition of GLOSSARY
dynamic data exchange 3.1.13
multiple sessions, starting 3.4.5
sharing data between sessions 3.1.13

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 377 / 378


User’s Guide to OS/2 WARP 3

WIN-OS/2 settings 4.2.5


WIN-OS/2 Setup object 3.1.13
window
border widths 3.1.8.1
closing 2.1.6.1
colors, changing 3.1.1.1 3.1.8.1
customizing 3.1.8.1
defaults, changing 3.1.11.4
definition of GLOSSARY
minimized 3.1.11
reopening minimized 2.1.6.1
scheme palette 3.1.8.1
views, displaying 3.1.11
Window List
definition of GLOSSARY
exiting DOS sessions 3.4.2
exiting OS/2 sessions 3.4.1
exiting WIN-OS/2 sessions 3.4.4
push button 2.1.6.1
switching from a DOS session 3.4.2
switching from an OS/2 session 3.4.1
switching from WIN-OS/2 sessions 3.4.4
Window List push button 2.1.6.1
Windows
adding to Desktop 3.1.6
installing 1.2.2 1.2.4.1
printer driver, installing 3.8.1.5
switching between sessions 3.4.1 3.4.2
switching from DOS sessions 3.4.2
switching from OS/2 sessions 3.4.1
using 1.2.4
Windows Groups folder, creation of 3.1.6
Windows program, definition of GLOSSARY
Windows Programs folder, creation of 3.1.6
WordPerfect for Windows with S3, using 4.2.5
workarea, definition of GLOSSARY
working directory, definition of GLOSSARY
Workplace Shell environment 3.2.3
Workplace Shell, definition of GLOSSARY

X
XDFCOPY utility 4.1.6
XGA
screen resolution, changing 3.1.11.7
video adapter 4.2.5
XGA procedures
display override 4.3.5.1
display selection, correcting 4.3.5.2
number of colors, changing 4.3.5.3
screen resolution, changing 4.3.5.3

Z
Zenith Data Systems 4.2.5
ZEOS system 4.2.5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994 Pg. 378 / 378

You might also like